Teledyne Microphone T700 Users Manual

T700 to the manual 9c770034-caf1-4867-8b1e-24bde634536b

2015-02-03

: Teledyne Teledyne-Microphone-T700-Users-Manual-464484 teledyne-microphone-t700-users-manual-464484 teledyne pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 392

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Operation Manual

Model T700
Dynamic Dilution Calibrator
Also supports operation of

Model T700U
(when used in conjunction with T700U addendum, PN 06876)

© TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION (TAPI)
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-5201
USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190
Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: api-sales@teledyne.com
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/

06873B DCN6388
08 May 2012

ABOUT TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION (TAPI)
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne Instruments, Inc., is a
worldwide market leader in the design and manufacture of precision analytical instrumentation used for air
quality monitoring, continuous emissions monitoring, and specialty process monitoring applications. Founded
in San Diego, California, in 1988, TAPI introduced a complete line of Air Quality Monitoring (AQM)
instrumentation, which comply with the United States Environmental Protection Administration (EPA) and
international requirements for the measurement of criteria pollutants, including CO, SO2, NOX and Ozone.
Since 1988 TAPI has combined state-of-the-art technology, proven measuring principles, stringent quality
assurance systems and world class after-sales support to deliver the best products and customer satisfaction in
the business.
For further information on our company, our complete range of products, and the applications that they serve,
please visit www.teledyne-api.com or contact sales@teledyne-api.com.
NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT

All trademarks, registered trademarks, brand names or product names appearing in this document are the
property of their respective owners and are used herein for identification purposes only.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

06873B DCN6388

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual for the purpose of avoiding personal injury or
instrument damage. Please read these messages carefully. Each safety message is associated with a safety
alert symbol, and are placed throughout this manual and inside the instrument. The symbols with messages are
defined as follows:
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard

HAZARD: Strong oxidizer
GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying message for
specific information.
CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning
Do Not Touch: Touching some parts of the instrument without
protection or proper tools could result in damage to the part(s) and/or the
instrument.
Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are to be
performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.
Electrical Ground: This symbol inside the instrument marks the central
safety grounding point for the instrument.
CAUTION
This instrument should only be used for the purpose and in the
manner described in this manual. If you use this instrument in a
manner other than that for which it was intended, unpredictable
behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences.
NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es)!

Note

For Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of this
instrument or any other Teledyne API product, please contact Teledyne
API’s Customer Service Department:
Telephone: 800-324-5190

Email: api-customerservice@teledyne.com

or by accessing various service options on our website:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/.

06873B DCN6388

iii

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ
Des consignes de sécurité importantes sont fournies tout au long du présent manuel dans le but d’éviter des
blessures corporelles ou d’endommager les instruments. Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes. Chaque
consigne de sécurité est représentée par un pictogramme d’alerte de sécurité; ces pictogrammes se retrouvent
dans ce manuel et à l’intérieur des instruments. Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes :
AVERTISSEMENT : Risque de choc électrique

DANGER : Oxydant puissant

AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE :
complémentaire pour des renseignements spécifiques

Lire

consigne

MISE EN GARDE : Surface chaude

Ne pas toucher : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou
sans les outils appropriés pourrait entraîner des dommages aux pièces ou à
l’instrument.
Pictogramme « technicien » : Toutes les opérations portant ce symbole doivent
être effectuées uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifié.
Mise à la terre : Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central
de la mise à la terre sécuritaire de l’instrument.

MISE EN GARDE
Cet instrument doit être utilisé aux fins décrites et de la manière décrite dans
ce manuel. Si vous utilisez cet instrument d’une autre manière que celle pour
laquelle il a été prévu, l’instrument pourrait se comporter de façon imprévisible
et entraîner des conséquences dangereuses.
NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour échantillonner des gaz
combustibles!

06873B DCN6388

WARRANTY
WARRANTY POLICY (02024F)
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne
Instruments, Inc., provides that:

Prior to shipment, TAPI equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment
failure occur, TAPI assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.
COVERAGE

After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, TAPI stands ready to
provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers
in the industry. All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting are to be
performed by the customer.
NON-TAPI MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by TAPI is warranted and will be repaired to the
extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment
manufacturer’s warranty.
PRODUCT RETURN

All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for
handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the
repair, the equipment will be returned, freight prepaid.

The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale can be reviewed at http://www.teledyneapi.com/terms_and_conditions.asp

CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation
Failure to comply with proper anti-Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) handling and
packing instructions and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) procedures when
returning parts for repair or calibration may void your warranty. For anti-ESD handling
and packing instructions please refer to “Packing Components for Return to Teledyne
API’s Customer Service” in the Primer on Electro-Static Discharge section of this
manual, and for RMA procedures please refer to our Website at http://www.teledyneapi.com under Customer Support > Return Authorization.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

06873B DCN6388

ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Presented here is information regarding the documents that are included with this
manual (Structure) and how the content is organized (Organization).
STRUCTURE

This T700 manual, PN 06873, is comprised of multiple documents, assembled in PDF
format, as listed below.
Part No.

Rev

Name/Description

06873

Operation Manual, T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

05623

Appendix A, Menu Trees and related software documentation

06852

Spare Parts List (in Appendix B of this manual)

07565

Recommended Spares Stocking Levels (in Appendix B of this manual)

05625

Appendix C, Repair Form

069140100

Interconnect List (in Appendix D of this manual)
Appendix D, Schematics:

06914

Interconnect Diagram

04420

SCH, PCA 04120, UV DETECTOR

04422

SCH, PCA 04144, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR

04421

SCH, PCA 04166, UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY

04354

SCH, PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface

04524

SCH, PCA 04523, RELAY CARD

05698

SCH, PCA 05697 ADPTR, EXT VALVE DRIVER

05803

SCH, PCA 05802, MOTHERBOARD, GEN-5

06698

SCH, PCA 06670, INTRFC, LCD TCH SCRN,

06882

SCH, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD

06731

SCH, AUX-I/O BOARD

Note

We recommend that this manual be read in its entirety before any attempt is
made to operate the instrument.
ORGANIZATION

This manual is divided among three main parts and a collection of appendices at the end.
Part I contains introductory information that includes an overview of the calibrator,
descriptions of the available options, specifications, installation and connection
instructions, and the initial calibration and functional checks..
Part II comprises the operating instructions, which include basic, advanced and remote
operation, calibration, diagnostics, testing, validating and verifying.
Part III provides detailed technical information, such as principles of operation,
maintenance, and troubleshooting and repair. It includes Frequently Asked Questions
06873B DCN6388

vii

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

and a Glossary, and also has a section that provides important information about electrostatic discharge and avoiding its consequences.
The appendices at the end of this manual provide support information such as, versionspecific software documentation, lists of spare parts and schematics.

viii

06873B DCN6388

REVISION HISTORY
This section provides information regarding the initial release and subsequent changes to this manual.
T700 Manual, PN 06873 Rev B, DCN 6388
Date
2012 May 08

Rev

DCN

6388

Change Summary
Administrative changes: restructure/reformat
Technical changes: various

2010 October 06

5839

Initial Release

Document part numbers and revision letters included in the initial release are as follows:
PN

Rev

Document

06873

Operation Manual, T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

05623

Appendix A, Menu Trees w/ related software documentation

06852

Spare Parts List (in Appendix B of this manual)

05625

Appendix C, Repair Form

069140100

Interconnect List (in Appendix D of this manual)

06914

Interconnect Diagram

04420

SCH, PCA 04120, UV DETECTOR

04422

SCH, PCA 04144, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR

04421

SCH, PCA 04166, UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY

04354

SCH, PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface

04524

SCH, PCA 04523, RELAY CARD

05698

SCH, PCA 05697 ADPTR, EXT VALVE DRIVER

05803

SCH, PCA 05802, MOTHERBOARD, GEN-5

06698

SCH, PCA 06670, INTRFC, LCD TCH SCRN,

06882

SCH, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD

06731

SCH, AUX-I/O BOARD

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

06873B DCN6388

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I – GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................... 21
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 23
1.1. T700 Calibrator Overview ............................................................................................................................23
1.2. Features .......................................................................................................................................................23
1.3. Options.........................................................................................................................................................24

2. SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS............................................................................... 27
2.1. Specifications ...............................................................................................................................................27
2.2. Approvals and Certifications ........................................................................................................................28
2.2.1. Safety.....................................................................................................................................................28
2.2.2. EMC .......................................................................................................................................................29
2.2.3. Other Type Certifications .......................................................................................................................29

3. GETTING STARTED ........................................................................................................... 31
3.1. Unpacking and Initial Setup .........................................................................................................................31
3.1.1. VENTILATION CLEARANCE ................................................................................................................32
3.2. Calibrator Layout..........................................................................................................................................32
3.2.1. Front Panel ............................................................................................................................................33
3.2.2. Rear Panel .............................................................................................................................................36
3.2.3. Internal Layout .......................................................................................................................................38
3.3. Connections and Setup................................................................................................................................40
3.3.1. Electrical Connections ...........................................................................................................................40
3.3.1.1. Connecting Power ..........................................................................................................................40
3.3.1.2. Connecting Analog Outputs ...........................................................................................................41
3.3.1.3. Connecting the Status Outputs ......................................................................................................41
3.3.1.4. Connecting the Control Inputs........................................................................................................43
3.3.1.5. Connecting the Control Outputs .....................................................................................................45
3.3.1.6. Connecting the External Valve Driver Option.................................................................................46
3.3.1.7. Connecting the Communications Interfaces ..................................................................................47
3.3.2. Pneumatic Connections.........................................................................................................................54
3.3.2.1. About Diluent Gas (Zero Air) ..........................................................................................................54
3.3.2.2. About Calibration Gas ....................................................................................................................54
3.3.2.3. Connecting Diluent Gas to the Calibrator.......................................................................................58
3.3.2.4. Connecting Calibration Source Gas to the T700 Calibrator ...........................................................58
3.3.2.5. Connecting Gas Outputs from the Calibrator .................................................................................59
3.3.2.6. Other Pneumatic Connections .......................................................................................................63
3.3.3. Permeation Tube Setup for the T700 ....................................................................................................74
3.3.4. Permeation Tube Calculation ................................................................................................................75
3.4. Startup, Functional Checks, and Initial calibration.......................................................................................77
3.4.1. Start Up..................................................................................................................................................77
3.4.2. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................77
3.4.3. Functional Checks .................................................................................................................................80
3.4.4. Setting Up the Calibration Gas Inlet Ports.............................................................................................81
3.4.5. Default Gas Types .................................................................................................................................81
3.4.6. User Defined Gas Types .......................................................................................................................81
3.4.6.1. User Defined Gas Types – General ...............................................................................................81
3.4.6.2. User Defined Gas Types – Defining the Gas Name ......................................................................83
3.4.6.3. User Defined Gas Types – Setting the MOLAR MASS..................................................................84
3.4.6.4. Enabling and Disabling Gas Types ................................................................................................86
3.4.7. Defining Calibration Source Gas Cylinders ...........................................................................................87
3.4.7.1. Setting Up the Ports with Single Gas Cylinders .............................................................................87
3.4.7.2. Setting Up the Ports with Multiple Gas Cylinders...........................................................................89

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.4.8. Selecting an Operating Mode for the O3 Generator..............................................................................90
3.4.8.1. CNST (CONSTANT).......................................................................................................................90
3.4.8.2. REF (REFERENCE).......................................................................................................................90
3.4.8.3. BNCH (BENCH) .............................................................................................................................90
3.4.9. Setting the T700’s Total Gas Flow Rate ................................................................................................91

PART II – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................. 93
4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES AND BASIC OPERATION .................................... 95
4.1. STANDBY MODE ........................................................................................................................................98
4.1.1. Test Functions .......................................................................................................................................99
4.2. GENERATE MODE................................................................................................................................... 102
4.2.1. GENERATE  AUTO: Basic Generation of Calibration Mixtures...................................................... 104
4.2.2. GENERATE  MAN: Generating Calibration Mixtures Manually ...................................................... 106
4.2.2.1. Determining the Source Gas Flow Rate...................................................................................... 106
4.2.2.2. Determining the Diluent Gas Flow Rate ...................................................................................... 107
4.2.2.3. Determining the Diluent Gas Flow Rate with the Optional O3 Generator Installed ..................... 107
4.2.2.4. Setting the Source Gas and Diluent Flow Rates Using the GENERATE  MAN Menu ............ 108
4.2.3. GENERATE  GPT: Performing a Gas Phase Titration Calibration ................................................. 109
4.2.3.1. GPT Theory ................................................................................................................................. 109
4.2.3.2. Choosing an Input Concentration for the NO .............................................................................. 109
4.2.3.3. Determining the TOTAL FLOW for GPT Calibration Mixtures .................................................... 110
4.2.3.4. T700 Calibrator GPT Operation .................................................................................................. 111
4.2.3.5. Initiating a GPT Calibration Gas Generation............................................................................... 112
4.2.4. GENERATE  GPTPS: Performing a Gas Phase Titration Pre-Set ................................................. 113
4.2.4.1. T700 Calibrator GPTPS Operation.............................................................................................. 113
4.2.4.2. Initiating a GPT Pre-Set............................................................................................................... 115
4.2.5. GENERATE  PURGE: Activating the T700’s Purge Feature .......................................................... 116
4.2.6. GENERATE ACT>: VIEWING CONCENTRATIONS Generated from Multi-Gas Cylinders........... 118
4.2.6.1. Using the T700 Calibrator as an O3 Photometer......................................................................... 118
4.3. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SEQUENCES ............................................................................................ 119
4.3.1. SETUP  SEQ: Programming Calibration Sequences...................................................................... 119
4.3.1.1. Activating a Sequence from the T700 Front Panel ..................................................................... 121
4.3.1.2. Naming a Sequence .................................................................................................................... 122
4.3.1.3. Setting the Repeat Count for a Sequence .................................................................................. 123
4.3.1.4. Using the T700’s Internal Clock to Trigger Sequences............................................................... 124
4.3.1.5. Setting Up Control Inputs for a Sequence................................................................................... 127
4.3.1.6. Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence................................................................................ 128
4.3.1.7. Setting the PROGRESS Reporting Mode for the Sequences..................................................... 130
4.3.2. Adding Sequence Steps ..................................................................................................................... 131
4.3.2.1. The GENERATE Step ................................................................................................................. 132
4.3.2.2. The GPT Step.............................................................................................................................. 133
4.3.2.3. The GPTPS Step......................................................................................................................... 134
4.3.2.4. The PURGE Step ........................................................................................................................ 135
4.3.2.5. The STANDBY Step .................................................................................................................... 135
4.3.2.6. The DURATION Step .................................................................................................................. 136
4.3.2.7. The EXECSEQ Step.................................................................................................................... 136
4.3.2.8. The CC OUTPUT Step ................................................................................................................ 138
4.3.2.9. The MANUAL Gas Generation Step ........................................................................................... 139
4.3.2.10. Deleting or Editing an Individual Step in a Sequence ............................................................... 140
4.3.3. Deleting a Sequence .......................................................................................................................... 141
4.4. SETUP  CFG ......................................................................................................................................... 142
4.5. SETUP  CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock and Adjusting Speed........................................ 143
4.5.1. Setting the Internal Clock’s Time and Day ......................................................................................... 143
4.5.2. Adjusting the Internal Clock’s Speed .................................................................................................. 144
4.6. SETUP  PASS ....................................................................................................................................... 145
4.7. SETUP  COMM: Communications Ports............................................................................................... 147
4.7.1. ID (Machine Identification) .................................................................................................................. 147

xii

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.7.2. INET (Ethernet)................................................................................................................................... 148
4.7.3. COM1 and COM2 (Mode, Baud Rate and Test Port)......................................................................... 148
4.8. SETUP  MORE  FLOW...................................................................................................................... 148
4.9. SETUP  MORE  VARS: Internal Variables (VARS)........................................................................... 148
4.10. SETUP  MORE  DIAG: dIAGNOSTICS fUNCTIONS...................................................................... 151
4.10.1.  TEST CHAN OUTPUT: Using the TEST Channel Analog Output............................................... 151
4.10.1.1. Configuring the Test Channel Analog Output ........................................................................... 151
4.10.1.2. Selecting a Test Channel Function to Output ........................................................................... 154
4.10.1.3. Test Channel Voltage Range Configuration.............................................................................. 156
4.10.1.4. Turning the Test Channel Over-Range Feature ON/OFF ......................................................... 157
4.10.1.5. Adding a Recorder Offset to the Test Channel ......................................................................... 158
4.10.1.6. Test Channel Calibration........................................................................................................... 160
4.10.1.7. AIN Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 165
4.11. SETUP  LVL: Setting up and using LEADS (Dasibi) Operating Levels .............................................. 166
4.11.1. General Information about LEADS LEVELS .................................................................................... 166
4.11.2. Dot commands.................................................................................................................................. 166
4.11.3. Levels................................................................................................................................................ 167
4.11.4. Activating an existing LEVEL............................................................................................................ 167
4.11.5. Programming New LEVELS ............................................................................................................. 168
4.11.5.1. Creating a GENERATE LEVEL................................................................................................. 169
4.11.5.2. Creating a GPT LEVEL ............................................................................................................. 170
4.11.5.3. Creating a GPTPS LEVEL ........................................................................................................ 171
4.11.5.4. Creating a MANUAL LEVEL...................................................................................................... 172
4.11.5.5. Editing or Deleting a LEVEL...................................................................................................... 173
4.11.6. CONFIGURING LEVEL Status Blocks ............................................................................................. 174

5. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND REMOTE OPERATION ............................................. 175
5.1. Data Terminal/Communication Equipment (DTE DCE)............................................................................ 175
5.2. Communication Modes, Baud Rate and Port Testing ................................................................................... 176
5.2.1. Communication Modes ....................................................................................................................... 176
5.2.2. COM Port Baud Rate .......................................................................................................................... 179
5.2.3. COM Port Testing ............................................................................................................................... 180
5.3. RS-485 (Option) ........................................................................................................................................ 181
5.4. Remote Access via the Ethernet............................................................................................................... 181
5.4.1. Configuring the Ethernet Interface using DHCP................................................................................. 181
5.4.1.1. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses........................................................................ 184
5.4.2. Changing the Calibrator’s HOSTNAME.............................................................................................. 186
5.4.3. USB PORT (Option) for Remote Access ............................................................................................ 187

6. REMOTE OPERATION ..................................................................................................... 189
6.1. Computer Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 189
6.1.1. Remote Control via APICOM.............................................................................................................. 189
6.2. Interactive Mode........................................................................................................................................ 190
6.2.1. Remote Control via a Terminal Emulation Program ........................................................................... 190
6.2.1.1. Help Commands in Interactive Mode .......................................................................................... 190
6.2.1.2. Command Syntax ........................................................................................................................ 191
6.2.1.3. Data Types .................................................................................................................................. 192
6.2.1.4. Status Reporting.......................................................................................................................... 192
6.2.1.5. General Message Format............................................................................................................ 193
6.3. Remote Access by Modem ....................................................................................................................... 193
6.4. Password Security for Serial Remote communications ............................................................................ 196

7. CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION ............................................................................... 197
7.1. Viewing the Performance Statistics for the T700’s MFC’s....................................................................... 197
7.2. Calibrating the Output of the T700’s MFC’s.............................................................................................. 199
7.2.1. Setup for Verification and Calibration of the T700’s MFC’s................................................................ 200
7.2.2. Verifying and Calibrating the T700’s MFC’s ....................................................................................... 201
7.3. Verifying and Calibrating the T700’s Optional O3 Photometer.................................................................. 202
7.3.1. Setup for Verifying O3 Photometer Performance ............................................................................... 202

06873B DCN6388

xiii

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.3.2. Verifying O3 Photometer Performance............................................................................................... 203
7.3.3. Setup for Calibration of the O3 Photometer ....................................................................................... 204
7.3.3.1. Setup Using Direct Connections ................................................................................................. 204
7.3.3.2. Setup Using a Calibration Manifold ............................................................................................. 205
7.3.3.3. Calibration Manifold Exhaust/Vent Line ...................................................................................... 205
7.3.4. Performing an O3 Photometer External Calibration ............................................................................ 205
7.3.4.1. Photometer Zero Calibration ....................................................................................................... 206
7.3.4.2. Photometer Span Calibration ...................................................................................................... 207
7.3.5. O3 Photometer Dark Calibration......................................................................................................... 208
7.3.6. O3 Photometer Gas Flow Calibration ................................................................................................. 209
7.3.7. O3 Photometer BackPressure Compensation Calibration ................................................................. 210
7.4. Calibrating the O3 Generator .................................................................................................................... 211
7.4.1. Setup for Verification and Calibration the O3 Generator..................................................................... 211
7.4.1.1. Setup Using Direct Connections ................................................................................................. 211
7.4.2. O3 Generator Calibration Procedure .................................................................................................. 213
7.4.2.1. Viewing O3 Generator Calibration Points .................................................................................... 213
7.4.2.2. Adding or Editing O3 Generator Calibration Points ..................................................................... 214
7.4.2.3. Deleting O3 Generator Calibration Points.................................................................................... 215
7.4.2.4. Turning O3 Generator Calibration Points ON / OFF .................................................................... 216
7.4.2.5. Performing an Automatic Calibration of the Optional O3 Generator............................................ 217
7.5. T700 Gas Pressure Sensor Calibration .................................................................................................... 218
7.5.1.1. Calibrating the Diluent, Cal Gas Optional O3 Generator Pressure Sensors ............................... 220
7.5.1.2. Calibrating the Optional O3 Photometer Sample Gas Pressure Sensors ................................... 221

PART III – MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE ........................................................................ 223
8. MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................ 225
8.1. Maintenance Schedule ............................................................................................................................. 225
8.2. Maintenance Procedures .......................................................................................................................... 227
8.2.1. Auto Leak Check................................................................................................................................. 227
8.2.1.1. Equipment Required.................................................................................................................... 227
8.2.1.2. Setup Auto Leak Check............................................................................................................... 227
8.2.1.3. Performing the Auto Leak Check Procedure............................................................................... 230
8.2.1.4. Returning the T700 to Service after Performing an Auto Leak Check ........................................ 230
8.2.2. Cleaning or Replacing the Absorption Tube....................................................................................... 231
8.2.3. UV Source Lamp Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 232
8.2.4. UV Source Lamp Replacement .......................................................................................................... 233
8.2.5. Ozone Generator UV Lamp Adjustment or Replacement .................................................................. 234

9. TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE ............................................................................. 239
9.1. General Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 239
9.1.1. Fault Diagnosis with WARNING Messages........................................................................................ 240
9.1.2. Fault Diagnosis With Test Functions .................................................................................................. 244
9.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function ........................................................................................... 246
9.2. Using the Analog Output Test Channel .................................................................................................... 248
9.3. Using the Internal Electronic Status LEDs................................................................................................ 249
9.3.1. CPU Status Indicator .......................................................................................................................... 249
9.3.2. Relay PCA Status LEDs ..................................................................................................................... 249
9.3.2.1. I2C Bus Watchdog Status LEDs .................................................................................................. 249
9.3.2.2. O3 Option Status LEDs................................................................................................................ 250
9.3.3. Valve Driver PCA STATUS LEDs....................................................................................................... 251
9.4. Subsystem Checkout ................................................................................................................................ 252
9.4.1. Verify Subsystem Calibration.............................................................................................................. 252
9.4.2. AC Main Power ................................................................................................................................... 252
9.4.3. DC Power Supply................................................................................................................................ 253
9.4.4. I2C Bus ................................................................................................................................................ 254
9.4.5. Touchscreen Interface ........................................................................................................................ 254
9.4.6. LCD Display Module ........................................................................................................................... 255
9.4.7. Relay PCA .......................................................................................................................................... 255

xiv

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.4.8. Valve Driver PCA ................................................................................................................................ 255
9.4.9. Input Gas Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly ..................................................................................... 256
9.4.10. PHOTOMETER O3 Generator Pressure/FLOW SENSOR Assembly ............................................. 257
9.4.11. Motherboard...................................................................................................................................... 258
9.4.11.1. A/D Functions ............................................................................................................................ 258
9.4.11.2. Test Channel / Analog Outputs Voltage .................................................................................... 258
9.4.11.3. Status Outputs........................................................................................................................... 260
9.4.11.4. Control Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 261
9.4.11.5. Control Outputs ......................................................................................................................... 261
9.4.12. CPU .................................................................................................................................................. 262
9.4.13. The Calibrator Doesn’t Appear on the Lan or Internet...................................................................... 262
9.4.14. RS-232 Communications.................................................................................................................. 263
9.4.14.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 263
9.4.14.2. Troubleshooting Calibrator/Modem or Terminal Operation....................................................... 263
9.4.15. Temperature Problems ..................................................................................................................... 264
9.4.15.1. Box / Chassis Temperature....................................................................................................... 264
9.4.15.2. Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature ............................................................................. 264
9.4.15.3. UV Lamp Temperature .............................................................................................................. 264
9.4.15.4. Ozone Generator Temperature ................................................................................................. 265
9.5. TroubleShooting the Optional O3 Photometer .......................................................................................... 265
9.5.1. Dynamic Problems with the Optional O3 Photometer ........................................................................ 265
9.5.1.1. Noisy or Unstable O3 Readings at Zero ...................................................................................... 265
9.5.1.2. Noisy, Unstable, or Non-Linear Span O3 Readings .................................................................... 266
9.5.1.3. Slow Response to Changes in Concentration............................................................................. 266
9.5.1.4. The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings........................... 266
9.5.1.5. Cannot Zero................................................................................................................................. 266
9.5.1.6. Cannot Span................................................................................................................................ 266
9.5.2. Checking Measure / Reference Valve ................................................................................................ 267
9.5.3. Checking The UV Lamp Power Supply .............................................................................................. 268
9.6. TroubleShooting the Optional O3 generator.............................................................................................. 269
9.6.1. Checking The UV Source Lamp Power Supply.................................................................................. 269
9.7. Service Procedures................................................................................................................................... 270
9.7.1. Disk-On-Module Replacement Procedure .......................................................................................... 270
9.8. Technical Assistance ................................................................................................................................ 270
9.9. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) ........................................................................................................ 271

10. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION ....................................................................................... 273
10.1. Basic Principles of Dynamic Dilution Calibration .................................................................................... 273
10.1.1. Gas Phase Titration Mixtures for O3 and NO2................................................................................. 275
10.2. Pneumatic Operation .............................................................................................................................. 276
10.2.1. Gas Flow Control .............................................................................................................................. 277
10.2.1.1. Diluent and Source Gas Flow Control ....................................................................................... 277
10.2.1.2. Flow Control Assemblies for Optional O3 Components ............................................................ 278
10.2.1.3. Critical Flow Orifices.................................................................................................................. 279
10.2.2. Internal Gas Pressure Sensors......................................................................................................... 280
10.3. Electronic Operation ............................................................................................................................... 281
10.3.1. Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 281
10.3.2. CPU .................................................................................................................................................. 282
10.3.2.1. Disk-on-Module (DOM).............................................................................................................. 283
10.3.2.2. Flash Chip ................................................................................................................................. 283
10.3.3. Relay PCA ........................................................................................................................................ 284
10.3.3.1. Valve Control ............................................................................................................................. 285
10.3.3.2. Heater Control ........................................................................................................................... 285
10.3.3.3. Relay PCA Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry ....................................................................... 285
10.3.3.4. Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator (D1)......................................................................................... 286
10.3.4. Valve Driver PCA .............................................................................................................................. 287
10.3.4.1. Valve Driver PCA Watchdog Indicator ...................................................................................... 287
10.3.5. Motherboard...................................................................................................................................... 288

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.3.5.1. A to D Conversion ..................................................................................................................... 288
10.3.5.2. Sensor Inputs ............................................................................................................................ 288
10.3.5.3. Thermistor Interface .................................................................................................................. 288
10.3.5.4. Analog Outputs.......................................................................................................................... 288
10.3.5.5. External Digital I/O..................................................................................................................... 289
10.3.5.6. I2C Data Bus .............................................................................................................................. 289
10.3.5.7. Power-up Circuit ........................................................................................................................ 289
10.3.6. Input Gas Pressure Sensor PCA ...................................................................................................... 289
10.3.7. Power Supply and Circuit Breaker.................................................................................................... 290
10.4. Front Panel Touchscreen/Display Interface ........................................................................................... 291
10.4.1.1. Front Panel Interface PCA ........................................................................................................ 291
10.5. Software Operation................................................................................................................................. 292
10.6. O3 Generator Operation.......................................................................................................................... 293
10.6.1. Principle of Photolytic O3 Generation ............................................................................................... 293
10.6.2. O3 Generator – Pneumatic Operation .............................................................................................. 294
10.6.3. O3 Generator – Electronic Operation ............................................................................................... 295
10.6.3.1. O3 Generator Temperature Control........................................................................................... 296
10.6.3.2. Pneumatic Sensor for the O3 Generator.................................................................................... 297
10.7. Photometer Operation ............................................................................................................................ 297
10.7.1. Measurement Method....................................................................................................................... 298
10.7.1.1. Calculating O3 Concentration .................................................................................................... 298
10.7.1.2. The Measurement / Reference Cycle........................................................................................ 299
10.7.1.3. The Absorption Path.................................................................................................................. 301
10.7.1.4. Interferent Rejection .................................................................................................................. 301
10.7.2. Photometer Layout............................................................................................................................ 302
10.7.3. Photometer Pneumatic Operation .................................................................................................... 302
10.7.4. Photometer Electronic Operation...................................................................................................... 303
10.7.4.1. O3 Photometer Temperature Control ........................................................................................ 304
10.7.4.2. Pneumatic Sensors for the O3 Photometer ............................................................................... 304

11. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE .......................................................... 305
11.1. How Static Charges are Created............................................................................................................ 305
11.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage ......................................................................................... 306
11.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage ..................................................................................................... 307
11.4. Basic Principles of Static Control............................................................................................................ 308
11.4.1. General Rules ................................................................................................................................... 308
11.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance ................................................. 310
11.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack ................................................................................................ 310
11.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench........................................................................................ 310
11.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back......................................................... 311
11.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne API’s Customer Service.................................................... 311
11.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API’s Customer Service .................................... 312

xvi

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1: T700 Front Panel Layout ......................................................................................................................33
Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts ......................................................................35
Figure 3-4: T700 Rear Panel Layout .......................................................................................................................36
Figure 3-5: T700 Internal Layout – Top View – Base Unit ......................................................................................38
Figure 3-6: T700 Internal Layout – Top View – with Optional O3 Generator and Photometer................................39
Figure 3-7: T700 Analog Output Connector ............................................................................................................41
Figure 3-8: Status Output Connector ......................................................................................................................42
Figure 3-9: T700 Digital Control Input Connectors..................................................................................................44
Figure 3-10: T700 Digital Control Output Connector...............................................................................................45
Figure 3-11: T700 Rear Panel Valve Driver Installed..............................................................................................46
Figure 3-12: Valve Driver PCA Layout ....................................................................................................................47
Figure 3-13: Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode.............................................................................49
Figure 3-14: Default Pin Assignments for CPU COMM Port Connector (RS-232). ................................................50
Figure 3-15: Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode..............................................................................................52
Figure 3-16: RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram ............................................................53
Figure 3-17: Set up for T700 – Connecting the Basic T700 to a Sample Manifold.................................................59
Figure 3-18: Set up for T700 – Connecting the T700 to a Sample Manifold...........................................................60
Figure 3-19: Set up for T700 – Connecting the T700 to a Calibration Manifold......................................................61
Figure 3-20: Set up for T700 – Connecting the T700 to a Dual Span Gas / Zero Air Manifold ..............................62
Figure 3-21: T700 Pneumatic Diagram – Base Unit................................................................................................63
Figure 3-22: Internal Pneumatics for T700 Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator and GPT Chamber. ................64
Figure 3-23: Internal Pneumatics for T700 Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator and Photometer ......................66
Figure 3-24: Basic T700 with Multiple Calibration Gas MFCs.................................................................................68
Figure 3-25: T700 with Multiple Calibration Gas MFCs and O3 Options 1A and 2A Installed ................................69
Figure 3-26: Permeation Tube Gas Generator Option ............................................................................................70
Figure 3-27: Pneumatic Diagram of T700 with Permeation Generator ...................................................................71
Figure 3-28. Rear Panel with Dual Output Option....................................................................................................76
Figure 3-29: Internal Pneumatics for T700 Calibrator with Optional Dual Gas Output (NOy – Special) .................77
Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display...............................................................................................................................96
Figure 4-2: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Generator and Photometer Options during STANDBY .....................99
Figure 4-3: Viewing T700 Test Functions............................................................................................................. 100
Figure 4-4: Gas Flow through Basic T700 in GENERATE Mode......................................................................... 102
Figure 4-5: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when Generating Non-O3 Source Gas .............................. 103
Figure 4-6: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when Generating O3 .......................................................... 103
Figure 4-7: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when in GPT Mode ........................................................... 111
Figure 4-8: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when in GPTPS Mode....................................................... 114
Figure 4-9: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when in PURGE mode ...................................................... 116
Figure 4-10: T700 the TEST CHANNEL Connector............................................................................................. 151
Figure 4-11: Setup for Calibrating the TEST CHANNEL...................................................................................... 163
Figure 6-1: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface..................................................................................... 190
Figure 7-1: Location of MFC Outlet Ports............................................................................................................. 200
Figure 7-2: Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer ..................................................................................... 202
Figure 7-3: External Photometer Validation Setup – Direct Connections ............................................................ 204
Figure 7-4: External Photometer Validation Setup with Calibration Manifolds..................................................... 205
Figure 7-5: O3 Generator Calibration Setup – Direct Connections....................................................................... 211
Figure 7-6: Pressure Monitor Points – T700 – Basic Unit .................................................................................... 219
Figure 7-7: Pressure Monitor Points – T700 with O3 Options and Multiple Cal MFCs Installed .......................... 219
Figure 8-1: Bypassing the Photometer Sensor PCA and Pump .......................................................................... 227

06873B DCN6388

xvii

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Figure 8-2: Gas Port Setup for Auto-Leak Check Procedure............................................................................... 228
Figure 8-3: Gas Flow for Auto-Leak Check Procedure of Base Model T700’s .................................................... 229
Figure 8-4: Gas Flow for Auto-Leak Check Procedure of T700’s with Optional Photometer............................... 229
Figure 8-5: Photometer Assembly – Lamp Adjustment / Installation ................................................................... 233
Figure 8-6: O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations .................................................... 234
Figure 8-7: Location of O3 Generator Reference Detector Adjustment Pot ......................................................... 235
Figure 9-1: Example of Signal I/O Function ......................................................................................................... 247
Figure 9-2: CPU Status Indicator.......................................................................................................................... 249
Figure 9-3: Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 250
Figure 9-4: Valve Driver PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting................................................................ 251
Figure 9-5: Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA ............................................................................. 253
Figure 10-1: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T700’s with O3 Options Installed ............................. 278
Figure 10-2: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice................................................................................. 279
Figure 10-3: T700 Electronic Block Diagram........................................................................................................ 281
Figure 10-4: T700 CPU Board Annotated ............................................................................................................ 283
Figure 10-5: Relay PCA........................................................................................................................................ 284
Figure 10-6: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram. ............................................................................................... 285
Figure 10-7: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA................................................................................................. 286
Figure 10-8: Status LED Locations – Valve Driver PCA ...................................................................................... 287
Figure 10-9: T700 Power Distribution Block diagram........................................................................................... 290
Figure 10-10: Front Panel Display Interface Block Diagram ................................................................................ 291
Figure 10-11: Schematic of Basic Software Operation ........................................................................................ 292
Figure 10-12: O3 Generator Internal Pneumatics................................................................................................. 293
Figure 10-13: O3 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations............................................................................. 294
Figure 10-14: O3 Generator – Electronic Block Diagram ..................................................................................... 295
Figure 10-15: O3 Generator Electronic Components Location............................................................................. 296
Figure 10-16: O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations ................................................ 297
Figure 10-17: O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Measure Cycle ................................................................................... 300
Figure 10-18: O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Reference Cycle ................................................................................ 300
Figure 10-19: O3 Photometer Absorption Path..................................................................................................... 301
Figure 10-20: O3 Photometer Layout – Top Cover Removed .............................................................................. 302
Figure 10-21: O3 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 303
Figure 11-1: Triboelectric Charging ...................................................................................................................... 305
Figure 11-2: Basic Anti-ESD Work Station........................................................................................................... 308

xviii

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1: Analyzer Options ....................................................................................................................................24
Table 2-1: T700 Dilution System Specifications......................................................................................................27
Table 2-2: T700 Dilution Electrical and Physical Specifications..............................................................................27
Table 2-3: T700 Specifications for Optional Ozone Generator ...............................................................................28
Table 2-4: T700 Specifications for Optional O3 Photometer ...................................................................................28
Table 3-1: Display Screen and Touch Control Description .....................................................................................34
Table 3-2: Rear Panel Description ..........................................................................................................................37
Table 3-3: Status Output Pin Assignments .............................................................................................................42
Table 3-4: T700 Control Input Pin Assignments......................................................................................................43
Table 3-5: T700 Control Output Pin Assignments...................................................................................................45
Table 3-6: NIST Standards for CO2 .........................................................................................................................55
Table 3-7: NIST Standards for CO ..........................................................................................................................56
Table 3-8: NIST Standards for H2S .........................................................................................................................56
Table 3-9: NIST Standards for CH4 .........................................................................................................................56
Table 3-10: NIST Standards for O2 .........................................................................................................................56
Table 3-11: NIST Standards for SO2 .......................................................................................................................57
Table 3-12: NIST Standards for NO ........................................................................................................................57
Table 3-13: NIST Standards for Propane (C3H8).....................................................................................................57
Table 3-14: Operating Mode Valve States for T700 Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator...................................64
Table 3-15: Operating Mode Valve States for T700 Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator and Photometer........66
Table 3-16: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up .............................................................................................78
Table 3-17: T700 Default Gas Types ......................................................................................................................81
Table 3-18: T700 Units of Measure List ..................................................................................................................88
Table 4-1: Calibrator Operating Modes ...................................................................................................................97
Table 4-2: Status of Internal Pneumatics During STANDBY Mode ........................................................................98
Table 4-3: Test Functions Defined ....................................................................................................................... 101
Table 4-4: Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE Mode................................................................... 102
Table 4-5: Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE  GPT Mode...................................................... 111
Table 4-6: Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE  GPTPS Mode................................................. 113
Table 4-7: Internal Pneumatics During Purge Mode ............................................................................................ 116
Table 4-8: Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set Up Attributes ........................................................................ 119
Table 4-9: Calibration SEQUENCE Step Instruction............................................................................................ 120
Table 4-10: Sequence Progress Reporting Mode ................................................................................................ 130
Table 4-11: Password Levels ............................................................................................................................... 145
Table 4-12: Variable Names (VARS) ................................................................................................................... 148
Table 4-13: DIAG – Analog I/O Functions............................................................................................................ 151
Table 4-14: Test Channels Functions available on the T700’s Analog Output .................................................... 154
Table 4-15: Analog Output Voltage Range Min/Max............................................................................................ 156
Table 4-16: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration ................................................................. 163
Table 5-1: COMM Port Communication Modes ................................................................................................... 176
Table 5-2: Ethernet Status Indicators ................................................................................................................... 181
Table 5-3: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties ................................................................................................ 182
Table 6-1: Terminal Mode Software Commands.................................................................................................. 190
Table 6-2: Teledyne API Serial I/O Command Types .......................................................................................... 192
Table 7-1: Examples of MFC Calibration Points .................................................................................................. 199
Table 7-2: T700 Pressure Sensor Calibration Setup............................................................................................ 218
Table 8-1: T700 Maintenance Schedule .............................................................................................................. 226
Table 9-1: Warning Messages in Front Panel Display Param Field..................................................................... 243

06873B DCN6388

xix

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Table 9-2: Test Functions – Indicated Failures .................................................................................................... 245
Table 9-3: Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools......................................................................................... 248
Table 9-4: Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications ................................................................................... 249
Table 9-5: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications ......................................................................................... 250
Table 9-6: Valve Driver Board Watchdog LED Failure Indications ...................................................................... 251
Table 9-7: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications ......................................................................................... 251
Table 9-8: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes ................................................................................... 253
Table 9-9: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels.................................................................................................. 254
Table 9-10: Relay PCA Control Devices .............................................................................................................. 255
Table 9-11: Analog Output Test Function – Nominal Values Voltage Outputs .................................................... 259
Table 9-12: Status Outputs Check ....................................................................................................................... 260
Table 9-13: T700 Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions ............................... 261
Table 9-14: Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions Check ........................ 262
Table 10-1: Relay PCA Status LEDs.................................................................................................................... 286
Table 10-2: T700 Photometer Measurement / Reference Cycle.......................................................................... 299
Table 11-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities .............................................................................. 306
Table 11-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD ....................................................................... 306

LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX A-1: T700 Software Menu Trees, Revision B.7
APPENDIX A-2: T700 Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O, Revision B.7
APPENDIX A-3: T700 Warnings and Test Measurements via Serial I/O, Revision B.7
APPENDIX A-4: T700 Signal I/O Definitions, Revision B.7
APPENDIX A-5: Model T700 Terminal Command Designators, Revision B.7
APPENDIX B - T700 SPARE PARTS LIST
APPENDIX C - REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE
APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS

06873B DCN6388

PART I
–
GENERAL INFORMATION

06873B DCN6388

1. INTRODUCTION
This section provides an overview of the Model T700 calibrator, its features, and its
options.

1.1. T700 CALIBRATOR OVERVIEW
The Model T700 (typically referred to as T700) is a microprocessor-controlled calibrator
for precision gas calibrators. Using a combination of highly accurate mass flow
controllers and compressed sources of standard gases, calibration standards are provided
for multipoint span and zero checks. Up to four gas sources may be used.
The T700 can be equipped with an optional built-in, programmable ozone generator for
accurate, dependable ozone calibrations. The T700 also produces NO2 when blended
with NO gas in the internal GPT chamber. A multi-point linearization curve is used to
control the generator to assure repeatable ozone concentrations. An optional photometer
allows precise control of the ozone generator, both during calibrations and during Gas
Phase Titrations (GPT). To ensure accurate NO2 output, the calibrator with photometer
option measures the ozone concentration prior to doing a GPT.
As many as 50 independent calibration sequences may be programmed into the T700,
covering time periods of up to one year. The setup of sequences is simple and intuitive.
These sequences may be actuated manually, automatically, or by a remote signal. The
sequences may be uploaded remotely, including remote editing. All programs are
maintained in non-volatile memory.
The T700 design emphasizes fast response, repeatability, overall accuracy and ease of
operation. It may be combined with the Model 701 Zero Air Generator to provide the
ultimate in easy to use, precise calibration for your gas calibrators.

1.2. FEATURES
Some of the exceptional features of your T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator are:

06873B DCN6388



Advanced T-Series electronics



LCD color graphics display with touch screen interface



Microprocessor control for versatility



Bi-directional USB (optional), RS-232, optional RS-485, and 10/100Base-T Ethernet
for remote operation



Precise calibration gas generation for Ozone, NO, NO2, CO, HC, H2S, SO2



12 independent timers for sequences



Nested sequences (up to 5 levels)

Introduction

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator



Software linearization of Mass Flow Controllers (MFC)



4 calibration gas ports configurable for single or multi-blend gases



Optional 3rd MFC for wide dynamic range



Optional gas phase titration chamber



Optional zone generator and photometer to allow use as primary or transfer
standard



Inlets for external ozone reference sources

1.3. OPTIONS
The options available for your analyzer are present in with name, option number, a
description and/or comments, and if applicable, cross-references to technical details in this
manual, such as setup and calibration. To order these options or to learn more about them,
please contact the Sales Department of Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instruments at:
TOLL-FREE:
PHONE:
FAX:
EMAIL:
WEBSITE:

800-324-5190
+1 858-657-9800
+1 858-657-9816
apisales@teledyne.com
http://www.teledyne-api.com/

Table 1-1: Analyzer Options
Option

Option
Number

Flow Options

Reference

For mass flow control (MFC)
7A
7B
8A
8B
9

Calibration Options

Source MFC 0-50 CC/MIN (Replaces 0-100 CC/MIN)
Source MFC 0-200 CC/MIN (Replaces 0-100 CC/MIN)
Diluent MFC 0-5 SLPM (Replaces 0-10 SLPM)
Diluent MFC 0-20 SLPM (Replaces 0-10 SLPM)
Third MFC (Can only be on source)

5
73

Dual Gas Output (NOy – special)

Rack Mounting

Section 3.3.2.6

Gas generators

Internal Ozone (O3) Generator with
Optical Feedback and GPT Mixing Chamber
UV Photometer Module (to increase accuracy of O3
Generator, Option 1A)
Permeation Tube Oven

Section 3.3.2.6
Section 3.3.2.6
Section 3.3.3
Section 3.3.4
Figure 3-28

For mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks
20A

Description/Notes

Rack mount brackets with 26 in. (660 mm) chassis slides

N/A

20B

Rack mount brackets with 24 in. (610 mm) chassis slides

N/A

Rack mount brackets only

N/A

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Option
Number

Option

Description/Notes

Introduction

Reference

CAUTION – GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
THE T700 CALIBRATOR WEIGHS CLOSE TO 18 KG (40 POUNDS) WITH ALL OPTIONS. TO AVOID
PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND THAT TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY IT BUT FIRST
DISCONNECTING ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE CALIBRATOR BEFORE MOVING IT.
Parts Kits

Spare parts and expendables for 1-year operation
46A
46B
46C

Communications

Kit, Spares for One Unit
Photometer Kit, Spares for One Unit
Photometer W/ IZS Spares Kit For 1 Unit

(Customer Svc)
(Customer Svc)
(Customer Svc)

For remote serial, network and Internet communication with the analyzer.
Type

Description
Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-25M cable, about
1.8 m long. Used to interface with older computers or
code activated switches with DB-25 serial connectors.

Section 3.3.1.7

60A

RS-232

60B

RS-232

Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about
1.8 m length.

Section 3.3.1.7

60C

Ethernet

Patch cable, 2 meters long, used for Internet and LAN
communications.

Section 3.3.1.7,
4.7.2, and 5.4

60D

USB

Cable for direct connection between instrument (rear
panel USB port) and personal computer.

Section 3.3.1.7

USB Port

64A

For rear panel connection to personal computer.

RS-232 Multidrop

Cables

Multidrop/LVDS card seated on the analyzer’s CPU card.
Each instrument in the multidrop network requres this card and a
communications cable (Option 60B).

Sections 4.7 and
5.4.3
Sections 3.3.1.7
and 4.7.3

External Valve Driver Capability - For driving up to eight, 8-watt valves
48A

12V External Valve Driver Capability

48B

24V External Valve Driver Capability

Section 3.3.1.6

NIST Traceable, Primary Standard Certification for use as a Primary Ozone Standard if purchased with the O3
generator and photometer options, 1A and 2A, respectively.
95A

Factory Calibration

95B

Calibration as a Primary Standard

95C

Calibration to NIST-SRP

Section 3.3.2.2

For this application the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator’s performance is calibrated to Standard Reference Photometer
(SRP). Calibrators ordered with this option are verified and validated in accordance with procedures prescribed by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix D.
Special Features
Built in features, software activated

N/A

Maintenance Mode Switch, located inside the instrument, places
the analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling,
yet ignore calibration, diagnostic, and reset instrument commands.
This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to
Multidrop or Hessen protocol networks.

N/A

Call Customer Service for activation.

N/A

Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display
messages in a language other than the instrument’s default
language.

N/A

Call Customer Service for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing
the second language.

06873B DCN6388

Introduction

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

06873B DCN6388

2. SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS
2.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2-1: T700 Dilution System Specifications
Parameter

Specification

Flow Measurement Accuracy

1.0% of Full Scale

Repeatability of Flow Control

0.2% of Full Scale

Linearity of Flow Measurement

0.5% of Full Scale

Flow Range of Diluent Air

0 to 10 SLPM – Optional Ranges: 0 to 5 SLPM; 0 to 20 SLPM

Flow Range of Cylinder Gases

0 to 100 cc/min – Optional Ranges: 0 to 50 cc/min; 0 to 200 cc/min

Zero Air Required

10 SLPM @ 30 PSIG Optional: 20 SLPM @ 30 PSIG

CAL Gas Input Ports

4 (configurable)

Diluent Gas Input Ports

Response Time

60 Seconds (98%)

Table 2-2: T700 Dilution Electrical and Physical Specifications
Parameter
AC Power
Actual Power Draw
Analog Outputs
Analog Output Ranges (Test
Channel)
Analog Output Resolution

Standard I/O

Optional I/O
Operating Temperature Range
Humidity Range

06873B DCN6388

Specification
85V-264V, 47Hz-63Hz
At 115V ~ Start up: 110 W, Steady State: 140 W
At 230V ~ Start up: 159 W, Steady State: 148 W
1 user configurable output
10V, 5V, 1V, 0.1V (selectable)
Range with 5% under/over-range
1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)
1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T
2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud)
2 USB device ports
12 opto-isolated digital control outputs
12 opto-isolated digital control inputs
8 opto-isolated digital status outputs
1 USB com port
1 RS485
Multidrop RS232
5-40ºC
0 - 95% RH, non-condensing

Specifications and Approvals

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Parameter

Specification

Operating Altitude
Materials
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight

10,000 ft Maximum
Cal Gas Output Wetted Surfaces: PTFE.
Cal Gas Output Manifold: Glass-coated Steel
7” x 17” x 24” (178 mm x 432 mm x 609 mm)
31 lbs (14.06 kg);
39.2 lbs (17.78 kg) with optional photometer, GPT, and O3 generator

Table 2-3: T700 Specifications for Optional Ozone Generator
Parameter

Specification

Maximum Output

6 ppm LPM

Minimum Output

100 ppb LPM

Response Time:

180 seconds to 98%

Optical Feedback

Standard

Stability (7 days)

1% with photometer option
3% without photometer option

Linearity

1% with photometer option
3% without photometer option

Table 2-4: T700 Specifications for Optional O3 Photometer
Parameter

Specification

Full Scale Range

100 ppb to 10 ppm ; User Selectable

Precision

1.0 ppb

Linearity

1.0% of reading

Rise/Fall Time

<20 sec (photometer response)

Response Time (95%)

180 sec. (system response)

Zero Drift

<1.0 ppb / 24 hours

Span Drift

<1% / 24 hours

Minimum Gas Flow Required

800 cc/min

2.2. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS
The Teledyne API Model T700 calibrator was tested and certified for Safety and
Electromagnet Compatibility (EMC). This section presents the compliance statements
for those requirements and directives.

2.2.1. SAFETY
IEC 61010-1:2001
CE: 2006/95/EC, Low-Voltage Directive
North American:
cNEMKO (Canada): CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-04
NEMKO-CCL (US): UL No. 61010-1 (2nd Edition)

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Specifications and Approvals

2.2.2. EMC
EN 61326-1 (IEC 61326-1), Class A Emissions/Industrial Immunity
EN 55011 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A Emissions
FCC 47 CFR Part 15B, Class A Emissions
CE: 2004/108/EC, Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

2.2.3. OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS
For additional certifications, please contact Customer Service.

06873B DCN6388

Specifications and Approvals

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

06873B DCN6388

3. GETTING STARTED
This section addresses the procedures for unpacking the instrument and inspecting for
damage, presents clearance specifications for proper ventilation, introduces the
instrument layout, then presents the procedures for getting started: making electrical and
pneumatic connections, and conducting an initial calibration check.

3.1. UNPACKING AND INITIAL SETUP
CAUTION – RISK of Personal Injury
THE T700 WEIGHS ABOUT 18 KG (40 POUNDS) WITHOUT OPTIONS INSTALLED.
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, WE RECOMMEND USING TWO PERSONS TO
LIFT AND CARRY THE CALIBRATOR.

ATTENTION

CAUTION – Avoid Damage to the Instrument
BEFORE oprating instrument, remove dust plugs from pneumatic ports.

Note

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API recommends that you store shipping containers/materials
for future use if/when the instrument should be returned to the factory for
repair and/or calibration service. See Warranty section in this manual and
shipping procedures on our Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com
under Customer Support > Return Authorization.

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

WARNING!
NEVER DISCONNECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BOARDS, WIRING HARNESSES
OR ELECTRONIC SUBASSEMBLIES WHILE THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER.

1. Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage. If damaged, please
advise the shipper first, then Teledyne API.
2. Included with your calibrator is a printed record of the final performance
characterization performed on your instrument at the factory. This record, titled
Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 05731) is an important quality assurance
and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality records
file for this instrument.
3. Carefully remove the top cover of the calibrator and check for internal shipping
damage.
 Remove the locking screw located in the top, center of the Front panel.
 Remove the two screws fastening the top cover to the unit (one per side towards
the rear).
 Slide the cover backwards until it clears the calibrator’s front bezel.
 Lift the cover straight up.
4. Inspect the interior of the instrument to ensure all circuit boards and other
components are in good shape and properly seated.
5. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses
to ensure they are firmly and properly seated.
6. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed.
These are checked on the paperwork accompanying the calibrator.

3.1.1. VENTILATION CLEARANCE
Whether the calibrator is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be sure
to leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
AREA

MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE

Behind the instrument

10 cm / 4 inches

Sides of the instrument

2.5 cm / 1 inch

Above and below the instrument.

2.5 cm / 1 inch

Various rack mount kits are available for this calibrator. See Table 1-1 of this manual
for more information.

3.2. CALIBRATOR LAYOUT
Figure 3-1 shows the calibrator’s front panel layout, followed by a close-up of the
display/touchscreen in and description in Table 3 1. The two USB ports on the front
panel are provided for the connection of peripheral devices:



plug-in mouse (not included) to be used as an alternative to the touchscreen
interface



thumb drive (not included) to download updates to instruction software (contact TAPI Customer Service for information).

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.2.1. FRONT PANEL

Figure 3-1: T700 Front Panel Layout

Figure 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control

The front panel liquid crystal display (LCD) screen includes touch control. Upon
calibrator start-up, the LCD shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators
before the main display appears, similar to Figure 3-2 above.
CAUTION – Avoid Damaging Touchscreen
Do not use hard-surfaced instruments such as pens to operate the touch
screen buttons.

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Table 3-1: Display Screen and Touch Control Description
Field

Description/Function

LEDs indicating the states of the calibrator:
Name

Color

State

Active

Green

off

This LED is lit only when the calibrator is performing an automatic
calibration sequence.
The calibrator is warming up and therefore many of its subsystems
Fault
Red
blinking
are not yet operating within their optimum ranges. Various warning
messages may appear in the Param field.
Gas concentrations, Cal gas MFC and Diluent MFC values with unit of measure
Displays the name of the calibrator’s current operating mode (default is STANDBY at initial startup).
Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operational data, test function
values and response messages during interactive tasks.
Auto Timer

Target/ Actual
Mode
Param

Definition
Unit is operating in STANDBY mode.
This LED is lit when the instrument is actively producing
calibration gas (GENERATE mode).

Yellow

off

Touchscreen control: row of eight buttons with dynamic, context sensitive labels; buttons are blank when inactive/inapplicable.

Figure 3-3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts that are
illustrated throughout this manual. The Mode, Param (parameters), and Target/Actual
(gas concentration) fields in the display screen are represented across the top row of
each menu chart. The eight touch control buttons along the bottom of the display screen
are represented in the bottom row of each menu chart.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.2.2. REAR PANEL

Figure 3-4: T700 Rear Panel Layout
Table 3-2 provides a description of each component on the rear panel.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Table 3-2: Rear Panel Description
Component

Function

Fan

Cools instrument by pulling ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausting
through rear.
Connector for three-prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer

AC Power
Connector CAUTION! The cord’s power specifications (specs) MUST comply with the
power specs on the calibrator’s rear panel Model number label.

EXHAUST
(option)
PHOTOMETER
INLET

Exhaust gas from ozone generator and photometer
CAUTION! Exhaust gas must be vented outside.
Measurement gas input for O3 photometer

(Photometer option)
PHOTOMETER
OUTLET

Calibration gas outlet to O3 photometer

(Photometer option)
PHOTO ZERO IN

Inlet for photometer Zero Gas

(Photometer option)
PHOTO ZERO OUT

Outlet for photometer Zero Gas

(Photometer option)
DILUENT IN
CALGAS OUT
VENT
CYL 1 thru CYL 4

Diluent or zero air gas inlet.
Outlets for calibration gas
Vent port for output manifold
Inlets for up to 4 calibration gases.

COM 2

Serial communications port for RS-232 or RS-485.

RX TX

LEDs indicate receive (RX) and transmit (TX) activity on the when blinking.

RS-232
DCE DTE

Serial communications port for RS-232 only.
Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment
during RS-232 communication. (Section 5.1)

CONTROL OUT

For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).

STATUS

For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).

ANALOG OUT
CONTROL IN
ETHERNET
(optional) USB

For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and/or a data logger.
For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes.
Connector for network or Internet remote communication, using Ethernet cable.
Connector for direct connection to a personal computer, using USB cable.

Label w/power specs Identifies the analyzer model number and lists voltage and frequency specifications

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.2.3. INTERNAL LAYOUT
AC Power
Connector

Gas Inlets & Outlets

Fan

REAR

Motherboard
CPU PCA

Relay PCA
DC Power
supplies
INPUT GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller

Diluent
Mass Flow
Controller
ON / OFF Switch

FRONT
Figure 3-5: T700 Internal Layout – Top View – Base Unit

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

AC Power
Connector

Gas Inlets & Outlets

REAR

Fan

Photometer
Pump

Motherboard
Relay PCA

CPU PCA

O3 Generator
Pressure
Regulator)

O3 Generator
Assembly
Photometer
M/R Valve

PHOTOMETER

O3 Generator
& Photometer,
Pressure/Flow
Sensor PCA

DC Power
supplies

GPT
Chamber

O3 Generator
Lamp Driver

GPT
Valve

ON / OFF
Switch

FRONT

Input Gas
Pressure
Sensor PCA

Optional 2nd
Cal Gas
Mass Flow
Controller

Cal Gas
Mass Flow
Controller

Diluent
Mass Flow
Controller

Figure 3-6: T700 Internal Layout – Top View – with Optional O3 Generator and Photometer

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.3. CONNECTIONS AND SETUP
This section presents the electrical (Section 3.3.1) and pneumatic (Section 3.3.2)
connections for setup and preparing for instrument operation.

3.3.1. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Note

To maintain compliance with EMC standards, it is required that the cable
length be no greater than 3 meters for all I/O connections, which include
Analog In, Analog Out, Status Out, Control In, Ethernet/LAN, USB, RS-232,
and RS-485.

3.3.1.1. Connecting Power
Attach the power cord to the calibrator and plug it into a power outlet capable of
carrying at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a
functioning earth ground.
WARNING – ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
 HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE CALIBRATORS CASE.
 POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND CONNECTION.
 DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG.
 TURN OFF CALIBRATOR POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR

CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES.
 DO NOT OPERATE WITH COVER OFF.

CAUTION – AVOID PERSONAL INJURY
DO NOT LOOK AT THE PHOTOMETER UV LAMP; UV LIGHT CAN CAUSE EYE
DAMAGE.
ALWAYS WEAR GLASSES MADE FROM SAFETY UV FILTERING GLASS
(PLASTIC GLASSES ARE INADEQUATE).

Note

The T700 calibrator is equipped with a universal power supply that allows
it to accept any AC power configuration, within the limits specified in
Table 2-2.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.3.1.2. Connecting Analog Outputs
The T700 is equipped with an analog output channel accessible through a connector on
the back panel of the instrument. The standard configuration for this output is 0-5 VDC.
It can be set by the user to output one of a variety of diagnostic test functions (see
Section 4.10.1.2).
To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate
analog output connections on the rear panel of the calibrator.
Pin-outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are:
ANALOG OUT

–

Figure 3-7: T700 Analog Output Connector

3.3.1.3. Connecting the Status Outputs
The status outputs report calibrator conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors,
which sink up to 50 mA of DC current. These outputs can be used to interface with
devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as Programmable Logic Controllers
(PLCs). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC.
All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.

ATTENTION

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input
will draw from an external device. When connecting to a unit that does
not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be used to limit
the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the
transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter.

The status outputs are accessed via a 12-pin connector on the calibrator’s rear panel
labeled STATUS. The function of each pin is defined in Table 3-3.

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

INTERNAL GROUND

+
CALIBRATOR

+ 5 VDC

EMITTER BUSS

Unassigned

PRESS ALARM

TEMP ALARM

DIAG

CAL ACTIVE

SYSTEM OK

POWER OK

STATUS

Figure 3-8: Status Output Connector

The pin assignments for the Status Outputs are:
Table 3-3: Status Output Pin Assignments
OUTPUT
#

STATUS
DEFINITION

SYSTEM OK

On if no faults are present.

POWER OK

On if no faults are present.

CAL ACTIVE

On if the calibrator is in GENERATE mode.

DIAG

On if the calibrator is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.

TEMP ALARM

On whenever a temperature alarm is active.
On whenever gas pressure alarm is active.

PRESS ALARM

7&8

Unassigned

Emitter BUS

(blank)

Not Used

DC POWER

+ 5 VDC

Digital Ground

CONDITION

The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together.

The ground level from the calibrator’s internal DC power supplies.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.3.1.4. Connecting the Control Inputs
The calibrator is equipped with 12 digital control inputs that can be used to initiate
various user programmable calibration sequences (see Section 4.3.1.5 for instructions on
assigning the control inputs to specific calibration sequences).
Access to these inputs is via two separate 10-pin connectors, labeled CONTROL IN,
that are located on the calibrator’s rear panel.
Table 3-4: T700 Control Input Pin Assignments
CONNECTOR

INPUT

DESCRIPTION

Top

1 to 6

Can be used as either 6, separate on/off switches or as bits 1 through
6 of a 12-bit wide binary activation code.

Bottom

7 to 12

Can be used as either 6, separate on/off switches or as bits 7 through
12 of a 12-bit wide binary activation code.

BOTH

Chassis ground.

Top

Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins 1 – 6. This can be from
an external source or from the “+” pin of the connector.

Bottom

Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins 7 – 12. This can be
from an external source or from the “+” pin of the connector.

BOTH

Internal source of +5V used to actuate control inputs when connected
to the U pin.

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available
from the pin labeled “+” is the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is
required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be used.

CONTROL Bit-06

CONTROL Bit-05

CONTROL Bit-04

CONTROL Bit-03

CONTROL Bit-02

CONTROL Bit-01

CONTROL Bit-06

CONTROL Bit-05

CONTROL Bit-04

CONTROL Bit-03

CONTROL Bit-02

Example of External Power Connections

11 12

CONTROL Bit-12

CONTROL Bit-11

CONTROL Bit-10

CONTROL Bit-09

CONTROL Bit-08

CONTROL Bit-07

CONTROL Bit-12

CONTROL Bit-11

CONTROL Bit-10

CONTROL Bit-09

CONTROL Bit-08

CONTROL Bit-07

CONTROL Bit-01

Example of Local Power Connections

5 VDC Power
Supply

Figure 3-9: T700 Digital Control Input Connectors

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.3.1.5. Connecting the Control Outputs
The calibrator is equipped with 12 opto-isolated, digital control outputs. These outputs
are activated by the T700’s user-programmable calibration sequences (see Sections
4.3.1.6 and 4.3.2.8 for instructions on assigning the control inputs to specific calibration
sequences).
These outputs may be used to interface with devices that accept logic-level digital
inputs, such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), data loggers, or digital
relays/valve drivers.
They are accessed via a 14-pin connector on the calibrator’s rear panel (see Figure 3-4).

CONTROL OUTPUTS

Figure 3-10: T700 Digital Control Output Connector

ATTENTION

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Most PLCs have internal provisions for limiting the current the input will
draw. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, external
resistors must be used to limit the current through the individual
transistor outputs to ≤50mA (120 Ω for 5V supply).
The pin assignments for the control outputs are:

Table 3-5: T700 Control Output Pin Assignments
PIN #

STATUS DEFINITION

1 - 12

Outputs 1 through 12 respectively

Emitter BUS

The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 12 are bussed together.

Digital Ground

The ground level from the calibrator’s internal DC power supplies.

06873B DCN6388

CONDITION
Closed if the sequence or sequence step activating output is operating

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.3.1.6. Connecting the External Valve Driver Option
Either one of two external valve driver assemblies (12V or 24V) is available that can
drive up to eight, 8-watt valves based on the condition of the status block bits described
below The option consists of a custom Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) that mounts to
the back of the T700 and a universal AC-to-DC power supply.

Figure 3-11: T700 Rear Panel Valve Driver Installed
OPTION

DESCRIPTION

OPT 48A
OPT 48B

External Valve Driver Capability – 12V
External Valve Driver Capability – 24 V

Depending upon the capacity of the external supply either four (standard) or eight valves
can be simultaneously energized.
The PCA is constructed such that it plugs through the rear panel into the Control Output
connector, J1008, on the T700’s motherboard.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

LEADSValve Driver Interface

ValveDrive 1
ValveDrive 2
Return
ValveDrive 3
ValveDrive 4
Return
ValveDrive 5
ValveDrive 6
Return
ValveDrive 7
ValveDrive 8
Return

+12VIN

057760000A

Figure 3-12: Valve Driver PCA Layout

When one of the Control Outputs is energized, the base of the associated PNP valve
driver transistor (U1 through U8) is taken to ground and the emitter-collector junction
becomes active.
Electronic connections should be made as follows:


Valves should be connected between one of the Valve Drive outputs and one of the
Return pins.



The external power supply must be connected to the Valve Driver Interface using
the +12V coaxial input connector on the top, right-hand side of the assembly.



The external supply in turn must be connected to 85-264V, 47-63Hz mains.

The Valve Driver Outputs are mapped one-for-one to the Control Outputs 1 through 8
and can be manually actuated for troubleshooting using the Signal-I/O diagnostic
function in the T700 software (see Section 9.4.11.5). However, the drive outputs are
mapped in reverse to the status control bits such that Bit-0 (LSB) is valve drive 8 and
Bit-7 is valve drive 1.

3.3.1.7. Connecting the Communications Interfaces
The T-Series analyzers are equipped with connectors for remote communications
interfaces: Ethernet, USB, RS-232, RS-232 Multidrop and RS-485 (each described
here). In addition to using the appropriate cables, each type of communication method
must be configured using the SETUP>COMM menu (see Sections 4.7 and 5).
ETHERNET CONNECTION

For network or Internet communication with the analyzer, connect an Ethernet cable
from the analyzer’s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet port. Although
the analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default (Section 5.4), it should be
manually assigned a static IP address.
Configuration: (manual, i.e., static) Section 5.4.1.1

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

USB (OPTION) CONNECTION

The USB option can be used for direct communication between the analyzer and a PC;
connect a USB cable between the analyzer and computer USB ports. A USB driver is
required for complete configuration.
Note

If this option is installed, the COM2 port cannot be used for anything
other than Multidrop communication.

Configuration: Section 5.4.3.
RS-232 CONNECTION

For RS-232 communications with data terminal equipment (DTE) or with data
communication equipment (DCE) connect either a DB9-female-to-DB9-female cable
(Teledyne API part number WR000077) or a DB9-female-to-DB25-male cable (Option
60A), as applicable, from the analyzer’s rear panel RS-232 port to the device. Adjust the
DCE-DTE switch (Figure 3-4) to select DTE or DCE as appropriate (Section 5.1).
Configuration: Section 4.7.3

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors
may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable. Check
cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin
assignments (Figure 3-13) before using.

RS-232 COM PORT CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

Electronically, the difference between the DCE and DTE is the pin assignment of the
Data Receive and Data Transmit functions.



DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.



DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Figure 3-13: Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode

The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring
harness to two 10-pin connectors on the CPU card, J11 and J12 (Figure 3-14).

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Figure 3-14: Default Pin Assignments for CPU COMM Port Connector (RS-232).

Teledyne API offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.
 P/N WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows connection
of the serial ports of most personal computers.
 P/N WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the most
common styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated switches.

Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional
adapters.
Note

Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors
may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable. Check
cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin
assignments before using.
To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there
are activity indicators just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between
the analyzer and a computer or modem, both the red and green LEDs should be on.
 If the lights are not lit, locate the small switch on the rear panel to switch it between
DTE and DCE modes.
 If both LEDs are still not illuminated, ensure that the cable properly constructed.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

RS-232 COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS

Received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with Pin
3 of the DB-9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2 designated for sending
data.


RS-232 (COM1): RS-232 (fixed) DB-9 male connector.



Baud rate: 115200 bits per second (baud)



Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit




Parity: None
COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS-485), DB-9 female connector.



Baud rate: 115200 bits per second (baud)



Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit



Parity: None

RS-232 MULTI-DROP (OPTION 62) CONNECTION

When the RS-232 Multidrop option is installed, connection adjustments and
configuration through the menu system are required. This section provides instructions
for the internal connection adjustments, then for external connections, and ends with
instructions for menu-driven configuration.
Note

ATTENTION

Because the RS-232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and COM2
DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s rear panel to connect the chain of
instruments, COM2 port is no longer available for separate RS-232 or
RS-485 operation.

COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static
discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system. Failure to
use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void
the instrument warranty. Refer to Section 11 for more information on
preventing ESD damage.
In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the
serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly (PCA), as shown in Figure 3-15.
This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the
multidrop chain, which must remain terminated. This requires powering off and opening
each instrument and making the following adjustments:
1. With NO power to the instrument, remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open for
access to the Multidrop/LVDS PCA, which is seated on the CPU.
2. On the Multidrop/LVDS PCA’s JP2 connector, remove the shunt that jumpers Pins
21  22 as indicated in. (Do this for all but the last instrument in the chain where the
shunt should remain at Pins 21  22).

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3. Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments (again refer to
Figure 3-15):
4. J3 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to the CPU’s COM1 connector
5. (Note that the CPU’s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop)
6. J4 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard
7. J1 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD

Figure 3-15: Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode
8. (Note: If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain,
remove the shunt between Pins 21  22 of JP2 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA in the
instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain.)
9. Close the instrument.
10. Referring to Figure 3-16 use straight-through DB9 male  DB9 female cables to
interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer’s RS232 port; then from the first
analyzer’s COM2 port to the second analyzer’s RS232 port; from the second analyzer’s
COM2 port to the third analyzer’s RS232 port, etc., connecting in this fashion up to eight
analyzers, subject to the distance limitations of the RS-232 standard.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

11. On the rear panel of each analyzer, adjust the DCE DTE switch (see Figure 3-4 and
Section 5.1) so that the green and the red LEDs (RX and TX) of the COM1 connector
(labeled RS232) are both lit. (Ensure you are using the correct RS-232 cables internally
wired specifically for RS-232 communication; see Table 1-1, “Communication Cables”
and Section 3.3.1.7: Connecting the Communications Interfaces, “RS-232 Connection”).
Female DB9

Host

Male DB9

RS-232 port

Analyzer

Last Analyzer

COM2

RS-232

Ensure jumper is
installed between
JP2 pins 21  22 in
last instrument of
multidrop chain.

Figure 3-16: RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram
12. BEFORE communicating from the host, power on the instruments and check that the
Machine ID code is unique for each (Section 4.7.1).
a. In the SETUP Mode menu go to SETUP>MORE>COMM>ID. The default ID is
typically the model number or “0”.
b. to change the identification number, press the button below the digit to be changed.
c.

Press/select ENTER to accept the new ID for that instrument.

13. Next, in the SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM1 menu (do not use the COM2 menu for
multidrop), edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows: press/select EDIT and set only
QUIET MODE, COMPUTER MODE, and MULTIDROP MODE to ON. Do not change
any other settings.
14. Press/select ENTER to accept the changed settings, and ensure that COM1 MODE now
shows 35.
15. Press/select SET> to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the same
for all instruments (edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same baud rate).

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Note

The (communication) Host instrument can address only one instrument at a
time, each by its unique ID (see step 12 above).

Note

Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the
first analyzer, and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.

RS-485 CONNECTION

As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This
port can be reconfigured for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port. Using
COM2 for RS-485 communication disables the USB port. To reconfigure this port for
RS-485 communication, please contact the factory.

3.3.2. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS
Note that each time the pneumatic configuration is changed for any purpose, a
backpressure compensation calibration must be performed (Section 7.3.7).

3.3.2.1. About Diluent Gas (Zero Air)
Zero Air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of
all components that might affect the calibrator’s readings.


Diluent Air should be dry (approximately -20ºC of Dew Point).



Diluent Air should be supplied at a gas pressure of between 25 PSI and 35 PSI with
a flow greater than the flow rate for the calibrator. For the standard unit this means
greater than 10 SLPM.




For calibrator’s with the 20 LPM diluent flow option (OPT) the diluent air should
be supplied at a gas pressure of between 30 PSI and 35 PSI.

T700 calibrator’s with optional O3 generators installed require that the zero air
source supply gas flowing at a continuous rate of at least 100 cm3/min.


If the calibrator is also equipped with an internal photometer, the zero air source
supply gas must be capable of a continuous rate of flow of at least 1.1 LPM.

Zero Air can be purchased in pressurized canisters or created using a Teledyne API’s
Model 701 Zero Air Generator.

3.3.2.2. About Calibration Gas
Calibration gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the
type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. Usually
it is a single gas type mixed with N2 although bottles containing multiple mixtures of
compatible gases are also available (e.g. H2S, O2 and CO mixed with N2).


Calibration gas should be supplied at a pressure of between 25 PSI and 35 PSI with
a flow greater than the flow rate for the calibrator.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

NIST TRACEABLE CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS

All calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for
Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST traceability, we recommend
acquiring cylinders of working gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST Standard
Reference Materials (SRM). These are available from a variety of commercial sources.
The following tables lists some of the most common NIST Primary gas standards
Table 3-6: NIST Standards for CO2
SRM

06873B DCN6388

Description

Nominal Amount of
Substance

1676

Carbon Dioxide in Air

365 ppm

1674b

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

1675b

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

14 %

2619a

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

0.5 %

2620a

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

1.0 %

2621a

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

1.5 %

2622a

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

2.0 %

2623a

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

2.5 %

2624a

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

3.0 %

2625a

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

3.5 %

2626a

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

4.0 %

2745

Carbon Dioxide in Nitrogen

16 %

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Table 3-7: NIST Standards for CO
SRM

Description

Nominal Amount of
Substance

2612a
2613a
2614a
1677c
1678c
1679c
1680b
1681b
2635a
2636a
2637a
2638a
2639a
2640a
2641a
2642a
2740a
2741a

Carbon Monoxide in Air
Carbon Monoxide in Air
Carbon Monoxide in Air
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen
Carbon Monoxide in Nitrogen

10 ppm
20 ppm
42 ppm
10 ppm
50 ppm
100 ppm
500 ppm
1000 ppm
25 ppm
250 ppm
2500 ppm
5000 ppm
1%
2%
4%
8%
10 %
13 %

Table 3-8: NIST Standards for H2S
SRM

Description

Nominal Amount of
Substance

2730
2731

Hydrogen Sulfide in Nitrogen
Hydrogen Sulfide in Nitrogen

5 ppm
20 ppm

Table 3-9: NIST Standards for CH4
SRM

Description

Nominal Amount of
Substance

1658a
1659a
2750
2751
1660a

Methane in Air
Methane in Air
Methane in Air
Methane in Air
Methane-Propane in Air

1 ppm
10 ppm
50 ppm
100 ppm
4:1

Table 3-10: NIST Standards for O2

SRM

Description

Nominal Amount of
Substance

2657a
2658a

Oxygen in Nitrogen
Oxygen in Nitrogen

2%
10 %

2659a

Oxygen in Nitrogen

21 %

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Table 3-11: NIST Standards for SO2
SRM

Description

Nominal Amount of
substance

1661a
1662a
1663a

Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen
Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen
Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen

500
1000 ppm
1500 ppm

1664a
1693a
1694a
1696a

Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen
Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen
Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen
Sulfur Dioxide in Nitrogen

2500 ppm
50 ppm
100 ppm
3500 ppm

Table 3-12: NIST Standards for NO
SRM

Description

Nominal Amount of
Substance

1683b
1684b
1685b

Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen

50 ppm
100 ppm
250 ppm

1686b
1687b
2627a
2628a
2629a
2630

Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen

500 ppm
1000 ppm
5 ppm
10 ppm
20 ppm
1500 ppm

2631a
2735
2736a
2737
2738

Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen
Nitric Oxide in Nitrogen

3000 ppm
800 ppm
2000 ppm
500 ppm
1000 ppm

Table 3-13: NIST Standards for Propane (C3H8)

06873B DCN6388

SRM

Description

Nominal Amount of
Substance

1665b
1666b

Propane in Air
Propane in Air

3 ppm
10 ppm

1667b
1668b
1669b
2764
2644a
2646a
2647a

Propane in Air
Propane in Air
Propane in Air
Propane in Air
Propane in Nitrogen
Propane in Nitrogen
Propane in Nitrogen

50 ppm
100 ppm
500 ppm
0.25 ppm
250 ppm
1000 ppm
2500 ppm

2648a

Propane in Nitrogen

5000 ppm

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

MINIMUM CALIBRATION GAS SOURCE CONCENTRATION

Determining minimum Cal Gas Concentration to determine the minimum concentration
of a calibration gas required by your system:
1. Determine the Total Flow required by your system by adding the gas flow requirement of
each of the analyzers in the system.
2. Multiply this by 1.5.
3. Decide on a Calibration Gas flow rate.
4. Determine the Calibration Gas ratio by divide the Total Flow by the Calibration Gas Flow
Rate.
5. Multiply the desired target calibration gas concentration by the result from step 4.
EXAMPLE: Your system has two analyzers each requiring 2SLPM of cal gas flow.
6. 2SLPM + 2SLPM = 4SLPM
7. 4SLPM x 1.5 = 6SLPM = Total Gas Flow Rate
8. If the T700 calibrator so that the cal gas flow rate is 2SLPM (therefore the Diluent Flow
Rate would need to be set at 4 SLPM) the Calibration Gas ratio would be:
9. 6SLPMm ÷ 2SLPM = 3:1
10. Therefore if your Target Calibration Gas Concentration is intended to be 200 ppm, the
minimum required source gas concentration for this system operating at these flow rates
would be:
11. 3 x 200ppm = 600 ppm

3.3.2.3. Connecting Diluent Gas to the Calibrator
12. Attach the zero air source line to the port labeled Diluent In.
13. Use the fittings provided with the calibrator to connect the zero air source line.
 First, finger tighten.


Then using the properly sized wrench, make an additional 1 and ¼ turn.

3.3.2.4. Connecting Calibration Source Gas to the T700 Calibrator
14. Connect the source gas line(s) to the ports labeled CYL1 through CYL4 on the back of
the calibrator (see Figure 3-4).
 Source gas delivery pressure should be regulated between 25 PSI to 30 PSI.


Use stainless steel tubing with a 1/8 inch outer diameter.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.3.2.5. Connecting Gas Outputs from the Calibrator
SET UP FOR DIRECT CONNECTIONS TO OTHER INSTRUMENTS

Enclosure Wall

Use this setup if you are connecting the T700 calibrator directly to other instruments
without the use of any shared manifolds.

Figure 3-17: Set up for T700 – Connecting the Basic T700 to a Sample Manifold

To determine if the gas flow on the vent line is ≥ 5 SLPM subtract the gas flow for each
instrument connected to the outlets of the T700 from the TOTAL FLOW setting for
the calibrator (see Section 3.4.9).
If the T700 has the optional O3 photometer installed remember that this option requires
800 cc3/min (0.8 LPM) of additional flow (see Section 3.4.9 or Figure 3-23).
EXAMPLE: Your system has two analyzers each requiring 2SLPM of cal gas flow and
the T700 includes the O3 photometer. If the TOTAL FLOW rate for the
calibrator is set at 10 SLPM:

10LPM - 2LPM - 2LPM - 0.8 LPM = 5.2LPM
Therefore, the vent would require a gas line with an O.D. 3/8 inch.

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

CONNECTING THE CALIBRATOR TO A SAMPLE GAS MANIFOLD

Use this setup when connecting the T700 calibrator to an analyzer network using a
sample manifold. In this case, the sampling cane and the manifold itself act as the vent
for the T700.

T700 output flow rate
must be greater than the
requirements
of the entire system,
whichever is higher.
Minimum O.D. of this gas line
must be 3/8 inch

&
gas outlets
be capped

Figure 3-18: Set up for T700 – Connecting the T700 to a Sample Manifold
Note

• This is the recommended method for connecting the T700 calibrator to a
system with analyzers that DO NOT have internal zero/span valves.
• The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented to simplify the
drawing. Their actual orientation in your set-up is with the ports facing
upward. All unused ports must be capped.
• When initiating calibration, wait a minimum of 15 minutes for the calibrator to
flood the entire sampling system with calibration gas.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

CONNECTING THE CALIBRATOR TO A CALIBRATION MANIFOLD

Using a calibration manifold provides a pneumatic interface between the calibration
system and other devices (or systems) which use the calibrator’s gas output. Calibration
manifolds usually have one or more ports for connections to other external devices (such
as an analyzer).

Figure 3-19: Set up for T700 – Connecting the T700 to a Calibration Manifold
Note

06873B DCN6388

• This method requires the analyzers connected to the calibration system have
internal zero/span valves.
• The manifold should be kept as clean as possible to avoid loss of sample gas
flow from blockages or constrictions.
• The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented to simplify the
drawing. Their actual orientation in your set-up is with the ports facing
upward. All unused ports must be capped.
• When initiating calibration, wait a minimum of 15 minutes for the calibrator to
flood the entire calibration manifold with calibration gas..

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

CALIBRATION MANIFOLD EXHAUST/VENT LINE

The manifold’s excess gas should be vented outside of the room. This vent should be of
large enough internal diameter to avoid any appreciable pressure drop, and it must be
located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to assure that no ambient air enters
the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion.
CONNECTING THE CALIBRATOR TO A DUAL SPAN GAS / ZERO AIR
CALIBRATION MANIFOLD

Another type of calibration setup utilizes separate span gas and the zero air manifolds
(see Figure 3-20).

Figure 3-20: Set up for T700 – Connecting the T700 to a Dual Span Gas / Zero Air Manifold
Note

This set up is subject to the same notes and conditions as the single calibration
manifold described previously with the following two exceptions:
• The T700 total gas flow rate (Cal Gas Flow Rate + Diluent Flow Rate) out should
be greater than the Total Flow requirements of the entire system.
• The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented to simplify the
drawing. Their actual orientation in your set-up is with the ports facing upward.
All unused ports must be capped.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

SPAN GAS/ZERO AIR CALIBRATION MANIFOLD EXHAUST/VENT LINES

The span and zero air manifolds’ excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside
of the room. This vent should be of large enough internal diameter to avoid any
appreciable pressure drop, and it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output
ports to assure that no ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back
diffusion.

Figure 3-21: T700 Pneumatic Diagram – Base Unit

The standard T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is equipped with one calibration gas
mass flow controller (flow rate 0 – 100 cm3/min) and one diluent gas mass flow controller
(flow rate 0-10 LPM). See Table 1-1 for the various flow rate options.

3.3.2.6. Other Pneumatic Connections
Some of the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator’s optional equipment requires additional
pneumatic connections.
O3 GENERATOR OPTION

Because ozone (O3) quickly breaks down into molecular oxygen (O2), this calibration
gas cannot be supplied in precisely calibrated bottles like other gases such as SO2, CO,
CO2 NO, H2S, etc. The optional O3 generator extends the capabilities of the T700
Dynamic Dilution Calibrator dynamically generate calibration gas mixtures containing
O3.
Additionally a glass mixture volume, designed to meet US EPA guidelines for Gas
Phase Titration (GPT), is included with this option. This chamber, in combination with

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

the O3 generator, allow the T700 to use the GPT technique to more precisely create NO2
calibration mixtures

grn
grn

brn

On Back Panel
brn
brn

blk

red
blk
blu
orn
orn
yel

red

yel

blu
blu

Figure 3-22: Internal Pneumatics for T700 Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator and GPT Chamber.
Table 3-14: Operating Mode Valve States for T700 Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator.
VALVES

MFCs

(X = Closed; O = Open)

MODE

CYL
1

CYL
2

CYL
3

CYL
4

PURGE

DILUENT

GPT

O3
GEN

CAL1

CAL21

DILUENT

Generate Source Gas

ON3

Generate O3

OFF

Leak Check 0-17%

Leak Check 17%-100%

GPT

GPTPS

OFF

PURGE

STANDBY

OFF

Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.

The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open.

In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

The output of the O3 generator can be controlled in one of two ways:
64

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started



CONSTANT mode: By selecting a specific, constant drive voltage (corresponding to
a specific O3 concentration) for the generator, or;



REFERENCE mode: The user selects a desired O3 concentration and the
calibrator’s CPU sets the intensity of the O3 generator’s UV lamp to an intensity
corresponding to that concentration. The voltage output of a reference detector,
also internal to the generator, is digitized and sent to the T700’s CPU where it is
used as input for a control loop that maintains the intensity of the UV lamp at a level
appropriate for the chosen set point.

See Section 10.6 for more details on the operation of the O3 generator.
In addition to the diluent gas, calibration source gas, and gas output connections
discussed in the preceding sections, this option also requires an O3 exhaust line be
connected to the EXHAUST outlet on the back of the T700 (see Figure 3-4).
Note

The EXHAUST line must be vented to atmospheric pressure using maximum of
10 meters of ¼” PTEF tubing.
Venting must be outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the
instrument..
O3 GENERATOR WITH PHOTOMETER OPTION

The photometer option increases the accuracy of the T700 calibrator’s optional O3
generator (OPT 1A) by directly measuring O3 content of the gas output by the generator.
The photometer’s operation is based on the principle that ozone molecules absorb UV
light of a certain wavelength. A mercury lamp internal to the photometer emits UV light
at that wavelength. This light shines down a hollow glass tube that is alternately filled
with sample gas (the measure phase), and zero gas (the reference phase). A detector,
located at the other end of the glass tube measure the brightness of the UV light after it
passes though the gas in the tube. The O3 content of the gas is calculated based on the
ratio the UV light intensity during the measure phase (O3 present) and the reference
phase (no O3 present).
When the photometer option is installed, a third more precise and stabile option, called
the BENCH feedback mode, exists for controlling the output of the O3 generator. In
BENCH mode the intensity of the O3 generator’s UV lamp is controlled (and therefore
the concentration of the O3 created) by the T700’s CPU based on the actual O3
concentration measurements made by the photometer.
See Section 10.7 for more details on the operation of the O3 photometer.
This option requires that the O3 generator (OPT 1A) be installed.

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

gry

O3 Generator Assembly

grn

brn
brn

brn

On Back Panel
vio
vio

wht
wht

gry
blk
red
blk
orn
orn
yel

red

yel

blu

Figure 3-23: Internal Pneumatics for T700 Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator and Photometer
Table 3-15: Operating Mode Valve States for T700 Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator and Photometer
VALVES
GAS TYPE
Generate
Source Gas
Generate O3

Leak Check
0-17%
Leak Check
17%-100%
GPT
GPTPS
PURGE
STANDBY

CYL
1

CYL
2

CYL
3

CYL
4

PURGE

DILUENT

GPT

O3
GEN

PHOT M/R

CAL1

Reference Phase

Switching

O
X
X
X

X
X
O
X

O
O
O
O

O
O
O
X

PHOT
PUMP

MFCs

(X = Closed; O = Open)

CAL21
3

DILUENT

OFF

O
O
O
X

ON
ON
ON
OFF

Reference Phase
Switching
Reference Phase
Reference Phase

ON
OFF
3
ON
OFF

OFF
4
ON
OFF
OFF

Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.
2
The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open.
3
In an instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.
4
When generating O3 or in GPT Pre-Set mode, the photometer pump is the primary creator of gas flow through the T700. Flow rates are controlled by critical flow
orifice(s) located in the gas stream

In addition to the connections discussed in the previous sections, this option also
requires the following:


Loop back lines must be connected between:





PHOTOMETER OUTLET fixture and the PHOTOMETER INLET fixture.
PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT fixture and the PHOTOMETER ZERO IN fixture.

An O3 exhaust line must be connected to the EXHAUST outlet.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

See Figure 3-4 for the location of these fixtures.
Note

The
EXHAUST
line
must
be
vented
to
atmospheric
pressure
using maximum of 10 meters of ¼” PTEF tubing. This venting must be outside
the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.
MULTIPLE CALIBRATION SOURCE GAS MFC’S

An optional third mass flow controller can be added on the calibration gas stream.
When this option is installed the T700 has both calibration gas MFCs on the same gas
stream, installed in parallel (see Figure 3-24 and Figure 3-25). The calibrator turns on
the MFC with the lowest flow rate that can accommodate the requested flow and can
therefore supply the most accurate flow control. When a flow rate is requested that is
higher than the highest rated MFC (but lower than their combined maximum flow
rating), both controllers are activated.
EXAMPLE:


Calibrator with one calibration gas MFC configured for 0-5 LPM:
Maximum gas flow = 5 LPM
Minimum gas flow = 500 cm3/min



Calibrator with two calibration gas MFCs configured for 0-1 LPM and 0-5 LPM:

Calibration gas flow rates:
5.001 to 6.000 LPM; both MFCs active
1.001 LPM – 5.000 LPM; High MFC active;
0.100 LPM – 1.000 LPM; Low MFC active

When this option is installed the test measurements that show the MFC actual and target
flows (e.g., ACT CAL; TARG CAL) show the sum of the flows of all the active MFCs.
On the other hand, the pressure test measurements show the pressure for only one MFC,
not the sum as it is assumed that gas pressure is the same for all MFCs.

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

On Back Panel

brn
brn
brn

yel

orn

yel
blu

orn

yel

yel
yel
blu

yel

Figure 3-24: Basic T700 with Multiple Calibration Gas MFCs

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Instrument Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH

Flow Control
(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR

brn

Flow Control
(10 cm3)

Purge
Valve

brn

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

brn
CAL GAS 1
INLET

CAL GAS 2
INLET

CAL GAS 3
INLET

DILUENT
PRESSURE
SENSOR

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller

On Back Panel
vio PHOTOMETER
INLET

REF/MEAS
Valve

vio

wht

PUMP

wht PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN

gry

blk

PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT

INTERNAL
VENT

blk

EXHAUST

blu

GPT
Valve

yel
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD
(on back panel)

Flow Control
(800 cm3)

red

orn
orn

CAL GAS 4
INLET

PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA

O3 Gen
Valve

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR

O3 Generator Assembly

O3
GENERATOR

grn

DILUENT
Valve

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

Pressure
Regulator

grn

DILUENT
INLET

PHOTOMETER
OUTLET

yel

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 2

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 1

red
yel

GPT
Volume

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 2

blu

VENT

blu
yel

yel

GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 3-25: T700 with Multiple Calibration Gas MFCs and O3 Options 1A and 2A Installed
PERMEATION TUBE GAS GENERATOR PNEUMATICS AND SETUP

The permeation tube gas generator (see Figure 3-26) is an alternative method for
producing known concentrations of stable gas such as SO2, NO2, etc. The generator
consists of a temperature regulated permeation tube oven, a flow restrictor, an optional
output desorber, and a user-supplied permeation tube. The optional desorber can
improve the response time of the calibrator especially when operating with NO2 tubes
(when operating with sulfur based gases it MUST be removed).
The permeation tube consists of a small container of a liquefied gas, with a small
window of PTFE through which the gas slowly permeates at a rate in the nanogram/min
range. If the tube is kept at constant temperature, usually about 50C, the device will
provide a stable source of gas for a year or more. A pneumatic diagram of the T700 with
this option is shown in Figure 3-27, including the generator.

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Perm Tube
Oven

Optional
Desorber

Figure 3-26: Permeation Tube Gas Generator Option

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Figure 3-27: Pneumatic Diagram of T700 with Permeation Generator
71
06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

72
06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Once installed and stabilized, generating a calibration gas from the T700 with a permeation
generator is the same as if the gas was being produced using a gas cylinder as the source, with the
following exceptions and note:


If you need a particular flow and don’t require a specific concentration then use
MANUAL mode. When generating in MANUAL mode the output concentration is
set by adjusting the DILUENT flow. The target and actual concentrations are
displayed as test values.



If you need a particular concentration but don’t require a specific flow then use
AUTO mode. When generating in AUTO mode the output concentration is set by
entering the desired concentration. The TOTAL flow entry has no effect; the
calibrator’s output flow depends on the target concentration. Again the target and
actual concentrations as well as the target and actual flows will be indicated as test
parameters.



Please note that the name for the permeation tube gas MUST be different than any
gas supplied to the calibrator from a bottle. For example if there is a H2S
permeation tube installed and a bottle of H2S gas connected to the calibrator, one
should be named H2S, while the second should be named something like H2S2.

The generator is shipped WITHOUT a permeation tube installed. The tube MUST be
removed during shipping or anytime that there is no diluent gas connected to the
calibrator since there must be a continuous purge flow across the tube. Permeation tubes
require 48 hours at 50C to reach a stable output. We recommend waiting this long
before any calibration checks, adjustments, or conclusions are reached about the
permeation tube. Once the T700 has stabilized, the response to the permeation tube is
not expected to change more than  5% if the zero air is provided for Teledyne API’s
M701 or other dry zero air source.
Teledyne API recommends that you purchase replacement permeation tubes from:
VICI METRONICS
2991 Corvin Drive
Santa Clara, CA 95051 USA
Phone 408-737-0550 Fax 408-737-0346

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.3.3. PERMEATION TUBE SETUP FOR THE T700
1. Press SETUP and GAS

2. Press PERM

3. Enter the elution rate for the permeation tube and select the type of gas by pressing the
gas button to scroll through the gas list until the desired gas is shown.
Note

The name of the gas produced by the permeation tube generator MUST be
different from the name of any bottle connected to the calibrator.

4. Then enter the gas flow through the permeation tube. This should be done with the flow
standard connected at the outlet of the perm tube oven.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.3.4. PERMEATION TUBE CALCULATION
The permeation tube concentration is determined by the permeation tube’s specific
output or elution rate (which is normally stated in ng/min), the permeation tube
temperature (C) and the air flow across it (slpm). The elution rate of the tube is
normally stated at an operating temperature of 50°C and is usually printed on the tube's
shipping container. By design, there is nominally 100 cm3/min of air flow across the
tube and the tube is maintained at 50°C. The output of the calibrator is the product of the
elution rate with the total of the 100 cm3/min through the generator and the flow of
dilutant gas.
The temperature is set at 50.0C. Check SETUP-MORE-VARS and scroll to the IZSTEMP variable to verify that the temperature is properly set. It should be set to 50C
with over-and-under temperature warnings set at 49C and 51C. There is a 105
cm3/min flow across the permeation tube at all times to prevent build-up of the gas in
the tubing.
This permeation tube source gas is diluted with zero air to generate desired
concentration of the specific gas. The calibrator’s output concentration (gas
concentration) can be calculated using the following equation:

C

P  Km
F

Where:
P = permeation rate, ng/min @ 50C.
Km =

24.46
, where 24.46 is the molar volume in liters @ 25C
MW
and MW is the molecular weight.
760mmHg . Km for SO2 = 0.382, NO2 = 0.532, H2S = 0.719, and NH3 =
1.436.

F = total flow rate (sum of 100 cm3/min and diluent flow), LPM.
C = concentration, ppm.

P 24.46

F MW

Thus,

C

Where,

Temperature at 50°C = 323
Temperature at 25°C = 298

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

DUAL GAS OUTPUT (NOY – SPECIAL) (OPT 73)

The standard output manifold has been removed and replaced with 2 output fittings,
labeled “Output A” and “Output B” (Figure 3-28). Output A is the primary calibration
gas output, all calibration functions can be performed on this output. Output B is a
secondary output, commonly used for NOy probe calibrations. This output cannot be
used for ozone generation using the photometer feedback. It can be used for standard
dilution calibrations as well as GPT using ozone.

Figure 3-28: Rear Panel with Dual Output Option

When the dual gas output option is enabled, the output must be selected when generating
gas. Use the following menu sequence: GEN>AUTO>[Select A or B]>ENTR. Your
chosen output is now selected for calibration.
The following illustration depicts the pneumatic flow for the T700 Calibrator with the
optional dual gas output at the output valve.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

Figure 3-29: Internal Pneumatics for T700 Calibrator with Optional Dual Gas Output (NOy – Special)

3.4. STARTUP, FUNCTIONAL CHECKS, AND INITIAL
CALIBRATION
If you are unfamiliar with the T700 principles of operation, we recommend that you read
Section 10.
For information on navigating the calibrator’s software menus, see the menu trees
described in Appendix A.

3.4.1. START UP
After the electrical and pneumatic connections are made, an initial functional check is in
order. Turn on the instrument. The exhaust fan (and pump if photometer option
installed) should start immediately. The front panel display will show a splash screen
and other information during the initialization process while the CPU loads the operating
system, the firmware and the configuration data.
The calibrator should automatically switch to STANDBY mode after completing the
brief boot-up sequence. Howevr, it the T700 dynamic dilution calibrator requires a
minimum of 30 minutes for all of its internal components to reach a stable operating
temperature. During the warm-up period, the front panel display may show messages in
the Parameters field.

3.4.2. WARNING MESSAGES
Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside be specified limits
during the calibrator’s warm-up period, the software will suppress most warning

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

conditions for 30 minutes after power up. If warning messages persist after the 30
minutes warm up period is over, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting
guidelines in Section 9 of this manual.
To view and clear warning messages, press:
SYSTEM RESET

Suppresses the
warning messages.

GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP

SYSTEM RESET
TEST

GEN STBY SEQ

TEST

GEN STBY SEQ MSG

CLR SETUP

returns the active
warnings to the message
field.

SYSTEM RESET
SETUP

Press

to clear the current
message.
If more than one warning is
active, the next message will take
its place.

SETUP

Once the last warning has
been cleared, the
function returns wil be
displayed in the calibrator’s
main

GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP

If a warning message persists after
several attempts to clear it, the message
may indicate a real problem and not an
artifact of the warm-up period.

Table 3-16 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start up.
Table 3-16: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up

MESSAGE

MEANING
The calibrator’s A/D converter or at least one analog input channel has not been
calibrated.

ANALOG CAL WARNING

Stored Configuration information has been reset to the factory settings or has
been erased.

CONFIG INITIALIZED
DATA INITIALIZED

The calibrator’s data storage was erased.
The firmware is unable to communicate with either the O3 generator or
photometer lamp I2C driver chips.1, 2

LAMP DRIVER WARN1, 2

The flow setting for one of the calibrator's mass flow controllers is less than 10%
or greater than 100% of the flow rating for that controller.

MFC CALIBRATION WARNING
MFC COMMUNICATION
WARNING
MFC FLOW WARNING

Firmware is unable to communicate with any MFC.
One of the calibrator’s mass flow controllers is being driven at less than 10% of
full scale or greater than full scale.

One of the calibrator’s mass flow controllers internal gas pressure is outside of
allowable limits.

MFC PRESSURE WARNING
O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING1

The O3 generator lamp temperature is outside of allowable limits.1

O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING1

The O3 generator’s reference detector has dropped below the minimum allowable
limit.1

O3 PUMP WARNING1

The pump associated with the O3 photometer has failed to turn on.1
2

PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING
PHOTO LAMP STABILITY
WARNING

The photometer lamp temperature is outside of allowable limits.2
Photometer lamp reference step changes occur more than 25% of the time.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

MESSAGE

Getting Started

MEANING
2

PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING

The photometer reference reading is outside of allowable limits.2
The calibrator’s motherboard was not detected during power up.

REAR BOARD NOT DET
REGULATOR PRESSURE
WARNING
RELAY BOARD WARN
SYSTEM RESET
VALVE BOARD WARN

- THIS WARNING only appears on Serial I/O COMM Port(s).
- The Front Panel Display will be frozen, blank or will not respond.
The gas pressure regulator associated with the internal O3 generator option is
reporting a pressure outside of allowable limits.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the calibrator’s relay PCA.
The calibrator has been turned off and on or the CPU was reset.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the valve controller board.

Only applicable for calibrators with the optional the O3 generator installed.

Only applicable for calibrators with the optional photometer installed.

On instrument with multiple Cal Gas MFCs installed, the MFC FLOW WARNING occurs when the flow rate requested
is <10% of the range of the lowest rated MFC (i.e. all of the cal gas MFC are turned off).

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.4.3. FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
5. After the calibrator’s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the
software properly supports any hardware options that are installed.
6. Check to ensure that the calibrator is functioning within allowable operating parameters.
Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the calibrator’s front panel as
well as their expected values. These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing
problems with your calibrator (Section 9.1.2). The enclosed Final Test and Validation
Data sheet (P/N 05731) lists these values before the instrument left the factory.

To view the current values of these parameters press the following button sequence on
the calibrator’s front panel. Remember that until the unit has completed its warm-up,
these parameters may not have stabilized.

7. If your calibrator is operating via Ethernet and your network is running a dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) software package, the Ethernet will automatically
configure its interface with your LAN. However, it is a good idea to check these settings
80

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

to ensure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings
from your network server (See Section 5.4.1).
8. If your network is not running DHCP or if you wish to establish a more permanent
Ethernet connection, you will have to configure the calibrator’s Ethernet interface
manually (See Section 5.4.1.1).

3.4.4. SETTING UP THE CALIBRATION GAS INLET PORTS
The T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator generates calibration gases of various
concentrations by precisely mixing component gases of known concentrations with
diluent (zero air). When the instrument is equipped with the optional O3 generator and
photometer, it can also use the gas phase titration method for generating very precise
concentrations of NO2.
In either case, it is necessary to program the concentrations of the component gases
being used into the T700’s memory.

3.4.5. DEFAULT GAS TYPES
The T700 calibrator is programmed with the following default gas types corresponding
to the most commonly used component gases:
Table 3-17: T700 Default Gas Types
NAME
NONE
SO2
H2S
N2O
NO
NO2
NH3
CO
CO2
HC
1

GAS TYPE
Used for gas inlet ports where no gas bottle is attached
sulfur dioxide
hydrogen sulfide
nitrous oxide
nitric oxide
nitrogen dioxide
1
Ammonia
carbon monoxide, and;
carbon dioxide
General abbreviation for hydrocarbon

It is not recommended that ammonia be used in the T700.

3.4.6. USER DEFINED GAS TYPES
3.4.6.1. User Defined Gas Types – General
The T700 calibrator can accept up to four different user defined gases. This allows the
use of:

06873B DCN6388



Less common component gases not included in the T700’s default list;



More than one bottle of the same gas but at different concentrations. In this case,
different user-defined names are created for the different bottles of gas.

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

EXAMPLE: Two bottles of CO2 are being used, allow the calibrator to create two
different CO2 calibration gases at the same flow rate.
Since identical names must not be assigned to two different bottles, one
bottle can be programmed using the default name “CO2” and the other
bottle programmed by assigning a user defined name such as “CO2A”.
Alternatively, both bottles can be assigned user defined names; e.g.
CO2A and CO2B

User defined gas names are added to the T700’s gas library and will appear as choices
during the various calibrator operations along with the default gas names listed in
Section 3.4.5.
In its default state, the T700’s four user defined gases are named usr1, usr2, usr3 and
usr4, each with a default MOLAR mass of 28.890 (the MOLAR mass of ambient air).
All four are enabled.
To define a user gas you must first define the GAS NAME and then set the MOLAR
MASS.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.4.6.2. User Defined Gas Types – Defining the Gas Name
In this example, we will be using PROPANE (C2H8). Press:
Make sure that the T700
is in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

SETUP X.X

CFG

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SOURCE GAS CONFIG

CYL USER

SETUP X.X

EXIT

0) GAS:NONE MASS:28.890 GM

PREV NEXT

EDIT PRNT

EXIT

Continue pressing next until ...

SETUP X.X

15) GAS:USR1 MASS:28.890 GM

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X

EDIT PRNT

Toggle these buttons to
change the GAS NAME
Available characters are
A-Z; 0-9 and “-“

EXIT

This number is used as a
default value for all user
gases until reset by the
operator

GAS:USR1 MASS:28.890 GM

ENAB NAME MASS

SETUP X.X

28.890 is the Molar Mass of
ambient air.

EXIT

GAS NAME:USR1
O

ENTR EXIT

EXIT discards the new
GAS NAME
ENTR accepts the new
GAS NAME

SETUP X.X

GAS:PROP MASS:28.890 GM

ENAB NAME MASS

EXIT

Alternatively, one could use the chemical formula for this gas, c2h8 or any other 4-letter
name(e.g., PRPN, MY-1, etc.)
Note

06873B DCN6388

If you have the same type of gas, but two different concentrations (for example,
two concentrations of CO2), assign the second concentration to one of the user
defined gases (e.g. CO2 {default name} and CO2B {user defined}).

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.4.6.3. User Defined Gas Types – Setting the MOLAR MASS
The molar mass of a substance is the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of that specific
substance. Conversely, one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar
mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance.
EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12.011 therefore the molar mass of Carbon
is 12.011 grams, conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of
carbon atoms that weighs 12.011 grams.

Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements.
To determine the Molar mass of a gas, add together the atomic weights of the elements
that make up the gas.
EXAMPLE: The chemical formula for Propane is C2H8. Therefore the molecular mass
of propane is:
(12.011 x 2) + (1.008 x 8) = 24.022 + 8.064 = 32.086

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

To set the molar mass of a user defined gas, press:

Note

06873B DCN6388

If the contents of the bottle are predominantly N2, use the molar mass of N2
(28.01).

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.4.6.4. Enabling and Disabling Gas Types
By default, all of the gases listed in Section 3.4.5 and the four undefined USER gases
are ENABLED. Any of these can be disabled. Disabling a gas type means that it does
not appear in certain prompts during portions of the T700’s operation (e.g. setting up
sequences) and is not figured into the calibrators calculating when determining
calibration mixtures.
To disable a gas type, press:

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.4.7. DEFINING CALIBRATION SOURCE GAS CYLINDERS
3.4.7.1. Setting Up the Ports with Single Gas Cylinders
To program the T700 calibrator’s source gas input ports for a single gas cylinder, press:

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Table 3-18: T700 Units of Measure List
SYMBOL

UNITS

RESOLUTION

PPM

parts per million

000.0

PPB

parts per billion

000.0

MGM

milligrams per cubic meter

000.0

UGM

micrograms per cubic meter

000.0

PCT

percent

0.000

PPT

parts per thousand

00.00

Repeat the above steps for each of the T700 calibrator’s four gas inlet ports. If no gas is
present on a particular port, leave it set at the default setting of NONE.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.4.7.2. Setting Up the Ports with Multiple Gas Cylinders
When an application utilizes multiple gas cylinders, program as follows (note that the
GENERATE>AUTO menu (Section 4.2.6) differs from that for a single gas (Section 4.2.1):

06873B DCN6388

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3.4.8. SELECTING AN OPERATING MODE FOR THE O3 GENERATOR
The O3 generator can be set to operate in three different modes: Constant, Reference,
and Bench.

3.4.8.1. CNST (CONSTANT)
In this mode, the O3 output of the generator is based on a single, constant, drive voltage.
There is no Feedback loop control by the T700’s CPU in this mode.

3.4.8.2. REF (REFERENCE)
The O3 control loop will use the generator reference detector's UV lamp measurement as
input. This mode does not use the photometer to control the ozone generator.
This setting will be the default mode (if not equipped with the photometer option) of the
T700 calibrator and will be used whenever the calibrator is using the GENERATE 
AUTO command or the GENERATE sequence step to create a calibration mixture.
When the GENERATE  MAN command or the MANUAL sequence steps are active,
the local O3 generator mode (chosen during when the command/step is programmed)
will take precedence.

3.4.8.3. BNCH (BENCH)
The O3 concentration control loop will use the photometer’s O3 measurement as input.
To select a default O3 generator mode, press:

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Getting Started

3.4.9. SETTING THE T700’S TOTAL GAS FLOW RATE
The default total gas flow rate for the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is 2 LPM. The
calibrator uses this flow rate, along with the concentrations programmed into the
calibrator for the component gas cylinders during set up, to compute individual flow
rates for both diluent gas and calibration source gases in order to produce calibration
mixtures that match the desired output concentrations.
This Total Flow rate may be changed to fit the users’ application. Once the flow is
changed, then the new flow value becomes the total flow for all the gas concentration
generated and computes again the individual flow rates of the component gases and
diluent accordingly.
Note

• The minimum total flow should equal 150% of the flow requirements of all of the
instruments to which the T700 will be supplying calibration gas.
• Example: If the T700 is will be expected to supply calibration gas mixtures
simultaneously to a system in composed of three analyzers each requiring 2
LPM , the proper Total Flow output should be set at:
(2 + 2 + 2) x 1.5 = 9.000 LPM

To set the TOTAL FLOW of the of the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator, press:

Note

06873B DCN6388

It is not recommended that you set the TOTAL FLOW rate to be <10% or >100%
of the full scale rating of the diluent MFC

Getting Started

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

The TOTAL FLOW is also affected by the following:


The GENERATE  AUTO menu (see Section 4.2.1) or;



As part of a GENERATE step when programming a sequence (see Section
4.3.2.1).

The operator can individually set both the diluent flow rate and flow rates for the
component gas cylinders as part of the following:

Note



The GENERATE  MANUAL menu (see Section 4.2.2) or;



As part of a MANUAL step when programming a sequence (see Section
4.3.2.9).

When calculating total required flow for T700’s with O3 photometers installed
ensure to account for the 800 cc/min flow it requires.

06873B DCN6388

PART II
–
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

06873B DCN6388

4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES AND BASIC

OPERATION
The T700 calibrator is a micro-computer-controlled calibrator with a dynamic menu
interface for easy and yet powerful and flexible operation. All major operations are
controlled from the front panel touch screen control.
To assist in navigating the system’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in
Appendix A of this manual.
Note

The flowcharts in this section depict the manner in which the front panel touch
screen is used to operate the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator. They depict
typical representations of the display during the various operations being
described. They are not intended to be exact and may differ slightly from the
actual display of your system.

Note

The ENTR button may disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of
the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to
25:00:00. Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR button will
reappear.

The T700 calibrator software has a variety of operating modes, which are controlled
from the front panel touch screen. (Remote operation is described in Section 6). The
most common mode that the calibrator will be operating in is the STANDBY mode. In
this mode, the calibrator and all of its subsystems are inactive (no LED lit on front panel
display), although TEST functions and WARNING messages are still updated and can
be examined via the front panel display.
The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for
performing certain configuration operations, such as programming the concentration of
source gases, setting up automatic calibration sequences and configuring the
analog/digital inputs and outputs. The SETUP mode is also used for accessing various
diagnostic tests and functions during troubleshooting.

06873B DCN6388

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display

The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the
unit is currently running.
Besides STANDBY and SETUP, other modes the calibrator can be operated in are
listed in Table 4-1:

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Table 4-1: Calibrator Operating Modes

MODE
STANDBY
GENERATE

DESCRIPTION
The calibrator and all of its subsystems are inactive.
In this mode, the instrument is engaged in producing calibration gas
mixtures.
MANUAL In this mode, the instrument is engaged in producing calibration
gas mixtures.

SETUP3

PURGE

The calibrator is using diluent (zero air) to purge its internal
pneumatics of all source gas and previously created calibration
mixtures.

GPT1

The calibrator is using the O3 generator and source gas inputs to
mix and generate calibration gas using the gas phase titration
method.

GPTPS2

Stands for Gas Phase Titration Preset. In this mode the T700
determines the precise performance characteristics of the O3
generator at the target values for an upcoming GPT calibration.

SETUP mode is being used to configure the calibrator.
DIAG

One of the calibrator’s diagnostic modes is being utilized. When
the diagnostic functions that have the greatest potential to
conflict with generating concentrations are active, the instrument
is automatically placed into standby mode.

This mode is not available in units without O3 generators installed.

This mode is not available in units without internal photometers installed.

The revision of the Teledyne API software installed in this calibrator will be displayed following
the word SETUP. E.g. “SETUP G.4”

06873B DCN6388

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.1. STANDBY MODE
When the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is in standby mode, it is at rest. All
internal valves are closed except the diluent inlet valve. The mass flow controllers are
turned off. On units with O3 generator and photometer options installed, these
subsystems are inactive.

Note



The SETUP  GAS submenu is only available when the instrument is in STANDBY
mode.



Some functions under the SETUP  MORE  DIAG submenu, those which conflict
with accurate creation of calibration gas mixtures (e.g. ANALOG OUTPUT STEP
TEST) automatically place the calibrator into STANDBY mode when activated.



The MFC pressures are not monitored in standby mode since the MFCs are turned
OFF. This prevents erroneous MASS FLOW WARNING messages from
appearing.

The T700 calibrator should always be placed in STANDBY mode when not
needed to produce calibration gas. The last step of any calibration sequences
should always be the STANDY instruction.

Table 4-2 shows the status of the T700’s various pneumatic components when the
calibrator is in STANDBY mode.
Table 4-2: Status of Internal Pneumatics During STANDBY Mode
VALVES

MFCs

(X = Closed; O = Open)
CYL1

CYL2

CYL3

CYL4

PURGE

DILUENT

GPT

O3
GEN

PHOT
1
M/R

CAL1

CAL2

Reference
Phase

OFF

DILUENT
OFF

PHOT
PUMP

OFF

Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.

In instruments with optional O3 generators installed, airflow is maintained during
STANDBY mode so that the generator can continue to operate at its most efficient
temperature.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

gry

O3 Generator Assembly

grn

brn
brn

brn

On Back Panel
vio
vio

wht
wht

gry
blk
red
blk
orn
orn
yel
yel

red

yel
yel

blu

Figure 4-2: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Generator and Photometer Options during STANDBY

4.1.1. TEST FUNCTIONS
A variety of TEST functions are available for viewing at the front panel whenever the
calibrator is in STANDBY Mode. These functions provide information about the
present operating status of the calibrator and are useful during troubleshooting (see
Section 9). Table 4-3 lists the available TEST functions.

06873B DCN6388

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

To view these TEST functions, press:

Figure 4-3: Viewing T700 Test Functions

100

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Table 4-3: Test Functions Defined

DISPLAY

UNITS

A-CAL

LPM

The actual gas flow rate of source gas being output by the calibrator.

T-CAL

LPM

Target source gas flow rate for which the calibrator output is set.

A-DIL

LPM

The actual gas flow rate of diluent (zero) gas being output by the
calibrator.

LPM

Target diluent (zero) gas flow rate for which the calibrator output is set.

T-DIL
O3GENREF
O3FLOW

O3GENDRV

O3LAMPTMP

DESCRIPTION

The voltage being output by the O3 generator reference detector.

LPM

The gas flow rate for which the O3 generator is set.

The drive voltage of the O3 generator UV lamp.

°C

O3 generator UV lamp temperature.

CAL PRES

PSIG

The gas pressure of the source gas being supplied to the calibrator.

DIL PRES

PSIG

The gas pressure of the Diluent gas being supplied to the calibrator
Diluent pressure.

PSIG

The gas pressure at the pressure regulator on the O3 generator supply
line.

REG PRES

A-GAS

Actual concentration, and in some modes the actual flow rate, of the
source gas in the calibration mixture being generated is displayed.

T-GAS

The Target concentration, and in some modes the target flow rate, of
the source gas in the calibration mixture being generated is displayed.
°C

Internal chassis temperature.

The average UV Detector output during the SAMPLE PORTION of the
optional photometer’s measurement cycle.

The average UV Detector output during the REFERENCE portion of
the optional photometer’s measurement cycle.

LPM

The gas flow rate as measured by the flow sensor located between the
optical bench and the internal pump.

BOX TMP
PH MEAS

PH REF

PH FLW

PH LTEMP
PH PRES

°C

1.000

ppb

PH SLOPE

In-hg-A
2

PH STEMP

PH OFFST

°C

TEST

TIME

HH:MM:SS

The temperature of the UV lamp in the photometer bench.
The pressure of the gas inside the photometer’s sample chamber as
measured by a solid-state pressure sensor located downstream of the
photometer.
The temperature of the gas inside the sample chamber of the
photometer.
Photometer slope computed when the photometer was calibrated at the
factory.
Photometer offset computed when the photometer was calibrated at
the factory.
Displays the analog signal level of the TEST analog output channel.
Current time as determined by the calibrator’s internal clock.

Only appears when the optional O3 generator is installed.

Only appears when the optional O3 photometer is installed.

Only appears when the TEST channel has been activated.

06873B DCN6388

101

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.2. GENERATE MODE
The Generate Mode allows the user to generate the desired calibration gas mixtures.
The types of gas include NO, NO2, SO2, CO, HC or ZERO gas based on the source gas
concentration entered during initial setup (see Section 3.4.7). If the unit has an optional
O3 generator installed, various concentrations of O3 can be generated as well.

Instrument Chassis
DILUENT
INLET

On Back Panel
PHOTOMETER
INLET

DILUENT
Valve

brn
brn

PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

Purge
Valve
CAL GAS 1
INLET

CAL GAS 2
INLET

CAL GAS 3
INLET

PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT

brn

DILUENT
PRESSURE
SENSOR

EXHAUST
Diluent
Mass Flow Controller
PHOTOMETER
OUTLET

CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 1

orn
orn

CAL GAS 4
INLET

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 2

yel

blu
yel

GAS INPUT MANIFOLD
(on back panel)

VENT

blu

yel

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller

GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 4-4: Gas Flow through Basic T700 in GENERATE Mode

Table 4-4 shows the status of the T700’s various pneumatic components when the
calibrator is in GENERATE mode:
Table 4-4: Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE Mode
VALVES
GAS TYPE

MFCs

(X = Closed; O = Open)
CYL
1

CYL
2

CYL
3

CYL
4

PURGE

DILUENT

Generate
Source Gas

Generate O3

GPT

PHOT M/R

CAL1

CAL21

DILUENT

Reference
Phase

ON3

OFF

Switching

OFF

Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.

The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open.

In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

102

PHOT
PUMP

O3
GEN

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

O3 Generator Assembly

O3
GENERATOR
Flow Control
(100 cm3)

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Figure 4-5: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when Generating Non-O3 Source Gas

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

O3 Generator Assembly

O3
GENERATOR
Flow Control
(100 cm3)

Figure 4-6: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when Generating O3

06873B DCN6388

103

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.2.1. GENERATE  AUTO: BASIC GENERATION OF CALIBRATION
MIXTURES
This is the simplest procedure for generating calibration gas mixtures. In this mode, the
user makes three choices:


The type of component gas to be used from the list of gases input during initial set
up (see Section 3.4.7);



The target concentration, and;



The TOTAL FLOW to be output by the T700.

Using this information, the T700 calibrator automatically calculates and sets the
individual flow rates for the Diluent and chosen component gases to create the desired
calibration mixture.
Note

104

This menu, which shows the SEQ (sequence) button, differs from the
GENERATE>AUTO menu for cylinders of multiple gases (Section 4.2.6).

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

To use the GENERATE  AUTO feature, press:

06873B DCN6388

105

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.2.2. GENERATE  MAN: GENERATING CALIBRATION MIXTURES
MANUALLY
This mode provides complete the user with more complete control of the gas mixture
process. Unlike the AUTO mode, MAN mode requires the user set the both the
component gas flow rate and diluent airflow rate. This allows the user control over the
mixing ratio and total calibration gas flow rate.
In addition, if the T700 calibrator is equipped with the optional O3 generator and O3 is to
be included in the calibration mixture (e.g. using the GPT or GPTPS features), the user
also needs to set the ozone generator mode and set point.
The TOTAL FLOW is defined by the user depending on system requirements.
Note

4.2.2.1. Determining the Source Gas Flow Rate
To determine the required flow rate of the component source gas use the following
formula
Equation 4-1

GAS flow =

C f × Totalflow
Ci

WHERE:
Cf = target concentration of diluted gas
Ci = concentration of the source gas
GASflow = source gas flow rate
EXAMPLE:


A target concentration of 200 ppm of SO2 is needed.



The Concentration of the SO2 Source is 600 ppm



The requirement of the system are 9.000 LPM



The required source gas flow rate would be:
GASflow = (200 ppm x 9.000 LPM) ÷ 600 ppm
GASflow = 1800.000 ppm/LPM) ÷ 600 ppm
GASflow = 3.000 LPM

106

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.2.2.2. Determining the Diluent Gas Flow Rate
To determine the required flow rate of the diluent gas use the following formula:
Equation 4-2

DILflow = Totalflow - GASflow
WHERE:
GASflow = source gas flow rate (from Equation 6-1)
Totalflow = total gas flow requirements of the system
DILflow = required diluent gas flow
EXAMPLE:
 If the requirement of the system is 9.000 LPM,
 The source gas flow rate is set at 3.00 LPM.
 The required source gas flow rate would be:
DILflow = 9.0 LPM – 3.0 LPM
DILflow = 6.0 LPM

4.2.2.3. Determining the Diluent Gas Flow Rate with the Optional O3 Generator Installed
If the optional O3 generator is installed and in use, Equation 6.2 will be slightly
different, since the O3flow is a constant value and is displayed as a TEST function on the
T700’s front panel. A typical value for O3flow is 105 cm3/min.
Equation 4-3

DILflow = Totalflow - O3 flow
WHERE:
GASflow = source gas flow rate (from Equation 6-1)
Totalflow = total gas flow requirements of the system.
O3 flow = the flow rate set for the O3 generator; a constant value (typically
about 0.105 LPM)
DILflow = required diluent gas flow
EXAMPLE:




Note

If the requirement of the system are 9.000 LPM,
The source gas flow rate is set at 3.00 LPM.
The required source gas flow rate would be:
DILflow = 9.0 LPM – 0.105 LPM
DILflow = 8.895 LPM

It is not recommended to set any flow rate to <10% or >100% of the full scale
rating of that associated mass flow controller.
WITH MULTIPLE CALIBRATIONS MASS FLOW CONTROLLERS INSTALLED:
• The combined flow potential of both mass flow controllers is available with the
following limits: The limits are <10% of the lowest rated MFC or >100% of the
combined full-scale ratings for both mass flow controllers.
• The T700 will automatically select the MFC with the lowest flow rate that can
accommodate the requested flow, thereby affording the most precise flow
control.
• If no single MFC can accommodate the requested flow rate, multiple mass flow
controllers are used.

06873B DCN6388

107

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.2.2.4. Setting the Source Gas and Diluent Flow Rates Using the GENERATE  MAN
Menu
In the following demonstration we will be using the values from the examples given
with Equations 6-1 and 6-2 above and assume a T700 calibrator with at least one source
gas mass flow controller capable of 3.0 LPM output.
Using the example from Equations 6-1 and 6-2 above, press:

108

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.2.3. GENERATE  GPT: PERFORMING A GAS PHASE TITRATION
CALIBRATION
4.2.3.1. GPT Theory
The principle of GPT is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O3,
which produces quantities of NO2 as shown by the following equation:
Equation 4-4

NO  O3 
 NO2  O2  h ( light )
It has been empirically determined that under controlled circumstances the NO-O3
reaction is very efficient (<1% residual O3), therefore the concentration of NO2 resulting
from the mixing of NO and O3 can be precisely predicted and controlled as long as the
following conditions are met:


The amount of O3 used in the mixture is known.



The amount of NO used in the mixture is AT LEAST 10% greater than the amount
O3 in the mixture.



The volume of the mixing chamber is known.



The NO and O3 flow rates (from which the time the two gases are in the mixing
chamber) are low enough to give a residence time of the reactants in the mixing
chamber of >2.75 ppm min.

Given the above conditions, the amount of NO2 being output by the T700 will be equal
to (at a 1:1 ratio) to the amount of O3 added.
Since the O3 flow rate of the T700’s O3 generator is a set fixed value (typically about
0.105 LPM) and the GPT chamber’s volume is known, once the TOTAL GAS FLOW
requirements, the source concentration of NO, and the target concentration for the O3
generator are entered into the calibrator’s software. The T700 adjusts the NO flow rate
and diluent (zero air) flow rate to create the appropriate NO2 concentration at the output.

4.2.3.2. Choosing an Input Concentration for the NO
It is important to ensure that there is enough NO in the GPT chamber to use up all of the
O3. Excess O3 will react with the resulting NO2 to produce NO3. Since NO3 is
undetectable by most NOx analyzers, this will result in false low readings.
The EPA requires that the NO content of a GPT mixture be at least 10% higher than the
O3 content. Since there is no negative effect to having too much NO in the GPT
chamber, Teledyne API recommends that the NO concentration be chosen to be some
value higher (as much as twice as high) as the highest intended target NO2 value and
kept constant.
As long as the flow rate is also kept constant three of the four conditions listed in
Section 4.2.3.1 above are therefore constant and the NO2 output can be easily and
reliably varied by simply changing the O3 concentration.
EXAMPLE:



06873B DCN6388

Calibration values of NO2 from 200 ppb to 450 ppb will be needed.
The NO gas input concentration should be no lower than 495 ppb and can be
as high as 900 ppb.
109

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.2.3.3. Determining the TOTAL FLOW for GPT Calibration Mixtures
The total flow rate is defined by the user depending on system requirements.
The minimum total flow should equal 150% of the flow requirements of all of the
instruments to which the T700 will be supplying calibration gas.
EXAMPLE:

Note



If the T700 is will be expected to supply calibration gas mixtures simultaneously
to a system in composed of three analyzers each requiring 2 LPM, the proper
Total Flow output should be set at:



(2 + 2 + 2) x 1.5 = 9.000 LPM

It is not recommended to set any flow rate to <10% or >100% of the full scale
rating of that associated mass flow controller.
WITH MULTIPLE CALIBRATIONS MASS FLOW CONTROLLERS INSTALLED:
• The full combined flow potential of both mass flow controllers is available to
use with the following limits: The limits are <10% of the lowest rated MFC or
>100% of the combined full-scale ratings for both mass flow controllers.
• The T700 will automatically select the MFC with the lowest flow rate that can
accommodate the requested flow, thereby affording the most precise flow
control.
• If no single MFC can accommodate the requested flow rate, multiple mass flow
controllers are used.

Given this information, the T700 calibrator determines the NO gas flow by the formula:
Equation 4-5

NO GAS flow

C NO 2 × Totalflow
=
C NO

WHERE:
CNO2 = target concentration for the NO2 output
CNO = concentration of the NO gas input
NO GASflow = NO source gas flow rate

And the diluent (zero air) gas flow by the formula:
Equation 4-6

DILflow = Totalflow- NO GASflow - O3flow
WHERE:
GASflow = source gas flow rate (from Equation 6-1)
Totalflow = total gas flow requirements of the system.
O3 flow = the flow rate set for the O3 generator; a constant value
(typically about 0.105 LPM)
DILflow = required diluent gas flow

110

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.2.3.4. T700 Calibrator GPT Operation
The following table and figures show the status of the T700’s internal pneumatic
components and internal gas flow when the instrument is in GPT generating modes.
Table 4-5: Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE  GPT Mode
VALVES

MFCs

(X = Closed; O = Open)

MODE

CYL
1

CYL
2

CYL
3

CYL
4

PURGE

DILUENT

GPT

O3
GEN

PHOT M/R

CAL1

CAL21

DILUENT

Reference
Phase

ON3

GPT
1

Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.

The valve associated with the cylinder containing NO source gas is open.

In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

PHOT
PUMP

OFF

Instrument Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH

Flow Control
(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR

grn

DILUENT
Valve
brn

ON
brn

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

brn

CAL GAS 1
INLET

CAL GAS 2
INLET

CAL GAS 3
INLET

Flow Control
(100 cm3)

Purge
Valve

DILUENT
PRESSURE
SENSOR

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller

PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

On Back Panel
vio PHOTOMETER

O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA

Flow Control
(800 cm3)

INLET

REF/MEAS
Valve

vio

wht

OFF

wht PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN

O3 Gen
Valve

CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR

orn

O3 Generator Assembly

grn

O3
GENERATOR

DILUENT
INLET

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

Pressure
Regulator

gry
blk

red

INTERNAL
VENT

blk

GPT
Valve

orn

CAL GAS 4
INLET

yel
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD
(on back panel)

yel

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 1

EXHAUST

PHOTOMETER
OUTLET

red

yel

PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 1

yel

GPT
Volume

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 2

blu

VENT
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 4-7: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when in GPT Mode

06873B DCN6388

111

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.2.3.5. Initiating a GPT Calibration Gas Generation
Note

It is highly recommended to perform a GPT Pre-Set before initiating any GPT gas
generation (Section 4.2.4).

To initiate GPT gas generation you will need to know:


The TOTAL GAS FLOW for the mixture output;



The Target O3 concentration (equal to the target NO2 concentration to be
generated), and;



The NO source gas concentration.

Then, press:
Make sure that the
T700 is in STANDBY
mode

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

STANDBY
AUTO

SYSTEM RESET

MAN

PURG GPT GPTPS

STANDBY

Toggle these buttons
to set the NO target
concentration.

SETUP

GPT:0.0 PPB NO
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

ENTR accepts the new gas type &
target concentration

MUST be at least 10%
Higher than the Target
O3 Concentration
STANDBY

Toggle these buttons
to set the NO target
concentration.

GPT:0.0 PPB O3
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

EXIT discards the new gas type &
target concentration
ENTR accepts the new gas type &
target concentration

Should be equal to the
expected NO2
concentration
STANDBY
0

TOTAL FLOW = 2.000 LPM
2.

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
set the target TOTAL
FLOW.
(Default = 2.000 LPM)

EXIT discards the new gas type &
target concentration

GPT
TEST

ACT CAL=2.000 LPM

EXIT discards the new
flow rate
ENTR accepts the
new gas flow rate

GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP

The T700 will stay in generate mode
until the STBY button is pressed.

112

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.2.4. GENERATE  GPTPS: PERFORMING A GAS PHASE TITRATION
PRE-SET
The GPT Pre-Set feature simulates a GPT mixing operation in order to determine the
exact output of the calibrators O3 generator. As described in Section 4.2.3.1, all other
things being equal, the concentration of the NO2 being generated using the GPT feature
will be equal to the amount of O3 used. Therefore, the more accurately the O3 generator
performs the more accurate the NO2 output will be.
When operating in GPTPS mode diluent gas (zero air) is substituted for the NO gas that
would be mixed with the O3 in normal GPT mode. The resulting unaffected O3 output
of the O3 generator is shunted through the T700’s internal photometer, which measures
the ACTUAL O3 concentration in the gas.
Once the exact O3 concentration being output by the generator is determined, the
calibrator’s software adjusts the O3 drive voltage up or down so that the output of the
generator matches as closely as possible, the target concentration requested. This
adjusted generator setting will be used during any subsequent real GPT operation.
Note

The T700 has a learning algorithm during the O3 generation (see Section 4.2) or
Gas Phase Titration Pre-Set Mode (GPTPS) (Sections 4.2.3.5 and 4.2.4). It may
take up to one hour for each new concentration/flow (point) that is entered into
the instrument. Once the instrument has several points memorized in its cache,
any new point that is entered will automatically be estimated within 1% error
(with photometer) and 10% error (with O3 generator and GPTPS).

Note

This adjustment is only valid for the O3 concentration used during the Pre-Set
operation. GPT Presets must be re-run for each different target NO2 value.

In order to keep the resulting concentration of O3 consistent with the GPT mixture being
simulated, the instrument’s software adjust the flow rate of the diluent gas to substitutes
an amount of diluent gas equal to the amount of NO gas that would normally be used.

4.2.4.1. T700 Calibrator GPTPS Operation
The following table and figures show the status of the T700’s internal pneumatic
components and internal gas flow when the instrument is in GPTPS generating modes.
Table 4-6: Status of Internal Pneumatics During GENERATE  GPTPS Mode
VALVES
MODE
GPTPS

MFCs

(X = Closed; O = Open)
CYL
1

CYL
2

CYL
3

CYL
4

PURGE

DILUENT

GPT

O3
GEN

PHOT M/R

CAL1

CAL2

Switching

OFF

Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.

The valve associated with the cylinder containing NO source gas is open.

In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

06873B DCN6388

DILUENT

PHOT
PUMP

113

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

O3 Generator Assembly

O3
GENERATOR
Flow Control
(100 cm3)

Figure 4-8: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when in GPTPS Mode

114

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.2.4.2. Initiating a GPT Pre-Set
To activate the GPTPS feature you will need to know:


The TOTAL GAS FLOW for the mixture output;



The Target O3 concentration (equal to the target NO2 concentration being
simulated), and;



The NO source gas concentration.

Then, press:

06873B DCN6388

115

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.2.5. GENERATE  PURGE: ACTIVATING THE T700’S PURGE FEATURE
The T700 calibrator’s PURGE feature clears residual source gases and calibration
mixtures gases from the previous generated steps from the instruments internal
pneumatics as well as any external pneumatic lines down stream from the calibrator.
When activated, the PURGE feature:


Opens the Diluent (zero air) inlet valve allowing zero air to flow into the calibrator
form its external, pressurized source;



Adjusts the diluent air mass flow controller (MFC1) to maximum flow;



Adjusts all of the component gas mass flow controllers installed in the calibrator to
maximum flows, 10 SLPM and 100 SCCPM accordingly, to flush out the pneumatic
system of the T700.

The PURGE air is vented through the VENT port of the rear panel of the instrument
(see Figure 3-4).
Table 4-7: Internal Pneumatics During Purge Mode
VALVES
MODE
PURGE

MFCs

(X = Closed; O = Open)
CYL
1

CYL
2

CYL
3

CYL
4

PURGE

DILUENT

GPT

O3
GEN

PHOT
M/R

CAL1

CAL2

DILUENT

Switching

ON3

Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.

The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open.

In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

PHOT
PUMP

gry

O3 Generator Assembly

grn

brn

On Back Panel
vio

vio

wht
wht

gry
blk

red

blk
orn
orn
yel
yel

yel

red
yel

blu

Figure 4-9: Gas Flow through T700 with O3 Options when in PURGE mode
116

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

To activate the PURGE feature, press:

IMPORTANT

06873B DCN6388

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
This PURGE feature does not stop automatically. Manually press the
STBY button to stop the purging process..

117

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.2.6. GENERATE ACT>: VIEWING CONCENTRATIONS GENERATED
FROM MULTI-GAS CYLINDERS
When a concentration mixture is being generated, using a multiple-gas cylinder as a
source the software uses the Diluent and Cal gas flow rates to calculate the actual
concentration for each gas in the cylinder so that it is possible to see the concentrations
of all of the gases being output by the T700 calibrator.
EXAMPLE: For a cylinder containing a blend of CH4, NO and NO2, a common
contaminant is present in small quantities in bottles containing NO: This will display the
actual concentration being generated for each gas in the multiple-gas cylinder.
When generating a concentration of one of the two primary gases in the cylinder (e.g.
NO or CH4) using the GEN  AUTO, GEN  MANUAL buttons or a preprogrammed
calibration SEQUENCE, press:

Note

The ACT> button only appears if the T700 is generating gas from a multiple-gas
cylinder. To start any preprogrammed calibration SEQuences, first place the
calibrator in STANDBY mode (the SEQ button replaces the ACT> button)
For NO cylinders, the instrument will only display the amount of NO2 in the
calibration mixture if the concentration of NO2 present in the bottle is known and
was programmed into the bottle’s definition (see Section 3.4.7).

4.2.6.1. Using the T700 Calibrator as an O3 Photometer
If the T700 calibrator is equipped with the optional O3 photometer the ACT> test
function allows it to be used as an O3 photometer to measure external sources of O3.

118

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.3. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SEQUENCES
The T700 calibrator can be set up to perform automatic calibration sequences of
multiple steps. These sequences can perform all of the calibration mixture operations
available for manual operation and can be initiated by one of the following methods:


front panel touch screen buttons



internal timer,



external digital control inputs



RS-232 interface



Ethernet interface



sub-processes in another sequence

4.3.1. SETUP  SEQ: PROGRAMMING CALIBRATION SEQUENCES
A sequence is a database of single or multiple steps where each single step is an
instruction that causes the instrument to perform an operation. These steps are grouped
under a user defined SEQUENCE NAME.
For each sequence, there are seven attributes that must be programmed. They attributes
are listed in Table 4-8.
Table 4-8: Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set Up Attributes

ATTRIBUTE NAME

DESCRIPTION

NAME

Allows the user to create a text string of up to 10 characters identifying the sequence.

REPEAT COUNT
CC INPUT

Number of times, between 0 and 100, to execute the same sequence. A value of 0
(zero) causes the sequence to execute indefinitely.
Specifies which of the T700’s Digital Control Inputs will initiate the sequence.

CC OUTPUT

Specifies which of the T700’s Digital Control Outputs will be set when the sequence
is active.

TIMER ENABLE

Enables or disables an internal automatic timer that can initiate sequences using the
T700’s built in clock.
A series of submenus for programming the activities and instructions that make up
the calibration sequence.

STEPS
PROGRESS MODE

Allows the user to select the reporting style the calibrator uses to report the progress
of the sequences , on the front panels display, as it runs.

The types of instruction steps available for creating calibration sequences are listed in
Table 4-9.

06873B DCN6388

119

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Table 4-9: Calibration SEQUENCE Step Instruction

INSTRUCTION NAME
GENERATE
GPT

Puts the instrument into GENERATE mode. Similar in operation and effect to the
GENERATE  AUTO function used at the front panel.
Initiates a Gas Phase Titration operation.

GPTPS

Initiates a Gas Phase Titration Preset procedure.

PURGE

Puts the calibrator into PURGE mode.

DURATION

Adds a period of time between the previous instruction and the next

EXECSEQ

Calls another sequence to be executed at this time. The calling sequence will
resume running when the called sequence is completed. Up to 5 levels of nested
sequences can be programmed.

SETCCOUTPUT
MANUAL

120

DESCRIPTION

Allows the sequence to activate the T700’s digital control outputs. Similar to the CC
OUPUT attribute, but can be set and reset by individual steps.
Puts the instrument into GENERATE mode. Similar in operation and effect to the
GENERATE  MAN function used at the front panel.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Note

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

It is generally a good idea to end each calibration sequence with a PURGE
instruction followed by an instruction to return the instrument to STANDBY
mode.
Even if a PURGE is not included, the last instruction in a sequence should
always be to place the T700 in STANDBY mode.

To create a sequence, use the instructions in the following sections to name the
sequence, set its associated parameters and define the steps to be included.

4.3.1.1. Activating a Sequence from the T700 Front Panel
To activate an already programmed sequence from the front panel, press:

06873B DCN6388

121

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.1.2. Naming a Sequence
The first step of creating a calibration sequence is to assign it a name. The name can be
up to 10 characters and can be comprised of any alpha character (A to Z), and numeral
(0 to 9) or the underscore character (“_“).
Note

All sequences should be assigned a unique name.
To assign a name to a sequence, press:
STANDBY
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

CFG

SETUP X.X

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION

EDIT PRINT

EXIT

This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the T700.
OTHERWISE ...

SETUP X.X

END OF SEQUENCES
INS

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X
SET>

Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field

NAME:0
EDIT

EXIT

Edits the sequence shown
in the message field

Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences

SETUP X.X
Moves the
cursor one
character left or
right.

NAME:[0]
INS

DEL

[0]

ENTER EXIT

EXIT discards the
new NAME
ENTR accepts the
new NAME

Inserts a new a
character at the
cursor location.

122

PRNT

1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS

Deletes a
character at the
cursor location.

Toggle this button to
cycle through the range of
numerals and available
characters:
(“A – Z”; “0 – 9” & “ _ ”)

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.3.1.3. Setting the Repeat Count for a Sequence
The sequence can be set to repeat a certain number of times, from 1 to 100. It can also
be set to repeat indefinitely by inputting a zero (0) into the REPEAT COUNTER.
To set the REPEAT COUNTER, press:
STANDBY
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

CFG

SETUP X.X

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION

EDIT PRINT

EXIT

This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the T700.
OTHERWISE ...

SETUP X.X

END OF SEQUENCES
INS

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

PRNT

EXIT

1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

NAME:0

SET>
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field

EDIT

EXIT

Edits the sequence shown
in the message field

Continue pressing SET> until ...

Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X
0

REPEAT COUNT:1
EDIT

EXIT

REPEAT COUNT:[0]
1

ENTER EXIT
EXIT discards the
new REPEAT
COUNT

Toggle these buttons to set the repeat count from 1 to 100.
Enter “0” to cause the sequence to loop indefinitely

06873B DCN6388

ENTR accepts the
new REPEAT
COUNT

123

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.1.4. Using the T700’s Internal Clock to Trigger Sequences
Sequences can be set to trigger based on the T700’s internal clock. The sequence can be
set up to start at a predetermined date and time. It can also be set to repeat after a
predetermined delay time.
So activate and sequence timer, press:

124

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

To specify a starting date and time for the sequence, press:
STANDBY
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

CFG

SETUP X.X

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION

EDIT PRINT

EXIT

This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the T700.
OTHERWISE ...

SETUP X.X

END OF SEQUENCES
INS

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

NAME:0

SET>
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field

EDIT

EXIT

Edits the sequence shown
in the message field

Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences

Continue pressing SET> until ...

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X
0
Toggle these
buttons to enter
starting day, month
and year.

DAY

1
Toggle these
buttons to enter the
start time

TIMER ENABLE:ENABLED
EDIT

EXIT

TIMER START: 01-JAN-06

00:00

EDIT

EXIT

TIMER START: 01-JAN-06
JAN

00:00

ENTR

EXIT

TIME: 12:00
2

HOUR

MINUTE

EXIT discards the
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

MONTH YEAR

SYSTEM

06873B DCN6388

EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

Note

PRNT

1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS

ENTR EXIT

EXIT discards the
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

When the start time is set for a date/time that has passed, the sequence
will properly calculate the next run time based on that past date/time.

125

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

To set the delta timer, press:
STANDBY
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

CFG

SETUP X.X

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION

EDIT PRINT

EXIT

This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the T700.
OTHERWISE ...

SETUP X.X

END OF SEQUENCES
INS

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

PRNT

EXIT

1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

NAME:0

SET>
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field

EDIT

EXIT

Edits the sequence shown
in the message field

Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences

Continue pressing SET> until ...

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X
0

TIMER DELTA: 001:00:00
EDIT

EXIT

TIMER DELTA: 0 Days
0

ENTR

EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
enter number of days to
wait between before
running sequence again.

ENTR accepts the
new setting

SYSTEM
Toggle these
buttons to enter the
amount of time to
wait before running
the sequence again.

126

EXIT discards the
new setting

TIMER DELTA 00:00
2

HOUR

MINUTE

ENTR EXIT

EXIT discards the
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.3.1.5. Setting Up Control Inputs for a Sequence
The T700 calibrator’s control inputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an
external source. This feature allows the calibrator to operate in a slave mode so that
external control sources, such as a data logger can initiate the calibration sequences.
Each of the T700 calibrator’s control outputs is located on the back of the instrument
(see Figure 3-4).


12 separate ON/OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences or;



A 12-bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095
separate calibration sequences.

To assign a CC INPUT pattern/code to a particular sequence, press:
STANDBY
Make sure toT700 is in
standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

CFG

SETUP X.X

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION

EDIT PRINT

EXIT

This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the T700.
OTHERWISE ...

SETUP X.X

END OF SEQUENCES
INS

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

PRNT

EXIT

1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

NAME:0

SET>
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field

EDIT

EXIT

Edits the sequence shown
in the message field

Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences

Continue pressing SET> until ...

SETUP X.X

Toggle this
button turn the
CC input ON/
OFF

EDIT

EXIT

CC INPUT ENABLE:OFF

OFF

ENTER EXIT

EXIT discards the
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

SETUP X.X
Moves the
cursor one
character left or
right.

CC INPUT:DISABLED

CC INPUT:[0]00000000000
[0]

ENTER EXIT

Toggle this button to turn the selected bit ON/OFF (0 or 1).

EXIT discards the
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control
input pins located on the back of the T700 (see Figure 3-2),
The left most bit is Bit 1, the next bit to the right, bit 2,
progressing rightward to bit 12 (see Figure 3-9 for connector
pin assignments)

06873B DCN6388

127

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.1.6. Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence
The T700 calibrator’s control outputs allow the calibrator to control devices that accept
logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic controllers (PLCs), data loggers,
or digital relays/valve drivers.
They can be used as:


12 separate ON/OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences, or;



A 12-bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095
separate calibration sequences.

They can be set to:


Be active whenever a particular calibration sequence is operating, or;



Activate/deactivate as individual steps within a calibration sequence are run (see
Section 4.3.2.8).

To assign a CC OUTPUT pattern/code to a particular sequence, press:

128

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

STANDBY
Make sure that T700 is in
standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

CFG

SETUP X.X

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION

EDIT PRINT

EXIT

This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the T700.
OTHERWISE ...

SETUP X.X

END OF SEQUENCES
INS

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

PRNT

EXIT

1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

NAME:0

SET>
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field

EDIT

EXIT

Edits the sequence shown
in the message field

Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences

Continue pressing SET> until ...

SETUP X.X

Toggle this
button to turn the
CC output ON/
OFF

EDIT

EXIT

CC OUTPUT ENABLE:OFF

OFF

ENTER EXIT

EXIT discards the
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

SETUP X.X
Moves the
cursor one
character left or
right.

CC OUTPUT:DISABLED

CC OUTPUT:[0]00000000000
[0]

ENTER EXIT

Toggle this button to turn the selected bit ON/OFF (0 or 1).

EXIT discards the
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control
output pins located on the back of the T700 (see Figure 3-2),
The left most bit is Bit 1, the next bit to the right, bit 2,
progressing rightward to bit 12 (see Figure 3-10 for connector
pin assignments)

06873B DCN6388

129

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.1.7. Setting the PROGRESS Reporting Mode for the Sequences
As sequences run, the T700 calibrator reports progress by displaying a message in the
MODE field of the front panel display (See Figure 3-1). There are several types of
report modes available (see Table 4-10).
Table 4-10: Sequence Progress Reporting Mode

MODE
STEP
PCT
ELAP
REM

DESCRIPTION
Shows the progress as the sequence name and step number. This is the traditional display.
Example: Progress for a sequence named “SO2_Test” would appear as “SO2_Test-2”,
indicating that it is currently executing step 2.
Shows the progress as a percent (0–100%) of each duration step.
Example: “SEQ 48%”
Shows the progress as time elapsed in hours, minutes and seconds, counting upward from 0.
Example: “T+01:30:25” (i.e. 1 hour, 30 minutes, 25 seconds have elapsed)
Shows the progress as time remaining in hours, minutes, and seconds remaining, counting
downward to 0.
Example: “T-01:30:25” (i.e. 1 hour, 30 minutes, 25 seconds are remaining)

To select a PROGRESS report mode, press:

130

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.3.2. ADDING SEQUENCE STEPS
To insert an instruction step into a sequence, navigate to the INSERT STEP submenu
by pressing:
STANDBY
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

CFG

SETUP X.X

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION

EDIT PRINT

EXIT

This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the T700.
OTHERWISE ...

SETUP X.X

END OF SEQUENCES
INS

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

PRNT

EXIT

1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

NAME:0

SET>
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field

EDIT

EXIT

Edits the sequence shown
in the message field

Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences

Continue pressing SET> until ...
STEPS Submenu
SETUP X.X

STEPS: 1

SETUP X.X
Use these
buttons to scroll
though existing
instructions

EDIT

EXIT

1) STANDBY

PREV NEXT

INS

DEL

EXIT

Deletes the
instruction
shown in the
message field

To add an isntruction, press next until ...

SETUP X.X

END OF STEPS

INS

EXIT

INSERT STEP Submenu

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

06873B DCN6388

INSERT STEP: GENERATE
ENTR

EXIT

131

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.2.1. The GENERATE Step
This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE  AUTO.
At the end of the programming sequence, the T700 firmware will automatically insert a
DURATION step that needs to be defined.
To insert a GENERATE step into a sequence, press:

Note

132

If the user attempts to generate a source gas type that has not been entered into
the T700’s gas library, the sequence will freeze and after a certain time-out
period, stop running.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.3.2.2. The GPT Step
This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE GPT (see
Section 4.2.3 for information on choosing the correct input values for this step).
At the end of the programming sequence, the T700 firmware will automatically insert a
DURATION step that needs to be defined.
To insert a GPT step into a sequence, press:

06873B DCN6388

133

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.2.3. The GPTPS Step
This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE GPTPS (see
Section 4.2.4 for information on choosing the correct input values for this step).
At the end of the programming sequence, the T700 firmware will automatically insert a
DURATION step that needs to be defined.
To insert a GPTPS step into a sequence, press:
Starting at the STEPS Submenu

INSERT STEP Submenu

SETUP X.X

INSERT STEP: GENERATE

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the
list of available instructions

SETUP X.X

INSERT STEP: GPTPS

PREV NEXT

ENTR

SETUP X.X

Toggle these buttons
to set the NO target
concentration.

EXIT

GPTPS:0.0 PPB NO
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

ENTR accepts the new gas type &
target concentration

MUST be at least 10%
Higher than the Target
O3 Concentration
SETUP X.X

Toggle these buttons
to set the NO target
concentration.

GPTPS:0.0 PPB O3
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X
0

TOTAL FLOW = 2.000 LPM
0

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
set the target TOTAL
FLOW.

EXIT discards the new
flow rate
ENTR accepts the
new gas flow rate

(Default = 2.000 LPM)

SETUP X.X
0

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

134

EXIT discards the new gas type &
target concentration
ENTR accepts the new gas type &
target concentration

Should be equal to the
expected NO2
concentration

Toggle these
buttons to set
DURATION of this
step

EXIT discards the new gas type &
target concentration

DURATION: 10.0 MIN
0

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR accepts the
new setting

3) DURATION : 10.0 MIN
INS

DEL EDIT

EXIT discards the new
setting

EXIT

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.3.2.4. The PURGE Step
This step places the T700 into PURGE mode.
At the end of the programming sequence, the T700 firmware will automatically insert a
DURATION step that needs to be defined.
To insert a PURGE step into a sequence, press:

4.3.2.5. The STANDBY Step
The STANDBY step places the T700 into STANDBY mode. It is recommended, but
not required to follow this with a DURATION step.
To insert a STANDBY step into a sequence, press:

06873B DCN6388

135

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.2.6. The DURATION Step
The duration step causes the T700 to continue performing whatever action was called
for by the preceding step of the sequence.


If that step put the instrument into STANDBY mode, the calibrator stays in
STANDBY mode for the period specified by the DURATION step,



If that step put the instrument into GENERATE mode, the will continue to
GENERATE whatever calibration mixture was programmed into that step for the
period specified by the DURATION step.

To insert a DURATION step into a sequence, press:

4.3.2.7. The EXECSEQ Step
The EXECSEQ step allows the sequence to call another, already programmed
sequence. This is a very powerful tool in that it allows the user to create a “toolbox” of
often-used operations that can then be mixed and matched by an overhead sequence.

136

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

To insert an EXECSEQ step into a sequence, press:

06873B DCN6388

137

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.2.8. The CC OUTPUT Step
This instruction causes the sequence to set or reset the T700’s digital control outputs. It
is very useful in situations where the control outputs are being used to trigger other
devices that need to be turned off and on in synch with the operation of the calibrator as
it progress through the sequence.
To insert a CC OUTPUT step into a sequence, press:
Starting at the STEPS Submenu

INSERT STEP Submenu

SETUP X.X

INSERT STEP: GENERATE

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to scroll though
the list of available instructions

SETUP X.X

INSERT STEP: PURGE
ENTR

SETUP X.X

CC OUTPUT:DISABLED

SETUP X.X

EXIT

EDIT

EXIT

CC OUTPUT ENABLE:OFF

OFF

ENTER EXIT

Toggle this button
to turn the CC
output ON/OFF

ENTR accepts the
new setting
SETUP X.X

Moves the
cursor one
character left or
right.

[0]

ENTER EXIT

Toggle this button to turn the
selected bit ON/OFF
(0 or 1)

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

138

EXIT discards the
new setting

2) SET CC OUTPUT 000100010110
INS

DEL EDIT

EXIT

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.3.2.9. The MANUAL Gas Generation Step
The MANUAL step causes the T700 calibrator to enter MANUAL CALIBRATION
MODE. It is programmed in a similar manner to the calibrator’s GENERATE 
MANUAL function. AT the end of the programming sequence, the T700 firmware will
automatically insert a DURATION step that needs to be defined.
To insert a MANUAL step into a sequence, press:

Note

06873B DCN6388

If the user attempts to generate a source gas type that has not been entered into
the T700’s gas library, the sequence will freeze and after a certain time-out
period, stop running.

139

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.3.2.10. Deleting or Editing an Individual Step in a Sequence
To delete or edit an individual step in an existing Sequence, press:

140

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.3.3. DELETING A SEQUENCE
To delete a sequence from the T700 calibrator’s memory, press:
STANDBY
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

ACT CAL=0.000 LPM

SEQ

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG

CLK PASS MORE

SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION

EDIT PRINT

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

EXIT

3) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT

Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences

SETUP X.X
YES

DELETE SEQUENCES

SEQUENCE DELETED

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

06873B DCN6388

END OF SEQUENCES
INS

PRNT

EXIT

141

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.4. SETUP  CFG
Pressing the CFG button displays the instrument’s configuration information. This
display lists the calibrator model, serial number, firmware revision, software library
revision, CPU type and other information.
Use this information to identify the software and hardware when contacting Customer
Service.
Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ2 MSG CLR1 SETUP

SETUP X.X
GAS

Press NEXT of PREV to move back and
forth through the following list of
Configuration information:

MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER
PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
SOFTWARE REVISION
LIBRARY REVISION
OS REVISION
DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION
SAVED

142

A-CAL=0.000 LPM

SETUP MENU

SEQ CFG

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

T700 Cailbrator
EXIT

Press exit at
any time to
return to the
SETUP menu

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.5. SETUP  CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY
CLOCK AND ADJUSTING SPEED
4.5.1. SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S TIME AND DAY
The T700 has a time of day clock that supports the DURATION step of the calibration
sequence feature, time of day TEST function, and time stamps on most COMM port
messages. To set the clock’s time and day, press:
STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS SEQ

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG

SETUP X.X

CLK PASS MORE

TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK

TIME DATE

SETUP X.X
1

HOUR

TIME: 12:00
:0

MINUTE

SETUP X.X
2

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these
buttons to enter
current hour

DATE: 01-JAN-10
JAN

ENTR EXIT

TIME DATE

DAY MONTH YEAR

SETUP X.X

06873B DCN6388

EXIT

SETUP X.X

TIME: 22:30
:3

EXIT

ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
buttons to enter
current day, month
and year.

DATE: 18-JUN-10
JUN

TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
EXIT

ENTR EXIT

EXIT returns to
SETUP X.X
display

143

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.5.2. ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S SPEED
In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower, you can adjust a
variable called CLOCK_ADJ to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount
every day. To change this variable, press:

144

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.6. SETUP  PASS
The T700 provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent
unauthorized adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu
item, the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password-protected
function is requested.
There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator,
maintenance and configuration functions. Each level allows access to all of the
functions in the previous level.
Table 4-11: Password Levels
PASSWORD

LEVEL

MENU ACCESS ALLOWED

No password

Operator

All functions of the MAIN menu: TEST, GEN, initiate SEQ , MSG, CLR

101

Maintenance

Access to Primary and Secondary Setup Menus except for VARS and DIAG

818

Configuration

Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG

To enable or disable passwords, press:

06873B DCN6388

145

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following touch screen button sequence
would be required to enter the VARS or DIAG submenus:
STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ2 MSG CLR1 SETUP

SETUP X.X
GAS SEQ

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG

CLK PASS MORE

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM FLOW VARS DIAG

Press individual
buttons to set
number
EXAMPLE: This
password enables the
SETUP mode

SYSTEM
0

EXIT

ENTER SETUP PASS:0
0

SYSTEM
8

EXIT

ENTR EXIT

ENTER SETUP PASS:0
1

ENTR EXIT

T700 enters selected menu

Note

146

The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG
menus, even when passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password
(818) upon entering these menus. Simply press ENTR when this is the case.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.7. SETUP  COMM: COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
This section introduces the communications setup menu; Section 5 provides the setup
instructions and operation information. Press SETUP>MORE>COMM to arrive at the
communications menu.

4.7.1. ID (MACHINE IDENTIFICATION)
Each type of Teledyne API’s calibrator is configured with a default ID code. The
default ID code for all T700 calibrators is typically 700 (or 0). The ID number is only
important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same communications channel
such as when several calibrators are on the same Ethernet LAN (See Section 5.4); in an
RS-232 multi-drop chain (See Section3.3.1.7) or operating over a RS-485 network (see
Section 5.3). If two calibrators of the same model type are used on one channel, the ID
codes of one or both of the instruments need to be changed.
To edit the instrument’s ID code, press:

The ID number is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same
communications channel (e.g., a multi-drop setup). Different models of Teledyne API’s
calibrators have different default ID numbers, but if two calibrators of the same model
type are used on one channel (for example, two T700’s), the ID of one instrument needs
to be changed.

06873B DCN6388

147

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

The ID can also be used for to identify any one of several calibrators attached to the
same network but situated in different physical locations.

4.7.2. INET (ETHERNET)
Use SETUP>COMM>INET to configure Ethernet communications, whether manually
or via DHCP. Please see Section 5.4 for configuration details.

4.7.3. COM1 AND COM2 (MODE, BAUD RATE AND TEST PORT)
Use the SETUP>COMM>COM1[COM2] menus to:


configure communication modes (Section 5.2.1)



view/set the baud rate (Section 5.2.2)



test the connections of the com ports (Section 5.2.3).

Configuring COM1 or COM2 requires setting the DCE DTE switch on the rear panel.
Section 5.1 provides DCE DTE information.

4.8. SETUP  MORE  FLOW
The Flow menu allows you to view the performance statistics for the Mass Flow
Controllers (MFCs). See Section 7.1 for more information and details on setting up for
MFC flow verification and calibration.

4.9. SETUP  MORE  VARS: INTERNAL VARIABLES (VARS)
The T700 has several user-adjustable software variables, which define certain
operational parameters.
Usually, these variables are automatically set by the
instrument’s firmware, but can be manually redefined using the VARS menu.
The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password
protected level. See Appendix A2 for a detailed listing of all of the T700 variables that
are accessible through the remote interface.
Table 4-12: Variable Names (VARS)
NO.

VARIABLE

PHOTO_LAMP 1,2

1
2

148

O3_GEN LAMP 1,2

O3_CONC_RANGE

ALLOWED
VALUES

DEFAULT
VALUES

Sets the photometer lamp temperature set
point and warning limits.

0ºC and 100ºC

58ºC
Warning limits

Sets the O3 generator lamp temperature set
point and warning limits.

0ºC and 100ºC

Set the upper span point of the O3
concentration range for TEST CHANNEL
analog signal O3_PHOTO_CONC.

0.1–20000 ppb

DESCRIPTION

56ºC - 61ºC
48ºC
Warning limits
43ºC - 53ºC
500 ppb

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

NO.

VARIABLE

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

DESCRIPTION

ALLOWED
VALUES

DEFAULT
VALUES

ON/OFF

OFF

O3 bench control flag.
 ON turns on the photometer pump and
switches measure/reference valve only
when the O3 mode is set for BNCH (See
Section 3.4.8).

O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY 2

STD_TEMP 1

Sets the standard Temperature used in
calculating O3 flow rates and concentrations.

0ºC and 100ºC

25ºC

STD PRESSURE 1

Sets the standard pressure used in
calculating O3 flow rates and concentrations.

15.00 – 50 .00
in-Hg-A

29.92 in-Hg-A

CLOCK_ADJ

Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock.
Choose the + sign if the clock is too slow,
choose the - sign if the clock is too fast (See
Section 4.5).

-60 to +60 s/day
Default=0

6
1

DO NOT ADJUST OR CHANGE these values unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s customer service personnel.

Only available in calibrators with O3 photometer and generator options installed.

IMPORTANT

06873B DCN6388

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
There is a 2-second latency period between when a VARS value is
changed and the new value is stored into the analyzer’s memory. DO NOT
turn the analyzer off during this period or the new setting will be lost.

149

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following button sequence:
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SEQ

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG

CLK PASS MORE

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM FLOW VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD
8

ENTR

EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
enter the correct
PASSWORD

SETUP X.X
DO NOT CHANGE
these settings unless
specifically instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments’
Customer Service
personnel

0) O3_PHOTO_LAMP=58.0 DegC

NEXT JUMP

SETUP X.X

ENTR accepts the
new setting

1) O3_PHOT_LAMP=58.0 DegC

PREV NEXT JUMP

SETUP X.X

In all cases:
EXIT discards the new
setting

EDIT PRNT EXIT

2) O3_CONC_RANGE=500.0 PPB

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
0

SETUP X.X

EXIT

O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY=OFF

ENTR EXIT
Toggle this button turn this
mode ON / OFF

EDIT PRNT EXIT

5) STD PRESS=29.92 In-Hg

PREV NEXT JUMP

SETUP X.X

ENTR

4) STD_TEMP=25.0 DegC

PREV NEXT JUMP

SETUP X.X

EDIT PRNT EXIT

OFF

DO NOT CHANGE

Toggle these buttons to set
the upper span point of the
O3_PHOTO_CONC Test
Channel signal
SETUP X.X

these settings unless
specifically instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments’
Customer Service
personnel

3) O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY=OFF

PREV NEXT JUMP

SETUP X.X

O3_CONC_RANGE=500.0 PPB
0

EDIT PRNT EXIT

6) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day
JUMP

EDIT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
+

CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day
0

ENTR EXIT
Enter sign and number of
seconds per day the clock
gains (-) or loses(+)

150

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.10. SETUP  MORE  DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS
A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUPMOREDIAG
menu, as these parameters are dependent on firmware revision (see Appendix A). These
tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are
referred to in many places of the maintenance and troubleshooting sections of this
manual (see Sections 9.1 and 9.2).
This section shall focus on the test channel analog output.

4.10.1.  TEST CHAN OUTPUT: USING THE TEST CHANNEL ANALOG
OUTPUT
The T700 calibrator comes equipped with one analog output. It can be set by the user to
carry the current signal level of any one of the parameters listed in Table 4-14 and will
output an analog VDC signal that rises and falls in relationship with the value of the
parameter.
Pin-outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are:
ANALOG OUT

–

Figure 4-10: T700 the TEST CHANNEL Connector

4.10.1.1. Configuring the Test Channel Analog Output
Table 4-13 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the T700 calibrator.
Table 4-13: DIAG – Analog I/O Functions
SUB MENU
AOUTS
CALIBRATED:
MFC_DRIVE_1

FUNCTION
Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration
of all analog output channels.

MFC_DRIVE_2

These channels are used by the T700 calibrator internally as drive voltages for
instruments with analog MFCs.

MFC_DRIVE_3
(OPTIONAL)

DO NOT alter the settings for these channels.

TEST OUTPUT

Configures the analog output:
1
RANGE : Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and full-scale value of the
output.

OVERRANGE: Turns the ± 5% over-range feature ON/OFF for this output channel.
REC_OFS1: Sets a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to CURRent loop.
AUTO_CAL1: Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration
1

CALIBRATED : Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this
one channel only.
AIN CALIBRATED
1

Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital
converter circuit on the motherboard.

Changes to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output.

06873B DCN6388

151

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

To configure the calibrator’s TEST CHANNEL, set the electronic signal type of each
channel and calibrate the outputs. This consists of:
 Choosing a Test Channel function to be output on the channel (Table 4-14).
 Selecting a signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device

attached to the channel (Section 4.10.1.3).
 Determining if the over-range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly
(Section 4.10.1.4).
 Adding a bipolar recorder offset to the signal if required (Section 4.10.1.5).
 Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for each
channel (Section 4.10.1.6).

152

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

To access the analog I/O configuration sub menu, press:

06873B DCN6388

153

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.10.1.2. Selecting a Test Channel Function to Output
The Test Functions available to be reported are listed on Table 4-14:
Table 4-14: Test Channels Functions available on the T700’s Analog Output
TEST CHANNEL
NONE

DESCRIPTION

ZERO

FULL SCALE

TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF

O3 PHOTO MEAS

The raw output of the photometer during its
measure cycle

0 mV

5000 mV

O3 PHOTO REF

The raw output of the photometer during its
reference cycle

0 mV

5000 mV

O3 GEN REF

The raw output of the O3 generator’s
reference detector

0 mV

5000 mV

REGULATOR PRESSURE

The gas pressure of the pressure regulator
on the O3 generator supply line

PSIG

SAMPLE PRESSURE

The pressure of gas in the photometer
absorption tube

0" Hg-InA

40" Hg-In-A

SAMPLE FLOW

The gas flow rate through the photometer

3
0 cm /min

1000 cm3/min

SAMPLE TEMP

The temperature of gas in the photometer
absorption tube

0 C

70 C

PHOTO LAMP TEMP

The temperature of the photometer UV lamp

0 C

70 C

O3 LAMP TEMP

The temperature of the O3 generator’s UV
lamp

0 mV

5000 mV

CHASSIS TEMP

The temperature inside the T700’s chassis
(same as BOX TEMP)

0 C

70 C

O3 PHOTO CONC

The current concentration of O3 being
measured by the photometer.

0 PPM

1 ppm

Once a function is selected, the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the
analog output, but also adds TEST to the list of Test Functions viewable via the Front
Panel Display.

154

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

To activate the TEST Channel and select a function press:
STANDBY
Make sure that
the T700 is in
standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

SETUP X.X

CFG

CLK PASS MORE

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS FLOW DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

Toggle these
buttons to enter
the correct
PASSWORD
DIAG TCHN

SIGNAL I/O

PREV NEXT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG TCHN
PREV NEXT

DIAG TCHN
PREV NEXT
Toggle these buttons
to choose a mass flow
controller TEST
channel parameter

DIAG TCHN
PREV NEXT

TEST CHAN OUTPUT
ENTR

EXIT

TEST CHAN:NONE
ENTR

EXIT

TEST CHANNEL:CHASSIS TEMP
ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

06873B DCN6388

155

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.10.1.3. Test Channel Voltage Range Configuration
In its standard configuration, the analog outputs is set to output a 0 – 5 VDC signals.
Several other output ranges are available (see Table 4-15). Each range is usable from 5% to + 5% of the rated span.

Table 4-15: Analog Output Voltage Range Min/Max
RANGE SPAN
0-100 mVDC
0-1 VDC
0-5 VDC
0-10 VDC

MINIMUM OUTPUT

MAXIMUM OUTPUT

-5 mVDC
105 mVDC
-0.05 VDC
1.05 VDC
-0.25 VDC
5.25 VDC
-0.5 VDC
10.5 VDC
The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.

To change the output range, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.9.1.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, OVR, NOCAL

EDIT
These buttons
set the signal
level and type
of the selected
channel

156

DIAG AIO
0.1V

EXIT

TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V
1V

10V

ENTR EXIT

Pressing ENTR records
the new setting and
returns to the previous
menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the
new setting and returns to
the previous menu.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.10.1.4. Turning the Test Channel Over-Range Feature ON/OFF
In its default configuration, a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the T700’s TEST
CHANNEL output. This over-range can be disabled if your recording device is
sensitive to excess voltage or current.
To turn the over-range feature on or off, press:

06873B DCN6388

157

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.10.1.5. Adding a Recorder Offset to the Test Channel
Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from
the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise
around the zero point. This can be achieved in the T700 by defining a zero offset, a
small voltage (e.g., 10% of span).
To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, press:

158

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

06873B DCN6388

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

159

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.10.1.6. Test Channel Calibration
TEST CHANNEL calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the calibrator
(performed in the factory as part of the configuration process) or whenever recalibration
is required. The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or adjusted manually.
In its default mode, the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all
channels, which is useful for clearing any analog calibration warnings associated with
channels that will not be used or connected to any input or recording device, e.g., data
logger.
Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must
be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device. Manual calibration
requires the AUTOCAL feature to be disabled.
ENABLING OR DISABLING THE TEST CHANNEL AUTOCAL FEATURE

To enable or disable the AUTOCAL feature for the TEST CHANNEL, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)
DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

NOTE:

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

TEST CHANNELS
configured for 0.1V full
scale should always be
calibrated manually.

DIAG AIO

TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, OVR, NOCAL

EDIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO

TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:ON

EDIT

Toggle this button
to turn AUTO CAL
ON or OFF

DIAG AIO
ON

EXIT

TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:ON
ENTR EXIT

(OFF = manual
calibration mode).
DIAG AIO
OFF

160

ENTR accepts
the new setting.
EXIT ignores the
new setting

TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:OFF
ENTR EXIT

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

AUTOMATIC TEST CHANNEL CALIBRATION
Note

Before performing this procedure, ensure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned
OFF for MFC_DRIVE_1, MFC_DRIVE_2 and MFC_DRIVE_3 if installed). Ensure
that the AUTO CAL feature is turned ON for the TEST CHANNEL (see Section
4.10.1.6).

To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, press:

From the
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)
DIAG
PREV NEXT

EXIT

DIAG AIO

Analyzer
automatically
calibrates all
channels for which
is turned

NOT AUTO CAL. MFC_DRIVE_1

DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO

NOT AUTO CAL. MFC_DRIVE_2
NOT AUTO CAL. MFC_DRIVE_3

This message
appears when
is
Turned
for
a channel

If any of the channels have not
been calibrated ot if at least one
channel has AUTO-CAL turned
OFF, this message will read
.

Note

06873B DCN6388

Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the
outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device.
Manual calibration requires that the AUTOCAL feature be disabled.

161

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

To initiate an automatic calibration from inside the TEST CHANNEL submenu, press:

162

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

MANUAL CALIBRATION OF THE TEST CHANNEL CONFIGURED FOR VOLTAGE
RANGES

For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be calibrated manually.
Note

The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear
if the AUTO-CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted (see Section
4.10.1.6).

Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals and by
changing the actual output signal level using the front panel buttons in 100, 10 or 1
count increments.

Figure 4-11: Setup for Calibrating the TEST CHANNEL

Table 4-16: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration

06873B DCN6388

FULL
SCALE

ZERO
TOLERANCE

SPAN VOLTAGE

SPAN
TOLERANCE

MINIMUM
ADJUSTMENT
(1 count)

0.1 VDC

±0.0005V

90 mV

±0.001V

0.02 mV

1 VDC

±0.001V

900 mV

±0.001V

0.24 mV

5 VDC

±0.002V

4500 mV

±0.003V

1.22 mV

10 VDC

±0.004V

4500 mV

±0.006V

2.44 mV

163

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, CONC2, NOCAL

EDIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO

TEST_OUTPUT: CALIBRATED:NO

CAL

DIAG AIO
These buttons increase /
decrease the analog output
signal level (not the value on the
display)
by 100, 10 or 1 counts.
Continue adjustments until the
voltage measured at the output
of the analyzer and/or the input
of the recording device reads 0
mV or 90% of full scale.

TEST_OUTPUT: VOLT-Z: 0 mV

U100 UP10 UP

DIAG AIO

These menus
only appear if
AUTO-CAL is
turned OFF

DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

TEST_OUTPUT: CALIBRATED: YES

CAL

164

DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

TEST_OUTPUT: VOLT-S: 4500 mV

U100 UP10 UP

DIAG AIO

EXIT

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.10.1.7. AIN Calibration
This is the sub-menu in which to calibrate the A-to-D conversion circuitry (Sections
9.4.11.1 and 10.3.5.1). This calibration is only necessary after a major repair such as the
replacement of a CPU, a motherboard or a power supply.
To perform an AIN CALIBRATION, press:

06873B DCN6388

165

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.11. SETUP  LVL: SETTING UP AND USING LEADS (DASIBI)
OPERATING LEVELS
4.11.1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LEADS LEVELS
The T700 calibrator can be equipped with a version of firmware that includes support
for LEADS, a data collection and analysis system LEADS specifically designed for
handling meteorological and environmental data particularly when there is a need to
integrate data and control instrumentation from several different manufacturers. When
an T700 calibrator is equipped with the optional LEADS software used in conjunction
with data loggers located in the central data analysis facility it is possible to collect and
buffer data between the various calibrators, analyzers and metrological equipment
remotely located at an air monitoring station.
Because LEADS was originally developed for use with TNRCC using Dasibi 5008
calibrators, the LEADS version of the T700 includes support for Dasibi “Dot” serial data
commands and operational “LEVELs”.
It also includes a method for driving external devices via contact closure control outputs
in conjunction with an optional bolt-on valve driver assembly (see Section 3.3.1.6).
Note

For more information on the LEADS system, please go to
http://www.meteostar.com/.

4.11.2. DOT COMMANDS
The Dasibi “Dot” commands form a text-based (ASCII) data protocol that is transmitted
between a control computer (XENO data logger in this case) and a calibrator or ambient
gas analyzer over an RS-232 connection. The details of the protocol are beyond the
scope of this document, but in its simplest form the protocol is based on a two or three
digit integer preceded by a control-A and a period (.) and then followed by a “!” and a
two digit checksum.
EXAMPLE:

^A.xxx!nn
For further information on dot commands, please contact Teledyne API’S Customer
Service.
A T700 equipped with LEADS software can be simultaneously operated over the same
COMM port using standard Teledyne API’s serial data commands and is compatible
with APICOM versions 5 and later which include an added feature that allows a user to
edit, upload and download level tables.

166

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.11.3. LEVELS
A LEVEL is a combination of several parameters:


An ID number for the LEVEL



An action, (e.g. GENERATE, GPT, GPTPS & MANUAL)



A target concentration value



An output flow rate (if applicable)



Configuration for one or both of two status output blocks.

Up to twenty levels can be defined and used with the T700 using a range of ID numbers
from 0-98. Level 99 is reserved for standby. The levels are not time based and do not
include characteristics such as start time or duration, therefore a single LEVEL can not
switch between different concentration levels and flow rates. Separate flow and
concentration outputs must be programmed into separate LEVELs which are then
individually started and stopped either by an operator at the calibrator’s front panel or
through a serial data operation over the RS-232 or Ethernet ports.

4.11.4. ACTIVATING AN EXISTING LEVEL
To activate an existing defined LEVEL, press:

06873B DCN6388

167

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.11.5. PROGRAMMING NEW LEVELS
To begin programming a new LEVEL find the LVL submenu by pressing:

STANDBY
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
LVL

A-CAL=0.000 LPM

GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SEQ

CFG

CLK PASS MORE EXIT

This display only appears if there are no LEVELs currently
programmed into the M700E.
OTHERWISE ...

SETUP X.X

END OF LEVELS
INS

SETUP X.X [LEVEL ID] ) [Gas/Conc.], [Status Block Set]
PREV NEXT

INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT

Scrolls back and forth between
existing LEVELS

168

EXIT

CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

Deletes the LEVEL shown
in the message field

PRNT

ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE
ENTR

EXIT

Edits the LEVEL shown in
the message field

Use these buttons to scroll though the available
instructions: GENERATE, GPT, GPTPS & MANUAL

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.11.5.1. Creating a GENERATE LEVEL
To create a LEVEL using the T700’s AUTO generation function, press:
Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

SETUP X.X

ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE

PREV NEXT

ENTR

SETUP X.X

EXIT

GENERATE:ZERO
ZERO ENTR

EXIT

Continue pressing this key until the desired
gas type appears

SETUP X.X
0

Toggle these
buttons to set the
target
concentration.

SETUP X.X
0

SETUP X.X

Toggle these buttons to
set the target TOTAL
FLOW.

Toggle this button to
scroll through the
available gas types (as
programmed during
initial setup.

GENERATE:0.0 PPB CO2
0

PPB

CO2

ENTR EXIT

Toggle this button
to to scroll through
the available units
of measure

GENERATE:0.0 PPB CO2
0

PCT

CO2

ENTR EXIT

TOTAL FLOW = 2.000 LPM
0

ENTR EXIT

EXIT discards the
new flow rate

(Default = 2.000 LPM)

ENTR accepts the new gas flow rate

STANDBY
0
Toggle these buttons
until the designation of
the existing defined level
program is reached.

06873B DCN6388

LEVEL:0
0

ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
LEVEL number
ENTR accepts the new
LEVEL number

169

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.11.5.2. Creating a GPT LEVEL
To create a LEVEL using the T700’s GPT function, press:
Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

SETUP X.X

ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

Use the NEXT until ...

SETUP X.X

INSERT STEP: GPT

PREV NEXT

GPT
0

Toggle these buttons
to set the NO target
concentration.
MUST be at least 10%
higher than the target O3
Concentration

GPT:0.0 PPB NO
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

ENTR accepts the new gas type &
target concentration
GPT

GPT:0.0 PPB O3

Toggle these buttons
to set the NO target
concentration.

PPB

ENTR EXIT

GPT

TOTAL FLOW = 2.000 LPM

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these s to set the
target TOTAL FLOW.

EXIT discards the new
flow rate
ENTR accepts the
new gas flow rate

(Default = 2.000 LPM)

STANDBY
0

170

EXIT discards the new gas type &
target concentration
ENTR accepts the new gas type &
target concentration

Should be equal to the
expected NO2
concentration

Toggle these buttons
until the designation of
the existing defined level
program is reached.

EXIT discards the new gas type &
target concentration

LEVEL:0
0

ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
LEVEL number
ENTR accepts the new
LEVEL number

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.11.5.3. Creating a GPTPS LEVEL
To create a LEVEL using the T700’s GPTPS function, press:
Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

SETUP X.X

ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

Use the NEXT until ...

SETUP X.X

INSERT STEP: GPTPS

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X

Toggle these buttons
to set the NO target
concentration.

GPTPS:0.0 PPB NO
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

ENTR accepts the new gas type &
target concentration

MUST be at least 10%
Higher than the Target
O3 Concentration
SETUP X.X

Toggle these buttons
to set the NO target
concentration.

GPTPS:0.0 PPB O3
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X
0

TOTAL FLOW = 2.000 LPM
0

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
set the target TOTAL
FLOW.

EXIT discards the new
flow rate
ENTR accepts the
new gas flow rate

(Default = 2.000 LPM)

STANDBY
0

06873B DCN6388

EXIT discards the new gas type &
target concentration
ENTR accepts the new gas type &
target concentration

Should be equal to the
expected NO2
concentration

Toggle these buttons
until the designation of
the existing defined level
program is reached.

EXIT discards the new gas type &
target concentration

LEVEL:0
0

ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
LEVEL number
ENTR accepts the new
LEVEL number

171

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.11.5.4. Creating a MANUAL LEVEL
To create a level using the T700’s MANUAL generation function, press:
Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

CHOOSE ACTION Submenu

SETUP X.X

ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

Use the NEXT until ...

SETUP X.X

INSERT STEP: MANUAL
ENTR

SETUP X.X

Toggle this button to
scroll through the
available gas types (as
programmed during
initial setup.

EXIT

CAL GAS TYPE:ZERO

ZERO

ENTR

EXIT

Continue pressing this key until the desired
gas type appears

SETUP X.X

CAL GAS TYPE:SO2

SO2

ENTR

SETUP X.X
3

EXIT

CAL GAS FLOW: 0.000 LPM

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons
to set the target
GASFLOW.
SETUP X.X
0

DILUENT GAS FLOW: 0.000 LPM

ENTR EXIT

EXIT discards the new
flow rate

Toggle these
buttons to set the
target
concentration.

ENTR accepts the
new gas flow rate
SETUP X.X
OFF

This button
turns the O3
Generator
OFF/ON

O3 GEN MODE: OFF

CNST REF BNCH

O3 GEN SET POINT: 0.0 MV
0

ENTR

SETUP X.X
EXIT

STANDBY
0

172

O3 GEN SET POINT: 000.0 PPB
0

Toggle these keys to
set output
CONCENTRATION
of the O3 generator

Toggle these
buttons to set the
CONSTANT drive
voltage of the O3
generator

Toggle these buttons
until the designation of
the existing defined level
program is reached.

REF: The concentration control
loop will use the generator’s
reference detector as input.
BNCH: The concentration
control loop will use the
photometer bench.

EXIT

These buttons set a target
concentration for the O3 Generator

This button sets a CONSTANT drive
voltage for the O3 Generator

SETUP X.X

ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

LEVEL:0
0

ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
LEVEL number
ENTR accepts the new
LEVEL number

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

4.11.5.5. Editing or Deleting a LEVEL
To edit or delete an existing LEVEL, press:
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
LVL

A-CAL=0.000 LPM

GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SEQ

CFG

CLK PASS MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X [LEVEL ID] ) [Gas/Conc.], [Status Block Set]
PREV NEXT

INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT or PREV until until
LEVEL to be edited or deleted appears

SETUP X.X

7) PURGE

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X
YES

INS

PREV NEXT

06873B DCN6388

EXIT

DELETEL STEP?

SETUP X.X

DEL EDIT

7) DURATION : 10.0 MIN
INS

DEL

EDIT

EXIT

Toggle these buttons
select the parameter
to be edited
Level ID Number
Action
Status Block 1
Status Block 2

EDIT

LEVEL NUMBER:12
EXIT

Press EDIT then follow the instructions for the
parameter (See Sections 6.11.3 through 6.11.5.4
and 6.11.6).

173

Overview of Operating Modes and Basic Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

4.11.6. CONFIGURING LEVEL STATUS BLOCKS
There are two STATUS BLOCKS associated with LEADS LEVELS.


BLOCK 1: This block corresponds to the physical CONTROL OUTPUT connections
located on the back panel of the T700 (see Figure 3-4 and Section 3.3.1.5).



BLOCK 2: The second status block does not correspond to any physical output but
is used to communicate status over the serial data port.

To configure the either of the STATUS BLOCKS, press:

174

06873B DCN6388

5. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION
The instrument rear panel connections include an Ethernet port, a USB port (option) and
two serial communications ports (labeled RS232, which is the COM1 port, and COM2)
located on the rear panel (refer to Figure 3-4). These ports give the user the ability to
communicate with, issue commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an
external computer system or terminal.
This section provides pertinent information regarding communication equipment,
describes the instrument’s communications modes, presents configuration instructions
for the communications ports, and provides instructions for their use.

5.1. DATA TERMINAL/COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (DTE DCE)
RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment
(DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the
DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference
between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions.
• DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.
• DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.
To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers
(which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows
the user to set the RS-232 configuration for one of these two data devices. This switch
exchanges the Receive and Transmit lines on RS-232 emulating a cross-over or nullmodem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2.
The T700 is equipped with two serial communication ports (labeled RS232 and
COM2), a USB com port and an Ethernet port located on the rear panel. The two serial
ports are accessible via two DB-9 connectors (see Figure 3-4): RS232 (COM1), a male
DB-9 connector, and COM2, a female DB9 connector.
The RS232 and COM2 ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to
communicate with, issue commands to, and receive data from the calibrator through an
external computer system or terminal.


The RS-232 port (COM1) can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232
multi-drop mode (option 62, Sections 3.3.1.7 and 5.2).



The COM2 port can be configured for standard RS-232 operation, half-duplex RS485 communication. (Contact the factory for RS-485 communication configuration).

The Ethernet connector allows the analyzer to be connected to a network running
TCP/IP or to the public Internet if access is available. The network must have routers

06873B DCN6388

175

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

capable of operating at 10BaseT or 100BaseT. DHCP is enabled by default (Section
5.4.1). This configuration is useful for quickly getting an instrument up and running on a
network. However, for permanent Ethernet connections, a static IP address should be
used (Section 5.4.1.1). Edit the Instrument and Gateway IP addresses and Subnet Mask
to the desired settings. Then, from the computer, enter the same information through an
application such as HyperTerminal.
The USB port is for optional direct communication between the calibrator and a desktop
or laptop computer. This configuration can be used when the COM2 port is not in use
except for multidrop communication. For setup instructions, please refer to Sections
3.3.1.7 and 5.2.1.

5.2. COMMUNICATION MODES, BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING
Use the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu to configure COM1 (labeled RS232 on
instrument rear panel) and/or COM2 (labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel) for
communication modes, baud rate and/or port testing for correct connection.

5.2.1. COMMUNICATION MODES
Each of the calibrator’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different
modes, listed in Table 5-1. As modes are selected, the calibrator sums the Mode ID
numbers and displays this combined number on the front panel display. For example, if
quiet mode (01), computer mode (02) and Multi-Drop-enabled mode (32) are selected,
the Calibrator would display a combined MODE ID of 35.
Table 5-1: COMM Port Communication Modes
MODE1

QUIET

DESCRIPTION
Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the calibrator (such as warning messages)
to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a
computer program where such intermittent messages might cause communication
problems.
Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them.

COMPUTER

Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is
communicating with a computer operated control program.
When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings
from

E,8,1 / E,7,1

2048

No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit
to
Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit
When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only
command that is active is the help screen (? CR).

SECURITY

RS-485

1024

Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence
over multi-drop mode if both are enabled.

MULTI-DROP
PROTOCOL

Multi-drop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications
channel. Multi-drop requires the use of instrument IDs.

ENABLE
MODEM

Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the
RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.

ERROR
CHECKING2

128

Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.

XON/XOFF

256

Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.

176

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Communications Setup and Operation

HANDSHAKE2
HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE

HARDWARE
FIFO2

512

COMMAND
PROMPT

4096

Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data
transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation
protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.
Disables the HARDWARE FIFO (First In – First Out), When FIFO is enabled it
improves data transfer rate for that COMM port.
Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.

Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the
SETUP  MORE  COMM  COM[1 OR 2]  MODE menu

The default setting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Customer Service
personnel.

Note

Communication Modes for each COMM port must be configured independently.

Press the following buttons to select communication modes for a one of the COMM
Ports, such as the following example where RS-485 mode is enabled:

06873B DCN6388

177

Communications Setup and Operation

178

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Communications Setup and Operation

5.2.2. COM PORT BAUD RATE
To select the baud rate of either COM Port, go to SETUP>MORE>COMM and select
either COM1 or COM2 as follows (use COM2 to view/match your personal computer
baud rate when using the USB port:
STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

SETUP X.X

CFG

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM FLOW VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
ID INET

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

SETUP X.X
EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

COM1 BAUD RATE:19200

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the new
setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

06873B DCN6388

179

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

5.2.3. COM PORT TESTING
The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu.
This test sends a string of 256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is
running, the red LED on the rear panel of the calibrator should flicker.
To initiate the test, press the following button sequence:

180

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Communications Setup and Operation

5.3. RS-485 (OPTION)
The COM2 port of the instrument’s rear panel is set up for RS-232 communication but
can be reconfigured for RS-485 communication. Contact Customer Service. If this
option was elected at the time of purchase, the rear panel was preconfigured at the
factory. Choosing this option disallows use of the USB port.

5.4. REMOTE ACCESS VIA THE ETHERNET
Via the Ethernet interface, the calibrator can be connected to any standard 10BaseT or
100BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The
interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a remote
computer to connect through the Internet to the calibrator using APICOM, terminal
emulators or other programs.
Under the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu the INET submenu is used to manage and
configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN or Internet Server(s). The calibrator is
shipped with DHCP enabled by default. This allows the instrument to be connected to a
network or router with a DHCP server (Section 5.4.1), but for a permanent Ethernet
connection, configure the instrument with a static IP address (Section 5.4.1.1).
The Ethernet LEDs located on the connector indicate the Ethernet connection status.
Table 5-2: Ethernet Status Indicators
LED

FUNCTION

amber (link)

On when connection to the LAN is valid.

green (activity)

Flickers during any activity on the LAN.

5.4.1. CONFIGURING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE USING DHCP
The Ethernet feature for your T700 uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
to configure its interface with your LAN automatically. This requires your network
servers also be running DHCP. The calibrator will do this the first time you turn the
instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network. Once the
instrument is connected and turned on, it will appear as an active device on your
network without any extra set up steps or lengthy procedures.
Note

06873B DCN6388

Check the INET settings the first time you power up your calibrator after it has
been physically connected to the LAN/Internet to ensure that the DHCP has
successfully downloaded the appropriate information from your network
server(s).

181

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Table 5-3: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties
PROPERTY

DEFAULT
STATE

DHCP STATUS

INSTRUMENT
IP ADDRESS

0.0.0.0

This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g. 192.168.76.55.)
is the address of the calibrator itself.

GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS

0.0.0.0

A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP address (e.g.
192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the computer used by your LAN to
access the Internet.

DESCRIPTION
This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF.

Also, a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
255.255.252.0) that defines that identifies the LAN to which the device is
connected.
SUBNET MASK

0.0.0.0

TCP PORT1

3000

This number defines the terminal control port by which the instrument is
addressed by terminal emulation software, such as Internet or Teledyne
API’s APICOM.

T700

The name by which your calibrator will appear when addressed from
other computers on the LAN or via the Internet. While the default setting
for all Teledyne API’s T700 calibrators is “T700”, the host name may be
changed to fit customer needs.

HOST NAME
1

All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have the same
subnet mask. Any transmissions sent devices with different subnet
masks are assumed to be outside of the LAN and are routed through a
different gateway computer onto the Internet.

Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Customer Service
personnel.

Note

182

If the gateway IP, instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes (e.g.
“0.0.0.0”), the DCHP was not successful in which case you may have to
configure the calibrator’s Ethernet properties manually. See your network
administrator.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Communications Setup and Operation

To view the above properties listed in Table 5-3, press:

06873B DCN6388

183

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

5.4.1.1. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses
There are several circumstances when you may need to manually set the Ethernet
configuration:


Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package,



The DHCP software is unable to initialize the calibrator’s interface;



You wish to configure the interface with a specific IP address, such as for a
permanent Ethernet connection..

Manually configuring the Ethernet interface requires that you first turn DHCP to OFF
before setting the INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP and SUBNET
MASK parameters:

184

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Communications Setup and Operation

Internet Configuration Touchscreen Button Functions
From Step 1 above)

SETUP X.X

DHCP: OFF

SET> EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

FUNCTION

[0]

Press to cycle through the range of numerals and
available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)

Moves the cursor one character left or right.

DEL

Deletes a character at the cursor location.

ENTR

Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.

EXIT

Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.

Some buttons only appear when applicable.

INST IP: 000.000.000.000

EDIT

BUTTON

EXIT

SETUP X.X

Cursor
location is
indicated by
brackets

INST IP: [0] 00.000.000

DEL [0]

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000
EDIT

EXIT

SETUP X.X

GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000

DEL [?]

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0
EDIT

EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0
SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000

EDIT

ENTR EXIT

EXIT
The PORT number needs to remain at 3000.
Do not change this setting unless instructed to by
Teledyne API Customer Service personnel.

SETUP X.X

INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%

INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED

SETUP X.X
ID

06873B DCN6388

DEL [?]

INET

SETUP X.X

INITIALIZATION FAILED

Contact your IT
Network Administrator

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1 COM2

EXIT

185

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

5.4.2. CHANGING THE CALIBRATOR’S HOSTNAME
The HOSTNAME is the name by which the calibrator appears on your network. The
default name for all Teledyne API’s T700 calibrators is T700. To change this name
(particularly if you have more than one T700 calibrator on your network), press.

BUTTON

FUNCTION

Moves the cursor one character to the right.

INS

Inserts a character before the cursor location.

DEL

Deletes a character at the cursor location.

[0]

Press this key to cycle through the range of
numerals and characters available for
insertion. 0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * (
) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?

ENTR

Accepts the new setting and returns to the
previous menu.

EXIT

Ignores the new setting and returns to the
previous menu.

Some buttons only appear WHEN APPLICABLE.

186

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Communications Setup and Operation

5.4.3. USB PORT (OPTION) FOR REMOTE ACCESS
The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the TAPI
USB driver and directly connecting their respective USB ports.
1. Install the Teledyne T-Series USB driver on your computer, downloadable from the
Teledyne API website under Help Center>Software Downloads (www.teledyneapi.com/software).
2. Run the installer file: “TAPIVCPInstaller.exe”

3. Connect the USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your
analyzer. The USB cable should be a Type A – Type B cable, commonly used as a
USB printer cable.
4. Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to
the USB connection. (Start → Control Panel → System → Hardware → Device
Manager). This is the com port that should be set in the communications software,
such as APIcom or Hyperterminal.

Refer to the Quick Start (Direct Cable Connection) section of the Teledyne APIcom
Manual, PN 07463.

06873B DCN6388

187

Communications Setup and Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

5. In the instrument’s SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM2 menu, make the following settings:
Baud Rate: 115200
COM2 Mode Settings:
Quiet Mode

Computer Mode

MODBUS RTU

OFF

MODBUS ASCII

OFF

E,8,1 MODE

OFF

E,7,1 MODE

OFF

RS-485 MODE

OFF

SECURITY MODE

OFF

MULTIDROP MODE

OFF

ENABLE MODEM

OFF

ERROR CHECKING

XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE

OFF

HARDWARE HANDSHAKE

OFF

HARDWARE FIFO

COMMAND PROMPT

OFF

6. Next, configure your communications software, such as APIcom. Use the COM port
determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5. The figures below show how
these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in
APIcom when configuring a new instrument. See the APIcom manual (PN 07463)
for more details.

Note




188

USB configuration requires that the baud rates of the instrument and
the PC match; check the PC baud rate and change if needed.
Using the USB port disallows use of the rear panel COM2 port except
for multidrop communication.

06873B DCN6388

6. REMOTE OPERATION
This section provides information needed when using external digital and serial I/O for
remote operation. It assumes that the electrical connections have been made as described
in Section3.3.1
The T700 can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data th through
the rear panel serial ports, via either Computer mode (using a personal computer with a
dedicated interface program) or Interactive mode (using a terminal emulation
program).

6.1. COMPUTER MODE
Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated
interface program such as APICOM.

6.1.1. REMOTE CONTROL VIA APICOM
APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows the user to access
and control any of Teledyne API’s main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from
a remote connection through direct cable, modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a
user can:


Establish a link from a remote location to the T700 through direct cable connection
via RS-232 modem or Ethernet.



View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be
accessed when standing in front of the instrument.



Remotely edit system parameters and set points.



Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.



Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.

APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and troubleshooting. Figure 6-1 shows an example of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates
the look and functionality of the instrument’s actual front panel. Refer to the APICOM
manual available for download from http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.

06873B DCN6388

189

Remote Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Figure 6-1: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface

6.2. INTERACTIVE MODE
Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs or a “dumb” computer
terminal.

6.2.1. REMOTE CONTROL VIA A TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAM
Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal. All configuration
commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from an existing text
file, which was edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure.
The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 6-1.

6.2.1.1. Help Commands in Interactive Mode
Table 6-1: Terminal Mode Software Commands
COMMAND

190

Function

Control-T

Switches the calibrator to terminal mode
(echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF,
the interface can be used in interactive
mode with a terminal emulation program.

Control-C

Switches the calibrator to computer mode
(no echo, no edit).

CR
(carriage return)

A carriage return is required after each
command line is typed into the
terminal/computer. The command will not

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

COMMAND

Function
be sent to the calibrator to be executed until
this is done. On personal computers, this is
achieved by pressing the ENTER button.

BS
(backspace)

Erases one character to the left of the
cursor location.

ESC
(escape)

Erases the entire command line.

? [ID] CR

This command prints a complete list of
available commands along with the
definitions of their functionality to the
display device of the terminal or computer
being used. The ID number of the
calibrator is only necessary if multiple
calibrators are on the same
communications line, such as the multidrop setup.

Control-C

Pauses the listing of commands.

Control-P

Restarts the listing of commands.

Remote Operation

6.2.1.2. Command Syntax
Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID
numbers, keywords, data values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.
All Commands follow the syntax:
X [ID] COMMAND
Where
X

is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command.
Allowed designators are listed in Table 6-2 and Appendix A-6.

[ID]

is the machine identification number (Section4.7.1). Example: the
Command “? 700” followed by a carriage return would print the list of
available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the
instrument assigned ID Number 700.

COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being
issued (LIST, ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have
additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed.
Press ? or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of available command
designators.

06873B DCN6388

is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage
return (usually achieved by pressing the ENTER button on a computer).

191

Remote Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Table 6-2: Teledyne API Serial I/O Command Types
COMMAND

COMMAND TYPE

Calibration

Diagnostic

Logon

Test measurement

Variable

Warning

6.2.1.3. Data Types
Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean
expressions and text strings.


Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of
records, a filter length, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign,
followed by one or more digits. For example, +1, -12, 123 are all valid integers.



Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They
consist of the two characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits
(0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming language convention. No plus or
minus sign is permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all valid
hexadecimal integers.



Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as
temperature set points, time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They
consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by zero or more digits, an
optional decimal point and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear
before or after the decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For
example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.



Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals
that may assume only two values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and
OFF.



Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by
other data types, such as data channel names, which may contain letters and
numbers. They consist of a quotation mark, followed by one or more printable
characters, including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a final
quotation mark. For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text
strings. It is not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text
string.



Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items.
When using these commands, you must type the entire name of the item; you
cannot abbreviate any names.

6.2.1.4. Status Reporting
Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the
RS-232 interface (the other two being the command line interface for controlling the
instrument and the download of data in electronic format). You can effectively disable
the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (Section 5.2.1, Table 5-1).

192

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Remote Operation

Status reports include warning messages, calibration and diagnostic status messages.
Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible messages, and this for information on
controlling the instrument through the RS-232 interface.

6.2.1.5. General Message Format
All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line
request) are in the format:
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE
Where:
X

is a command type designator, a single character indicating the
message type, as shown in the Table 6-2.

DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued.
It consists of the Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366,
the hour of the day (HH) as a number from 00 to 23, and the
minute (MM) as a number from 00 to 59.
[ID]

is the calibrator ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.

MESSAGE

is the message content that may contain warning messages, test
measurements, variable values, etc.

is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.

The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse
them into an easy structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any
information on the time a message was issued, hence it is useful to log such messages
for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal emulation programs such as
HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.

6.3. REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM
The T700 can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable
between the calibrator’s COMM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M
cable (available from Teledyne API with P/N WR0000024).
Once the cable has been connected, check to ensure that:


The DTE-DCE is in the DCE position.



The T700 COMM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem.



The Modem is designed to operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.



The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned ON (Mode 64, see
Section 5.2.1).

Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be
entered into the calibrator. The default setting for this feature is:
AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0

This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100
characters long.

06873B DCN6388

193

Remote Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

To change this setting, press:
STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

A-CAL=0.000 LPM

SEQ

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SETUP X.X
EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing until ...
SETUP X.X

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID INET COM1 COM2

EXIT

buttons move the
cursor left and right
along the text string

EDIT

SETUP X.X
CH>

The INS and CH>
buttons insert a new
character before the
cursor position

194

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM FLOW VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X

COM1 MODE:0

EXIT

COM1 PORT INIT:AT Y0 &DO &H &I0
INS

DEL

[A]

ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards the
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting

DEL deletes
character at
the cursor
position

Toggle this button to cycle through
the available character set:
Alpha: A-Z (Upper and Lower
Case);
Special Characters: space ’ ~ ! # $
% ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < > | ; : , . / ?
Numerals: 0-9

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Remote Operation

To initialize the modem, press:

06873B DCN6388

195

Remote Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

6.4. PASSWORD SECURITY FOR SERIAL REMOTE
COMMUNICATIONS
In order to provide security for remote access of the T700, a LOGON feature can be
enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done
by turning on the SECURITY MODE (Mode 4, Section 5.2.1). Once the SECURITY
MODE is enabled, the following items apply.


A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.



If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be
achieved with the LOGOFF command.



Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause
subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.



If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.



The following messages will be returned at logon:


LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given



LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect



LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully

To log on to the T700 calibrator with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:
LOGON 940331

940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable
RS232_PASS issued as follows:
V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN

Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.

196

06873B DCN6388

7. CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION
Basic electronic calibration of the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is performed at the
factory. Normally there is no need to perform this factory calibration in the field
however, the performance of several of the instrument’s key subsystems should be
verified periodically and if necessary adjusted. These subsystems are:


Mass Flow Controllers: The accuracy of the mass flow controller outputs is intrinsic
to achieving the correct calibration mixture concentrations, therefore the accuracy of
their output should be checked and if necessary adjusted every 6 months (see
Sections 7.1 and 7.2).



O3 Photometer: If your T700 is equipped with the optional O3 photometer its
performance should be periodically verified against and external transfer standard
(see Section 7.3).



O3 Generator: If your T700 is equipped with the optional O3 generator, it should be
periodically calibrated (see Section 7.4).

7.1. VIEWING THE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS FOR THE
T700’S MFC’S
It is possible to view the target flow rate, actual flow rate and actual gas pressure for
each MFC via the FLOW submenu in the T700 calibrator (in real time). To access this
information, press:

06873B DCN6388

197

Calibration and Verification

198

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

In the displays associated with the FLOW  STAT submenu:


The numbers after “F=” are the flow.


The first number is the target flow.



The second is the actual flow.



The number after “P=” is pressure in PSIG.



If an MFC is off, its flows are displayed as OFF.

7.2. CALIBRATING THE OUTPUT OF THE T700’S MFC’S
A table exists in the memory of the T700’s for each MFC that sets the output of the
MFC at each of 20 equally spaced control points along its entire performance range.
This table may be accesses via the DIAG  MFC CONFIGURATION submenu (see
Section 7.2.2).
For each calibration point, the following is displayed:


The drive voltage in 20 equal, incremental steps from 0 mVDC to 5000 mVDC;



The expected flow rate corresponding to each drive voltage point (each equal
to1/20th of the full scale for the selected mass flow controller).

This table can also be used to calibrate the output of the MFCs by adjusting either the
control voltage of a point or its associated flow output value (see Section 7.2.2).
Table 7-1: Examples of MFC Calibration Points
MFC FULL SCALE

CAL
POINT

DRIVE
VOLTAGE

1.0 LPM

3.0 LPM

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

000 mV
250 mV
500 mV
750 mV
1000 mV
1250 mV
1500 mV
1750 mV
2000 mV
2250 mV
2500 mV
2750 mV
3000 mV
3250 mV
3500 mV
3750 mV
4000 mV
4250 mV
4500 mV
4750 mV
5000 mV

0.000
0.050
0.100
0.150
0.200
0.250
0.300
0.350
0.400
0.450
0.500
0.550
0.600
0.650
0.700
0.750
0.800
0.850
0.900
0.950
1.000

0.000
0.150
0.300
0.450
0.600
0.750
0.900
1.050
1.200
1.350
1.500
1.650
1.800
1.950
2.100
2.250
2.400
2.550
2.700
2.850
3.000

06873B DCN6388

5.0 LPM

10.0 LPM

MFC TARGET OUTPUT
0.000
0.250
0.500
0.750
1.000
1.250
1.500
1.750
2.000
2.250
2.500
2.750
3.000
3.250
3.500
3.750
4.000
4.250
4.500
4.750
5.000

0.000
0.500
1.000
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
3.500
4.000
4.500
5.000
5.500
6.000
6.500
7.000
7.500
8.000
8.500
9.000
9.500
10.000

199

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.2.1. SETUP FOR VERIFICATION AND CALIBRATION OF THE T700’S
MFC’S
Note

A separate flow meter is required for the procedure.
1. Turn off the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator.
2. Open the front panel to the T700 calibrator. This is the easiest access to the MFC
output ports.
 A locking screw located at the top center of the front panel (See Figure 3-1)
must be removed before the panel can be opened.
3. Attach the flow meter directly to the output port of the MFC to be checked/tested.

GPT
Chamber

PHOTOMETER

Input Gas
Pressure
Sensor
PCA

GPT
Valve

Front Panel

Outlet Port for
Optional 2nd Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller

Outlet Port for
Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller

Outlet Port for
Diluent
Mass Flow Controller

ON / OFF
Switch

Figure 7-1: Location of MFC Outlet Ports
4. Turn the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator ON.

200

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.2.2. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE T700’S MFC’S
Once the external flow meter is connected to the output of the MFC being
verified/calibrated, perform the following steps:

06873B DCN6388

201

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.3. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE T700’S OPTIONAL O3
PHOTOMETER
For calibrators equipped with the O3 photometer, the accuracy of calibration mixtures
involving O3 produced by the T700 depends entirely on the accuracy of the photometer,
therefore it is very important that the photometer is operating properly and accurately.
Setup for Verifying O3 Photometer Performance is shown in Section 7.3.1.

7.3.1. SETUP FOR VERIFYING O3 PHOTOMETER PERFORMANCE
This operation requires an external reference photometer.

Enclosure Wall

Note

Figure 7-2: Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer

202

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.3.2. VERIFYING O3 PHOTOMETER PERFORMANCE
To verify the performance of the T700’s optional internal photometer perform the
following steps:
Make sure that the
T700 is in STANDBY
mode

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

STANDBY
AUTO

SETUP

SYSTEM RESET

MAN

PURG

STANDBY

GENERATE:ZERO
ZERO ENTR SETUP

Continue pressing this key until the desired
gas type appears

STANDBY

Toggle
thesebuttons to
set the target
concentration.

Toggle this button to
scroll through the
available gas types (as
programmed during
initial setup.

GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

Toggle this button
to set the units of
measure.
STANDBY
0

GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
4

STANDBY
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

TOTAL FLOW = 2.000 LPM
2.

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
set the target TOTAL
FLOW.
(Default = 2.000 LPM)

GENERATE
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP

Press this key until the ACT test function is displayed

STANDBY
Wait
A MINIMUM
OF
10 MINUTES
or until the
ACT reading
settles down

GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP

Record O3 concentration readings displayed by the ACT
test function and by the external reference photometer

Repeat this procedure for as many points along the
performance range of the T700 as required

Note

06873B DCN6388

The readings recorded from the T700’s ACT test function and the reference
photometer should be within 1% of each other.

203

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.3.3. SETUP FOR CALIBRATION OF THE O3 PHOTOMETER
Note

This procedure requires external sources for zero air and O3 as an external
reference photometer.

Calibrating the T700 calibrator’s optional internal photometer requires a different set up
than that used during the normal operation of the calibrator. There are two ways to
make the connections between these instruments and the T700 calibrator: either with
direct connections or calibration manifolds

7.3.3.1. Setup Using Direct Connections
Figure 7-3 shows the external zero air and O3 sources as well as the reference
photometer connected directly to the fixtures on the back of the T700 Calibrator.

Figure 7-3: External Photometer Validation Setup – Direct Connections
Note

204

A Minimum of 1.1 LPM is required for the external zero air source.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.3.3.2. Setup Using a Calibration Manifold
Figure 7-4 shows the external zero air and O3 sources as well as the reference
photometer connected to the T700 Calibrator via calibration manifolds for both zero air
and O3.

Figure 7-4: External Photometer Validation Setup with Calibration Manifolds
Note

The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented to simplify the
drawing. The actual orientation in your setup is with the ports facing upward.
All unused ports should be capped. A Minimum of 1.1 LPM is required for the
external zero air source.

7.3.3.3. Calibration Manifold Exhaust/Vent Line
The manifold’s excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside of the room. The
internal diameter of this vent should be large enough to avoid any appreciable pressure
drop, and it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to ensure that no
ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion.

7.3.4. PERFORMING AN O3 PHOTOMETER EXTERNAL CALIBRATION
The following procedure sets values held in the calibrator’s memory for zero point
OFFSET and SLOPE.

06873B DCN6388

205

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.3.4.1. Photometer Zero Calibration
To set the zero point offset for the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator’s photometer, press:

206

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.3.4.2. Photometer Span Calibration
To set the response SLOPE for the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator’s photometer,
press:

06873B DCN6388

207

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.3.5. O3 PHOTOMETER DARK CALIBRATION
The Dark Calibration Test turns off the Photometer UV Lamp and records any offset
signal level of the UV Detector-Preamp-Voltage to Frequency Converter circuitry. This
allows the instrument to compensate for any voltage levels inherent in the Photometer
detection circuit that might affect the output of the detector circuitry and therefore the
calculation of O3 concentration.
To activate the Dark Calibration feature:

208

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.3.6. O3 PHOTOMETER GAS FLOW CALIBRATION
Note

A separate flow meter is required for the procedure.
To calibrate the flow of gas through the T700 calibrator’s optional photometer bench.
1. Turn OFF the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator.
2. Attach the flow meter directly to the EXHAUST port of the T700 calibrator.
3. Turn the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator ON.
4. Perform the following steps:

06873B DCN6388

209

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.3.7. O3 PHOTOMETER BACKPRESSURE COMPENSATION
CALIBRATION
Any time there is a pneumatic configuration change, there is risk of impacting the
internal measure/reference pressure. To compensate for this, a backpressure
compensation calibration is required each time. Set the calibrator to generate ozone at
the flow rate intended for operation. While the instrument is generating ozone, go to the
SETUP>MORE>DIAG>929>…>BACKPRESSURE COMPENSATION menu and
press ENTR, shown in the following illustration, to initiate the calibration; the operation
will take a few minutes:
Make sure that the T700 is
generating ozone at the
intended operational flow rate.

GENERATE
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

SETUP X.X

CFG

CLK PASS MORE

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM FLOW VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8
Toggle these buttons to
enter the correct
PASSWORD - 929

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD

DIAG

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

SIGNAL I/O

PREV NEXT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG
PREV

210

BACKPRESSURE COMPENSATION
NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.4. CALIBRATING THE O3 GENERATOR
7.4.1. SETUP FOR VERIFICATION AND CALIBRATION THE O3
GENERATOR
Note

An external reference photometer is required for the procedure.

7.4.1.1. Setup Using Direct Connections
Figure 7-5 shows the reference photometer connected directly to the fixtures on the back
of the T700 Calibrator.

Figure 7-5: O3 Generator Calibration Setup – Direct Connections

06873B DCN6388

211

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Verifying O3 Generator Performance
Using the set up shown in Figure 8-4, perform the following steps:
STANDBY

Make sure that the
T700 is in STANDBY
mode

GEN STBY SEQ

STANDBY
AUTO

SETUP

SYSTEM RESET

MAN

PURG

STANDBY

GENERATE:ZERO
ZERO ENTR SETUP

Continue pressing this key until the desired
gas type appears

STANDBY
0

Toggle this button to
scroll through the
available gas types (as
programmed during
initial setup.

GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons
to set the target
concentration.

Toggle this button
to set the units of
measure.
STANDBY
0

GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
4

STANDBY
0

PPB

ENTR EXIT

TOTAL FLOW = 2.000 LPM
2.

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
set the target TOTAL
FLOW.
(Default = 2.000 LPM)

GENERATE
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP

Record O3 concentration from reference
photometer

Note

212

The readings recorded from the T700’s A-CAL test function and the reference
photometer should be within 1% of each other.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.4.2. O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
The T700 calibrator’s software includes a routine for automatically calibration the O3
generator. A table of drive voltages stored in the T700’s memory is the basis for this
calibration. For each point included in the table used by the T700 to calibrate the
optional O3 generator the user can set a drive voltage and a dwell time for that point.
Each point can also be individually turned OFF or ON.

7.4.2.1. Viewing O3 Generator Calibration Points
To view these calibration points, press:

06873B DCN6388

213

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.4.2.2. Adding or Editing O3 Generator Calibration Points
To add a calibration point to the table or edit an existing point, press:
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SEQ

CFG

CLK PASS

EXIT

SETUP X.X
COMM FLOW VARS

Continue pressing

EXIT

SETUP X.X

until ...

DIAG
EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
enter the correct

PREV NEXT

EXIT

DIAG
DIAG
PREV

CAL
ENTR

EXIT

EXIT
DIAG O3GEN
DEL

Toggle these buttons to the place in the
table where the point is to be added or
edited. New Points are inserted
BEFORE the displayed point.

PRNT

EXIT

DIAG O3GEN
EXIT

Toggle these buttons to move
between calibration points
parameters

DIAG O3GEN
EXIT

Toggle these buttons to set
the drive voltage

accepts
the new setting

DIAG O3GEN

EXIT

DIAG O3GEN
EXIT
Toggle these buttons to set
the dwell time for the point.

accepts
the new setting

DIAG O3GEN

Toggle these buttons to set
the dwell time for the point.

214

EXIT

discards
the new setting
accepts
the new setting

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.4.2.3. Deleting O3 Generator Calibration Points
To delete an existing calibration point, press:
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SEQ

CFG

CLK PASS

EXIT

SETUP X.X
COMM FLOW VARS

EXIT

SETUP X.X

Continue pressing

until ...

DIAG

EXIT

PREV NEXT

EXIT

Toggle these buttons to
enter the correct
DIAG

DIAG
PREV

ENTR

EXIT

CAL

EXIT

DIAG O3GEN
INS

DEL

PRNT

EXIT

Continue pressing
&
until your
reach the point to be deleted

DIAG O3GEN
PREV NEXT

INS

PRNT

EXIT

DIAG O3GEN
NO

DIAG O3GEN

DIAG O3GEN
PREV NEXT

06873B DCN6388

INS

DEL

PRNT

215

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.4.2.4. Turning O3 Generator Calibration Points ON / OFF
To enable or disable an existing calibration point, press:
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SEQ

SETUP X.X
COMM FLOW

SETUP X.X
8
Toggle these buttons to
enter the correct
PASSWORD

DIAG
PREV NEXT

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU
VA

DIAG

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD
8

ENTR

EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG

O3 GEN CALIBRATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG

SIGNAL I/O
ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

O3 GEN CALIBRATION

CAL

PNTS

DIAG O3GEN

EXIT

1) 500 MV, 5.0 MIN, ON

PREV NEXT

INS

DEL EDIT PRNT

EXIT

Continue pressing PREV & NEXT until your
reach the point to be turned ON/OFF

DIAG O3GEN

8) 1500 MV, 5.0 MIN, ON

PREV NEXT

DIAG O3GEN
EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG O3GEN
EDIT

EXIT

CAL. POINT ENABLELD:ON
ENTR

EXIT

EXIT discards
the new setting
ENTR accepts
the new setting

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.4.2.5. Performing an Automatic Calibration of the Optional O3 Generator
Note

This procedure requires that the T700 calibrator have an optional photometer
installed.

To run the automatic O3 generator calibration program, press:
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SEQ

CFG

CLK PASS

EXIT

SETUP X.X
COMM FLOW VAr

EXIT

SETUP X.X
EXIT
Toggle these buttons to
enter the correct
DIAG
PREV

ENTR

Continue pressing

EXIT

until ...

DIAG
PREV NEXT

EXIT

DIAG
PNTS

EXIT

DIAG

aborts
the calibration
Test runs automatically

DIAG

06873B DCN6388

217

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.5. T700 GAS PRESSURE SENSOR CALIBRATION
Note

The procedures described in this section require a separate pressure
meter/monitor.

The T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator has several sensors that monitor the pressure of
the gases flowing through the instrument. The data collected by these sensors is used to
compensate the final concentration calculations for changes in atmospheric pressure and
is stored in the CPU’s memory as various test functions:
Table 7-2: T700 Pressure Sensor Calibration Setup
SENSOR

ASSOCIATED
TEST FUNCTION

UNITS

PRESSURE MONITOR
MEASUREMENT POINT

Diluent Pressure Sensor

DIL PRESSURE

PSIG

Insert monitor just before the inlet port of the
diluent MFC

Cal Gas Pressure Sensor

CAL PRESSURE

PSIG

Insert monitor just before the inlet port of the
cal gas MFC

REG PRESSURE

PSIG

Insert monitor in line between the regulator
and the O3 gas pressure sensor located on
the O3 generator / photometer pressure /
flow sensor PCA

PHOTO SPRESS

IN-HG-A

O3 Regulator Pressure
Sensor
(Optional O3 Generator)

Sample Gas Pressure
Sensor
(Optional O3 Photometer)

218

Use monitor to measure ambient
atmospheric pressure at the calibrator’s
location.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

Figure 7-6: Pressure Monitor Points – T700 – Basic Unit
Instrument Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH

Flow Control
(1.0 LPM)

Pressure
Monitor

gry

Pressure
Regulator

O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR

grn

DILUENT
INLET

PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

grn

DILUENT
Valve

brn

Flow Control
(800 cm3)

Pressure
Monitor

Purge
Valve

vio PHOTOMETER
INLET

REF/MEAS
Valve

vio

brn
wht

brn
DILUENT
PRESSURE
SENSOR

CAL GAS 1
INLET

PUMP

blk

red

PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT

INTERNAL
VENT

blk

orn

EXHAUST

blu

GPT
Valve

orn
yel

PHOTOMETER
OUTLET

yel

GAS INPUT MANIFOLD
(on back panel)

gry

O3 Gen
Valve

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR

CAL GAS 3
INLET

wht PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller

CAL GAS 2
INLET

CAL GAS 4
INLET

On Back Panel

O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 2

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 1

red
yel

Pressure
Monitor

GPT
Volume

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 2

blu

VENT

blu
yel

yel

GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 7-7: Pressure Monitor Points – T700 with O3 Options and Multiple Cal MFCs Installed

06873B DCN6388

219

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

7.5.1.1. Calibrating the Diluent, Cal Gas Optional O3 Generator Pressure Sensors
1. Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover.
2. For the sensor being calibrated, insert a “T” pneumatic connector at the location
described in Table 7-2 and shown in Figure 7-6 and Figure 7-7.
3. Turn on the calibrator and perform the following steps:

4. Turn OFF the T700.
5. Remove the pressure monitor.
6. Restore the pneumatic lines to their proper connections.
7. Close the calibrator’s cover.
220

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Calibration and Verification

7.5.1.2. Calibrating the Optional O3 Photometer Sample Gas Pressure Sensors
Note

This calibration must be performed when the pressure of the photometer sample
gas is equal to ambient atmospheric pressure.

1. Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover.
2. Disconnect power to the photometer’s internal pump.
3. Measure the ambient atmospheric pressure of T700’s location in In-Hg-A.
4. Turn on the calibrator and perform the following steps:

5. Turn OFF the T700.
6. Reconnect the internal pump.
7. Close the calibrator’s cover.

06873B DCN6388

221

Calibration and Verification

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

222

06873B DCN6388

PART III
–
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

06873B DCN6388

223

Calibration and Verification

224

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

06873B DCN6388

8. MAINTENANCE
Predictive diagnostic functions including failure warnings and alarms built into the
calibrator’s firmware allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without
performing painstaking preventative maintenance procedures.
For the most part, the T700 calibrator is maintenance free, there are, however, a minimal
number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the T700
photometer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime.
Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Section 11 of this manual.

8.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Table 8-1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the T700. Please note that in certain
environments (i.e. dusty, very high ambient pollutant levels) some maintenance
procedures may need to be performed more often than shown.
Note

If the instrument has the optional O3 photometer installed, a Span and
Zero Calibration Check must be performed on the photometer following
some of the maintenance procedure listed below. See Section 7.3 for
instructions on performing checks.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE PERFORMING ANY OF
THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS THAT REQUIRE ENTRY INTO THE INTERIOR OF THE
CALIBRATOR.

CAUTION
THE OPERATIONS OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED
MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL ONLY.

06873B DCN6388

225

Table 8-1: T700 Maintenance Schedule

Item

Action

Freq

Verify Test
Functions

Record and
analyze

Weekly or after
any Maintenance
or Repair

Pump
1
Diaphragm

Absorption
Tube1

Cal
Check
Req’d.1

Date Performed
Manual
Section

No Replacement Required. Under Normal Circumstances this Pump Will Last the Lifetime of the Instrument.

Inspect
--Clean

As Needed

Yes after
cleaning

Cleaning of the Photometer Absorption Tube Should Not Be Required
as long as
8.2.2

ONLY CLEAN, DRY, PARTICULATE FREE
Zero Air (Diluent Gas)
is used with the T700 Calibrator

Perform
Flow Check

Verify Flow
of MFCs

Annually or any
time the T700’s
internal DAC is
recalibrated

7.1 & 7.2

Perform
Leak Check

Verify Leak
Tight

Annually or after
any Maintenance
or Repair

Yes

8.2.1

Pneumatic
lines

Examine
and clean

As needed

Yes if
cleaned

---

Only applies to T700 Calibrator’s with O3 photometer options installed.

226
06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Maintenance

8.2. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The following procedures are to be performed periodically as part of the standard
maintenance of the T700 calibrator.

8.2.1. AUTO LEAK CHECK
8.2.1.1. Equipment Required


Four (4) 1/4" Pneumatic caps.



One (1) 1/8” Pneumatic Cap



One (1) # 6 hexagonal Driver/Wrench



One (1) Pneumatic “T” fitting

8.2.1.2. Setup Auto Leak Check
To perform a leak-check on the T700 calibrator:
1. Remove the cover from the calibrator.
2. On Instruments with the optional O3 photometer installed, the photometer flow
sensor PCA and pump must be bypassed:
 Using a #6 nut driver, remove the hexagonal nut located at the top of the gas
outlet of the photometer (see Figure 8-1).


Using a #6 nut driver, remove the hexagonal nut located on the fitting on the
back side of the Flow/Pressure sensor board (see Figure 8-1).



Connect the end of the line removed from the Sensor PCA in Step 3 to the
Photometer Outlet Fitting.

Photometer Gas
Outlet Fitting

Internal Vent

Photometer
Flow Sensor / Pump
Outlet Fitting

Figure 8-1: Bypassing the Photometer Sensor PCA and Pump

06873B DCN6388

227

Maintenance

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

3. Using the 1/8” cap, securely cover the outlet of the internal vent located just behind
the valve relay PCA (see Figure 8-1).
4. Use the 1/4" caps to cover the following gas outlet ports on the back of the T700
(see Figure 8-2).
 Exhaust (Only required for calibrators with O3 generators install).


Both Cal Gas 1 outlet ports.



The Vent port.

“T” Fitting

Cap These Ports

Figure 8-2: Gas Port Setup for Auto-Leak Check Procedure
5. If a bottle of source gas is connected to the CYL 1 port, remove it.
Note

Ensure that the gas outlet of the bottle is CLOSED before disconnecting the gas
line from the CYL 1 port..
6. Connect a gas line from the zero air gas source to the Diluent In and to the CYL 1
port using a “T” type pneumatic fitting (see Figure 8-2).

228

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Maintenance

Figure 8-3: Gas Flow for Auto-Leak Check Procedure of Base Model T700’s

Instrument Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH

Flow Control
(1.0 LPM)
gry

grn

DILUENT
Valve
brn

Flow Control
(10 cm3)

Purge
Valve

brn

CAL GAS 1
INLET

CAL GAS 2
INLET

CAL GAS 3
INLET

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller

PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

vio PHOTOMETER
INLET

vio
REF/MEAS
Valve

Flow Control
(800 cm3)

wht
wht PHOTOMETER

OFF
/

ZERO IN

gry PHOTOMETER

O3 Gen
Valve

ZERO OUT

blk
Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR

On Back Panel

O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA

CAP

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

brn
DILUENT
PRESSURE
SENSOR

O3 Generator Assembly

O3
GENERATOR

grn

DILUENT
INLET

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE
SENSOR

Pressure
Regulator

red

INTERNAL
VENT

blk

orn

yel
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD
(on back panel)

EXHAUST

GPT
Valve

orn

CAL GAS 4
INLET

PHOTOMETER
OUTLET

yel

blu

blu
yel

yel

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 2

VENT

CAP

GPT
Volume

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 1

CAP

red
yel

CAP

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 2

GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 8-4: Gas Flow for Auto-Leak Check Procedure of T700’s with Optional Photometer

06873B DCN6388

229

Maintenance

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

8.2.1.3. Performing the Auto Leak Check Procedure
To perform an AUTO LEAK CHECK, press:
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SEQ

SETUP X.X

CFG

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM FLOW VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
0

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

Toggle these keys to enter
the correct PASSWORD
DIAG

SIGNAL I/O

PREV NEXT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG
PREV NEXT
Pressure displayed is the
actual pressure read by the
instruments internal
sensors.
At the beginning of the test
this should equal the
pressure of the Diluent Gas
(Zero Air ) bottle

DIAG LEAK

AUTO LEAK CHECK
ENTR

LEAK CHECK 30.0 PSIG,

EXIT

17%
EXIT

DIAG LEAK

Test Runs Automatically
At 17% of elapsed time the program
shuts the DILUENT IN and CYL1
port valves. Then measures the total
drop in internal gas pressure (if any)
for the duration of the test.
A drop of ≥ 2 PSIG causes the test
to FAIL.
Run time is approximately
5 minutes

LEAK CHECK PASSED 29.8 PSIG
EXIT

8.2.1.4. Returning the T700 to Service after Performing an Auto Leak Check
1. Remove all of the caps from the EXHAUST, CAL GAS OUTPUTS (2) and the VENT
port and from the internal vent.
2. On instruments with an optional O3 photometer, reconnect the internal gas lines so
that the Sensor PCA and pump are functional.
3. Remove the tee from the DILUENT IN and CYL 1.
4. Reconnect the ZERO AIR SOURCE to the DILUENT IN.
5. Reconnect Cal Gas bottle to CYL 1 and open the bottles outlet port.
6. Replace the calibrator’s top cover.
7. The calibrator is now ready to be used.
230

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Maintenance

8.2.2. CLEANING OR REPLACING THE ABSORPTION TUBE
Note

Although this procedure should never be needed as long as the user is careful to
supply the photometer with clean, dry and particulate free zero air only, it is
included here for those rare occasions when cleaning or replacing the
absorption tube may be required.
1. Remove the center cover from the optical bench.
2. Unclip the sample thermistor from the tube.
3. Loosen the two screws on the round tube retainers at either end of the tube.
4. Using both hands, carefully rotate the tube to free it.
5. Slide the tube towards the lamp housing.


The front of the tube can now be slid past the detector block and out of the
instrument.
CAUTION

DO NOT CAUSE THE TUBE TO BIND AGAINST THE METAL HOUSINGS.
THE TUBE MAY BREAK AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.

6. Clean the tube by rinsing with de-ionized water.
7. Air dry the tube.
8. Check the cleaning job by looking down the bore of the tube.


It should be free from dirt and lint.

9. Inspect the o-rings that seal the ends of the optical tube (these o-rings may stay
seated in the manifolds when the tube is removed).
10. If there is any noticeable damage to these o-rings, they should be replaced.
11. Re-assemble the tube into the lamp housing and perform an Auto Leak Check on
the instrument.
Note

06873B DCN6388

It is important for proper optical alignment that the tube be pushed all the way
towards the front of the optical bench when it is reassembled prior to gently
retightening the tube retainer screws. This will ensure that the tube is
assembled with the forward end against the stop inside the detector manifold.

231

Maintenance

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

8.2.3. UV SOURCE LAMP ADJUSTMENT
This procedure provides in detail the steps for adjustment of the UV source lamp in the
optical bench assembly. This procedure should be done whenever the PHOTO
REFERENCE test function value drops below 3000 mV.
1. Ensure that the calibrator is warmed-up and has been running for at least 30
minutes before proceeding.
2. Remove the cover from the calibrator.
3. Locate the optional Photometer (see Figure 3-6).
4. Locate the UV detector gain adjust pot on the photometer assembly (see Figure
8-5).
5. Perform the following procedure:
Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
GAS

SEQ

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG

CLK PASS MORE

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM FLOW VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8
Toggle these buttons to
enter the correct
PASSWORD

DIAG

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD
8

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

PRNT

EXIT

SIGNAL I/O

PREV NEXT

DIAG I/O

EXIT

1) CONTROL_IN_2=OFF

PREV NEXT JUMP
Continue pressing NEXT until...

DIAG
PREV NEXT

54) PHOTO_DET = 3342.2 MV
PRNT

EXIT

Using an insulated pot adjustment tool, Turn the UV
DETECTOR GAIN ADJUSTMENT POT until the value of
PHOTO_DET is as close as possible to 4600.0 MV.

If a minimum reading of 3500.0 mV can not be reached,
the lamp must be replaced.

Additional adjustment can be made by physically
rotating the lamp in it’s housing.
To do this, slightly loosen the UV lamp
setscrew.
Next, slowly rotate the lamp up to ¼ turn in
either direction while watching the
PHOTO_DET signal.
Once the optimum lamp position is
determined, re-tighten the lamp
setscrew

6. Replace the cover on the calibrator.

232

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Maintenance

Figure 8-5: Photometer Assembly – Lamp Adjustment / Installation

8.2.4. UV SOURCE LAMP REPLACEMENT
This procedure details the steps for replacement of the UV source lamp in the optical
bench assembly. This procedure should be done whenever the lamp can no longer be
adjusted as described in Section 8.2.3.
1. Turn the calibrator off.
2. Remove the cover from the calibrator.
3. Locate the Optical Bench Assembly (see Figure 3-6).
4. Locate the UV lamp at the front of the optical bench assembly (see Figure 8-5).
5. Unplug the lamp cable from the power supply connector on the side of the optical
bench.
6. Slightly loosen (do not remove) the UV lamp setscrew and pull the lamp from its
housing.
7. Install the new lamp in the housing, pushing it all the way in. Leave the UV lamp
setscrew loose for now.
8. Turn the calibrator back on and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes.
9. Turn the UV detector gain adjustment pot (See Figure 8-5) clockwise to its minimum
value. The pot may click softly when the limit is reached.
10. Perform the UV Lamp Adjustment procedure described in Section 8.2.3, with the
following exceptions:
a) Slowly rotate the lamp in its housing (up to ¼ turn in either direction) until a
MINIMUM value is observed.


Ensure the lamp is pushed all the way into the housing while performing this
rotation.



If the PHOTO_DET will not drop below 5000 mV while performing this
rotation, contact Teledyne API’S Customer Service for assistance.

b) Once a lamp position is found that corresponds to a minimum observed value
for PHOTO_DET, tighten the lamp setscrew at the approximate minimum value
observed.

06873B DCN6388

233

Maintenance

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

c) Adjust PHOTO_DET within the range of 4400 – 4600 mV.
11. Replace the cover on the calibrator.

CAUTION
The UV lamp contains mercury (Hg), which is considered hazardous waste. The
lamp should be disposed of in accordance with local regulations regarding
waste containing mercury.

8.2.5. OZONE GENERATOR UV LAMP ADJUSTMENT OR REPLACEMENT
This procedure details the steps for replacement and initial adjustment of the ozone
generator lamp. If you are adjusting an existing lamp, skip to Step 8.
1. Turn off the calibrator.
2. Remove the cover from the calibrator.
3. Locate the O3 generator (see Figure 3-6).
UV Lamp

Set Screws
Lamp
O-ring
O3 Generator
Body

Figure 8-6: O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations
4. Remove the two setscrews on the top of the O3 generator and gently pull out the old
lamp.
5. Inspect the o-ring beneath the nut and replace if damaged.
6. Install the new lamp in O3 generator housing.


Do not fully tighten the setscrews.



The lamp should be able to be rotated in the assembly by grasping the lamp
cable.

7. Turn on calibrator and allow it to stabilize for at least 30 minutes.
8. Locate the potentiometer used to adjust the O3 generator UV output.

234

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Maintenance

O3 Generator
Body

Adjustment
Pot
O3
Generator
Reference
Detector
PCA

Figure 8-7: Location of O3 Generator Reference Detector Adjustment Pot
9. Perform the following procedure:

06873B DCN6388

235

Maintenance

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Make sure that the T700 is
in standby mode.

STANDBY
GEN STBY SEQ

SETUP X.X
SEQ

CFG

CLK PASS MORE

EXIT

SETUP X.X
CYL

USER

EXIT

PHOT

EXIT

SETUP X.X
MODE

SETUP X.X
EXIT

Press until ...

SETUP X.X
EXIT

Slowly rotate the lamp up to a ¼ turn in either direction to
until the
displays the lowest value.

YES

Is the value of
between
and

NO
Using an insulated pot adjustment tool, turn the
the value of

until
is approximately

10. Tighten the two setscrews.
236

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Maintenance

11. Replace the calibrator’s cover.
12. Perform an auto-leak check (See Section 8.2.1).
13. Perform an Ozone Generator calibration (see Section 7.4).

06873B DCN6388

237

Maintenance

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

238

06873B DCN6388

9. TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE
This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance
problems with the calibrator.
ATTENTION
The operations outlined in this section must be performed by qualified
maintenance personnel only.
WARNING


Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with the
instrument open and running.



Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical
damage to the calibrator.



Do not drop tools into the calibrator or leave those after your procedures.



Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating
inside the calibrator.



Use common sense when operating inside a running calibrator.

9.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
The T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator has been designed so that problems can be
rapidly detected, evaluated and repaired. During operation, it continuously performs
diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its operating parameters without
disturbing monitoring operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five
steps:
1. Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary.
2. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note
any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.
3. Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic
communication channels are operating properly.

06873B DCN6388

239

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator



Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the
voltage test points on the relay PCA.



Note that the calibrator’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors
match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA.

4. Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.4.3 to confirm that the calibrator’s vital
functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay PCA, etc.).
 See Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 for general layout of components and subassemblies in the calibrator.


See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D.

9.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message
being displayed on the front panel. Table 9-1 lists warning messages, along with their
meaning and recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same
time, it is often an indication that some fundamental sub-system (power supply, relay
PCA, motherboard) has failed rather than indication of the specific failures referenced
by the warnings. In this case, it is recommended that proper operation of power supplies
(See Section 9.4.3), the relay PCA (See Section 9.4.7), and the motherboard (See
Section9.4.11) be confirmed before addressing the specific warning messages.
The T700 will alert the user that a Warning Message is active by flashing the FAULT
LED, displaying the Warning message in the Param field along with the CLR button
(press to clear Warning message). The MSG button displays if there is more than one
warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the message.
The following display/touchscreen examples provide an illustration of each:

240

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

The calibrator will also alert the user via the Serial I/O COMM port(s) and cause the
FAULT LED on the front panel to blink.
To view or clear the various warning messages press:

06873B DCN6388

241

Troubleshooting and Service

242

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

Table 9-1: Warning Messages in Front Panel Display Param Field

WARNING

FAULT CONDITION

CONFIG INITIALIZED

Configuration and
Calibration data reset to
original Factory state.

DATA INITIALIZED

Data Storage in DAS was
erased.

LAMP DRIVER WARN1, 2

The CPU is unable to
communicate with either
the O3 generator or
2
photometer lamp I C driver
chip.

MFC COMMUNICATION
WARNING

Firmware is unable to
communicate with any
MFC.

MFC PRESSURE
WARNING

One of the calibrator’s
mass flow controllers
internal gas pressure is
<15 PSIG or > 36 PSIG

O3 GEN LAMP TEMP
WARNING1

IZS Ozone Generator
Temp is outside of control
range of 48C  3C.

O3 GEN REFERENCE
WARNING1

The O3 generator’s
reference detector output
has dropped below 50 mV.1

O3 PUMP WARNING

The photometer pump
failed to turn on within the
specified timeout period
(default = 30 sec.).

PHOTO LAMP TEMP
WARNING2

The photometer lamp temp
is < 51C or >61C.

PHOTO LAMP STABILITY
WARNING

Value output during the
Photometer’s reference
cycle changes from
measurements to
measurement more than
25% of the time.

PHOTO REFERENCE
WARNING2

Occurs when Ref is
<2500 mVDC
or >4950 mVDC.

06873B DCN6388

POSSIBLE CAUSES
- Failed Disk-on-Module
- User has erased configuration data
- Failed Disk-on-Module.
- User cleared data.
- I2C has failed

I2C has failed
One of the MFCs has failed
Cabling loose or broken between MFC and Motherboard
Zero or source air supply is incorrectly set up or
improperly vented.
- Leak or blockage exists in the T700’s internal pneumatics
- Failed CAL GAS or DUILUENT pressure sensor
- No IZS option installed, instrument improperly configured
- O3 generator heater
- O3 generator temperature sensor
- Relay controlling the O3 generator heater
- Entire Relay PCA
2
- I C Bus
Possible failure of:
- O3 generator UV Lamp
- O3 generator reference detector
- O3 generator lamp power supply
2
- I C bus
- Failed Pump
- Problem with Relay PCA
- 12 VDC power supply problem
-

Possible failure of:
- Bench lamp heater
- Bench lamp temperature sensor
- Relay controlling the bench heater
- Entire Relay PCA
2
- I C Bus
- Hot Lamp
- Faulty UV source lamp
- Noisy UV detector
- Faulty UV lamp power supply
- Faulty ± 15 VDC power supply
Possible failure of:
- UV Lamp
- UV Photo-Detector Preamp

243

Troubleshooting and Service

WARNING

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

FAULT CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSES

- THIS WARNING only appears on Serial I/O COMM
Port(s) Front Panel Display will be frozen, blank or will not
REAR BOARD NOT DET
respond.
- Failure of Mother Board
- Zero or source air supply is incorrectly set up or
improperly vented.
REGULATOR PRESSURE
Regulator pressure is
- Incorrectly adjusted O3 zero air pressure regulator
WARNING
< 15 PSIG or > 25 PSIG.
- Leak or blockage exists in the T700’s internal pneumatics
- Failed O3 Generator Input pressure sensor
- I2C Bus failure
The CPU cannot
RELAY BOARD WARN
communicate with the
- Failed relay PCA
Relay PCA.
- Loose connectors/wiring
The computer has
- This message occurs at power on.
rebooted.
- If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted
SYSTEM RESET
- Failed +5 VDC power
- Fatal error caused software to restart
- Loose connector/wiring
2
- I C Bus failure
The CPU is unable to
VALVE BOARD WARN
communicate with the valve
- Failed valve driver PCA
board.
- Loose connectors/wiring
1
Only applicable for calibrators with the optional the O3 generator installed.
Mother Board not detected
on power up.

Only applicable for calibrators with the optional photometer installed.

On instrument with multiple Cal Gas MFCs installed, the MFC FLOW WARNING occurs when the flow rate requested is
<10% of the range of the lowest rated MFC (i.e. all of the cal gas MFC are turned off).

9.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS
Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the test functions viewable from the
calibrator’s front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems
when combined with a thorough understanding of the calibrators Theory of Operation
(see Section 10).
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the “Nominal Range” column
of the calibrator Final Test and Validation Data Sheet shipped with the instrument.
Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the
calibrator’s subsystems. Functions whose values are still within acceptable ranges but
have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet
may also indicate a failure.
A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the values of these
Test Functions.
Table 9-2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range.

244

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

Table 9-2: Test Functions – Indicated Failures
TEST FUNCTION
O3GENREF

DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS.
Particularly important in calibrators without the optional O3 photometer since the reference
detector is the primary input for controlling O3 concentration.

Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING from Table 9-1.
O3FLOW

Gas flow problems directly affect the concentration accuracy of the T700’s calibration gas
mixtures.

- Check for Gas Flow problems.
O3GENDRV

O3LAMPTMP

Check the O3 generator heater and temperature sensors.
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 9-1.

Incorrect Lamp temperature can affect the efficiency and durability of the O3 generators UV
lamp.
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 9-1.

CAL PRES

Possible causes of faults are the same as MFC PRESSURE WARNING from Table 9-1.
Affects proper flow rate of Diluent gas MFCs.

DIL PRES

Possible causes of faults are the same as MFC PRESSURE WARNING from Table 9-1.

REG PRES

Same as REGULATOR PRESSURE WARNING from Table 9-1.
If the Box Temperature is out of range, ensure that the:
Box Temperature typically runs ~7C warmer than ambient temperature.
- The Exhaust-Fan is running.
- Ensure there is sufficient ventilation area to the side and rear of instrument to allow
adequate ventilation.
If the value displayed is too high the UV Source has become brighter. Adjust the variable gain
potentiometer on the UV Preamp Board in the optical bench.
If the value displayed is too low:
- < 200mV – Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply.
- < 2500mV – Lamp output has dropped, adjust UV Preamp Board or replace lamp.

BOX TMP

PH MEAS

Affects proper flow rate of Cal gas MFCs.

&
2

PH REF

If the value displayed is constantly changing:
- Bad UV lamp.
- Defective UV lamp power supply.
2
- Failed I C Bus.
If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than 10mV between zero and
span gas:
- Defective/leaking switching valve.

PH FLW

Gas flow problems directly affect the accuracy of the photometer measurements and therefore
the concentration accuracy of cal gas mixtures involving O3 and GPT mixtures.

- Check for Gas Flow problems.
PH LTEMP

Poor photometer temp control can cause instrument noise, stability and drift. Temperatures
outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern.
Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 9-1.

PH PRES

The pressure of the gas in the photometer’s sample chamber is used to calculate the
concentration of O3 in the gas stream. Incorrect sample pressure can cause inaccurate
readings.
- Check for Gas Flow problems. See Section Table 9-1.

06873B DCN6388

245

Troubleshooting and Service

TEST FUNCTION

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS.
The temperature of the gas in the photometer’s sample chamber is used to calculate the
concentration of O3 in the gas stream. Incorrect sample temperature can cause inaccurate
readings.
Possible causes of faults are:

PH STEMP

PH SLOPE

PH OFFST

TIME
1
2

- Bad bench lamp heater
- Failed sample temperature sensor
- Failed relay controlling the bench heater
- Failed Relay PCA
2
- I C Bus malfunction
- Hot Lamp
Values outside range indicate:
 Contamination of the Zero Air or Span Gas supply.
 Instrument is miss-calibrated.
 Blocked Gas Flow.
 Faulty Sample Pressure Sensor or circuitry.
 Bad/incorrect Span Gas concentration.
Values outside range indicate:
 Contamination of the Zero Air supply.
Time of Day clock is too fast or slow.
 To adjust see Section 4.5.
 Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead.

Only appears when the optional O3 generator is installed.
Only appears when the optional O3 photometer is installed

9.1.3. USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION
The Signal I/O parameters found under the DIAG Menu combined with a thorough
understanding of the instrument’s Theory of Operation (found in Section 10) are useful
for troubleshooting in three ways:


The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the calibrator’s critical
inputs and outputs.



Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control
of the CPU can be manually exercised.



The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output
signals.

This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling
these signals on the operation of the calibrator. Figure 9-1 is an example of how to use
the Signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of
an output voltage or control signal. The specific parameter will vary depending on the
situation.

246

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

Figure 9-1: Example of Signal I/O Function

06873B DCN6388

247

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.2. USING THE ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL
The signals available for output over the T700’s analog output channel can also be used
as diagnostic tools. See Section 4.7 for instruction on activating the analog output and
selecting a function.
Table 9-3: Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools
TEST
CHANNEL

DESCRIPTION

The raw output of the
photometer during its
measure cycle

0 mV

5000 mV*

The raw output of the
photometer during its
reference cycle

0 mV

5000 mV

O3 GEN
REF

The raw output of the
O3 generator’s
reference detector

0 mV

5000 mV

SAMPLE
PRESSURE

The pressure of gas in
the photometer
absorption tube

0 "Hg

40 "Hg-In-A

SAMPLE
FLOW

The gas flow rate
through the photometer

0 cm /min

1000 cm /m

SAMPLE
TEMP

The temperature of gas
in the photometer
absorption tube

0 C

70 C

PHOTO
LAMP
TEMP

The temperature of the
photometer UV lamp

0 C

70 C

O3 LAMP
TEMP

The temperature of the
O3 generator’s UV
lamp

0 mV

5000 mV

CHASSIS
TEMP

The temperature inside
the T700’s chassis
(same as BOX TEMP)

0 C

70 C

248

The current
concentration of O3
being measured by the
photometer.

If the value displayed is:
- >5000 mV: The UV source has become brighter; adjust the
UV Detector Gain potentiometer.
- < 100mV – Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply.
- < 2500mV – Lamp output has dropped, adjust UV Preamp
Board or replace lamp.
If the value displayed is constantly changing:
- Bad UV lamp.
- Defective UV lamp power supply.
2
- Failed I C Bus.

O3 PHOTO
REF

O3 PHOTO
CONC

CAUSES OF EXTREMELY
HIGH / LOW READINGS

TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF

NONE

O3 PHOTO
MEAS

FULL
SCALE

ZERO

---

If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than
10mV between zero and span gas:
- Defective/leaking M/R switching valve.
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN REFERENCE
WARNING from Table 9-1.
Check for Gas Flow problems.
Check for Gas Flow problems.
Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO STEMP from
Table 9-2.
Possible failure of:
- Bench lamp heater
- Bench lamp temperature sensor
- Relay controlling the bench heater
- Entire Relay PCA
2
- I C Bus
- Hot Lamp
Same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 9-1.
Possible causes of faults are the same as BOX TEMP from Table
9-2.
-

I C Bus malfunction
Gas flow problem through the photometer.
Electronic failure of the photometer subsystems.
Failure or pressure / temperature sensors associated with the
photometer.
Bad/incorrect Span Gas concentration.
Contamination of the Zero Air supply.
Malfunction of the O3 generator.
Internal A/D converter problem.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.3. USING THE INTERNAL ELECTRONIC STATUS LEDS
Several LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the calibrators
CPU, I2C bus and Relay PCA are functioning properly.

9.3.1. CPU STATUS INDICATOR
DS5, a red LED, that is located on upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of
the CPU board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program loop. After powerup, approximately 30 – 60 seconds, DS5 should flash on and off. If DS5 does not flash
then the program files may have become corrupted; contact customer service because it
may be possible to recover operation of the calibrator. If after 30 – 60 seconds, DS5 is
flashing. then the CPU is bad and must be replaced.

Motherboard

CPU Status LED

Figure 9-2: CPU Status Indicator

9.3.2. RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS
There are seven LEDs located on the Relay PCA. Some are not used on this model.

9.3.2.1. I2C Bus Watchdog Status LEDs
The most important is D1, which indicates the health of the I2C bus).
Table 9-4: Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications
LED

Function

Fault Status

Indicated Failure(s)

D1
(Red)

I2C bus Health
(Watchdog Circuit)

Continuously ON
or
Continuously OFF

Failed/Halted CPU
Faulty Mother Board, Valve Driver board or Relay PCA
Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Mother Board, Valve
Driver board or Relay PCA
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)

If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG Menu Signal I/O to identify hardware
failures of the relays and switches on the Relay.

06873B DCN6388

249

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.3.2.2. O3 Option Status LEDs
D9 (Green) – Photometer Pump Status
D8 (Green) O3 Generator Valve Status
D7 (Green) – Photometer Meas/Ref Valve

D6 (Green ) – GPT Valve
D15 (Yellow) - Photometer Lamp Heater
D16 (Yellow) – O3 Generator Lamp Heater
D1 (RED)
Watchdog
Indicator

Figure 9-3: Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting

Table 9-5: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications
LED

FUNCTION

D71
Green

SIGNAL I/O PARAMETER
ACTIVATED BY

VIEW RESULT

Photometer
Meas/Ref
Valve

PHOTO_REF_VALVE

N/A

D82
Green

O3 Generator
Valve Status

O3_GEN_VALVE

N/A

D91
Green

Photometer
Pump Status

O3-PUMP-ON

N/A

D61,2
Yellow

GPT Valve
Status

GPT_VALVE

N/A

D15
Yellow

Photometer
Heater Status

PHOTO_LAMP_HEATER

PHOTO_LAMP_TEMP

D162
Green

O3 Generator
Heater Status

O3_GEN_HEATER

O3_GEN_TEMP

Only applies on calibrators with photometer options installed.

Only applies on calibrators with O3 generator options installed.

250

DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE

Valve should audibly change states.
If not:
 Failed Valve
 Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay PCA
 Failed Relay PCA
 Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
 Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Voltage displayed should change.
If not:
 Failed Heater
 Faulty Temperature Sensor
 Failed AC Relay
 Faulty Connectors/Wiring

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.3.3. VALVE DRIVER PCA STATUS LEDS
The Signal I/O submenu also includes VARS that can be used to turn the various input
gas valves on and off as part of a diagnostic investigation.
WATCHDOG INDICATOR

CAL GAS
VALVE 1

PURGE
VALVE

CAL GAS
VALVE 2

DILUENT
VALVE

CAL GAS
VALVE 3
CAL GAS
VALVE 4

Figure 9-4: Valve Driver PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting

Table 9-6: Valve Driver Board Watchdog LED Failure Indications
LED

Function

Fault Status

Indicated Failure(s)
 Failed/Halted CPU

D1
(Red)

I2C bus Health
(Watchdog Circuit)

Continuously ON
or
Continuously OFF

 Faulty Mother Board, Valve Driver board or Relay
PCA
 Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Mother Board,
Valve Driver board or Relay PCA
 Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)

Table 9-7: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications
LED

FUNCTION

ACTIVATED BY SIGNAL
I/O PARAMETER

Cal Gas CYL1

CYL_VALVE_1

Cal Gas CYL2

CYL_VALVE_2

Cal Gas CYL3

CYL_VALVE_3

 Failed Valve

Cal Gas CYL4

CYL_VALVE_4

 Failed Valve Driver IC on Relay PCA

Purge Valve
Status

PURGE_VALVE

 Failed Valve Driver Board

D10

Diluent Valve
Status

INPUT_VALVE

06873B DCN6388

DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE
Valve should audibly change states and
LED should glow.
If not:

 Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
 Faulty Connectors/Wiring

251

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.4. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT
The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying
possible sources of failures or performance problems within the T700 calibrator. In
most cases, this included a list of possible components or subsystems that might be the
source of the problem. This section describes how to check individual components or
subsystems to determine if which is actually the cause of the problem being investigated.

9.4.1. VERIFY SUBSYSTEM CALIBRATION
A good first step when troubleshooting the operation of the T700 calibrator is to verify
that its major subsystems are properly calibrated. These are:


The mass flow controllers (see Section 7.2).



Test Channel D  A conversion (see Sections 4.10.1.7, 9.4.11.1, and 10.3.5.1).



Gas pressure calibration (see Section 7.5).

When optional O3 components are installed, you should also check:


Photometer calibration (see Section 7.3).



O3 generator calibration (see Section 7.4).

9.4.2. AC MAIN POWER
The T700 calibrator’s electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power
regimes. As long as system is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50
or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display.


Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and CPU should
turn on as soon as the power is supplied.



If they do not, check the circuit breaker built into the ON/OFF switch on the
instruments front panel.
WARNING

SHOULD THE AC POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP, INVESTIGATE AND CORRECT
THE CONDITION CAUSING THIS SITUATION BEFORE TURNING THE
CALIBRATOR BACK ON.

252

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.4.3. DC POWER SUPPLY
If you have determined that the calibrator’s AC mains power is working, but the unit is
still not operating properly, there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s
switching power supplies. The supplies can have two faults, namely no DC output, and
noisy output.
To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various
printed circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on
the relay PCA follow a standard color-coding scheme as defined in Figure 9-5 and Table
9-8.

TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7
DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12R 12V

Figure 9-5: Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA
Table 9-8: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes

06873B DCN6388

NAME

TEST POINT#

TP AND WIRE COLOR

Dgnd

Black

+5V

Red

Agnd

Green

+15V

Blue

-15V

Yellow

+12R

Purple

+12V

Orange

253

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in
Table 9-9, and an oscilloscope, in AC mode, with band limiting turned on, can be used
to evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise (> 100 mV p-p).
Table 9-9: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels
CHECK RELAY PCA TEST POINTS

POWER
SUPPLY
ASSY

VOLTAGE

PS1
PS1

FROM TEST POINT

TO TEST POINT

MIN V

MAX V

NAME

Dgnd

4.8

5.25

+15

Agnd

+15

13.5

16V

PS1

-15

Agnd

-15V

-14V

-16V

PS1

Agnd

Dgnd

-0.05

0.05

PS1

Chassis

Dgnd

Chassis

N/A

-0.05

0.05

PS2

+12

+12V Ret

+12V

11.75

12.5

PS2

Dgnd

+12V Ret

Dgnd

-0.05

0.05

9.4.4. I2C BUS
Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay
PCA & D2 on the Valve Driver PCA. Assuming that the DC power supplies are
operating properly, the I2C bus is operating properly if D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of
the Valve Driver PCA are flashing
There is a problem with the I2C bus if both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve
Driver PCA are ON/OFF constantly.

9.4.5. TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE
Verify the functioning of the touch screen by observing the display when pressing a
touch-screen control button. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the
DC power supplies are operating properly, but pressing a control button on the touch
screen does not change the display, any of the following may be the problem:


The touch-screen controller may be malfunctioning.



The internal USB bus may be malfunctioning.

You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal
program. If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes
accordingly, the touch-screen interface may be faulty.

254

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.4.6. LCD DISPLAY MODULE
Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied
to the instrument. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power
supplies are operating properly, the display screen should light and show the splash
screen and other indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization
process.

9.4.7. RELAY PCA
The Relay PCA can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the status
LEDs on the Relay PCA (see Section 9.3.2), and using the SIGNAL I/O submenu under
the DIAG menu (see Section 4.10) to toggle each LED ON or OFF.
If D1 on the Relay PCA is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question
(Heater power, Valve Drive, etc.) toggles properly using the Signal I/O function, then
the associated control device on the Relay PCA is bad. Several of the control devices
are in sockets and can be easily replaced. Table 9-10 lists the control device associated
with a particular function.
Table 9-10: Relay PCA Control Devices
FUNCTION

CONTROL
DEVICE

IN SOCKET

UV Lamp Heater

O3 Gen Heater

All Valves

Yes

9.4.8. VALVE DRIVER PCA
Like the Relay PCA the valve driver PCA is checked by observing the condition of the
its status LEDs on the Relay Board (see Section 9.3.2), and using the SIGNAL I/O
submenu under the DIAG menu (see Section 9.1.3) to toggle each LED ON or OFF.
If D2 on the valve driver board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in
question (Gas Cyl 1, Purge Valve, etc.) toggles properly using the Signal I/O function,
then the control IC is bad.

06873B DCN6388

255

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.4.9. INPUT GAS PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY
The input gas pressure/flow sensor PCA, located at the front of the instrument to the left
of the MFCs (see Figure 3-6) can be checked with a Voltmeter. The following
procedure assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard as well as the
power supplies is operating properly:
BASIC PCA OPERATION:


Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If not, then the
board is bad

CAL GAS PRESSURE SENSOR:
1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1.


The expected value for this signal should be:

EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 25 PSIG, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 3470 mVDC and 4245 mVDC.
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 30 PSIG, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 4030 mVDC and 4930 mVDC.


If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the
board is bad, or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer
from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly.

DILUENT PRESSURE SENSOR:
1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP5 and TP1.


256

Evaluate the reading in the same manner as for the cal gas pressure sensor.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.4.10. PHOTOMETER O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE/FLOW SENSOR
ASSEMBLY
This assembly is only present in calibrators with O3 generator and/or photometer options
installed. The pressure/flow sensor PCA, located at the rear of the instrument between
the O3 generator and the photometer pump (see Figure 3-6) can be checked with a
Voltmeter. The following procedure assumes that the wiring is intact and that the
motherboard as well as the power supplies are operating properly:
BASIC PCA OPERATION


Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If not then the
board is bad



Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP1 C1 it should be 1o VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If
not then the board is bad.

PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1.


The expected value for this signal should be:

EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 20 In-Hg-A, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 2870 mVDC and 3510 mVDC.
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 25 In-Hg-A, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 3533 mVDC and 4318 mVDC.


If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the
board is bad or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer
from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly.

O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE SENSOR
1. sure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter.
2. sure the voltage across TP5 and TP1.
 Evaluate the reading in the same manner as for the cal gas pressure sensor
(see Section 9.4.9).
PHOTOMETER FLOW SENSOR


06873B DCN6388

Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1.


With proper flow (800 cm3/min through the photometer), this should be
approximately 4.5V (this voltage will vary with altitude).



With flow stopped (photometer inlet disconnected or pump turned OFF) the
voltage should be approximately 1V.



If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor S3 is bad, the board is bad or there is
a leak upstream of the sensor.
257

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.4.11. MOTHERBOARD
9.4.11.1. A/D Functions
The simplest method to check the operation of the A-to-D converter on the motherboard
is to use the Signal I/O function under the DIAG menu to check the two A/D reference
voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter.
1. Use the Signal I/O function (See Section 9.1.3 and Appendix A) to view the value of
REF_4096_MV and REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of nominal (4096 and 0),
and are stable, ±0.5 mV then the basic A/D is functioning properly. If not then the
motherboard is bad.
2. Choose a parameter in the Signal I/O function such as Dil_PRess, MFC_FLOW_1
or SAMPLE_FLOW.


Compare these voltages at their origin (see the interconnect drawing and
interconnect list in Appendix D) with the voltage displayed through the signal I/O
function.



If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and
displayed voltage (±10 mV) then the motherboard is bad.

9.4.11.2. Test Channel / Analog Outputs Voltage
To verify that the analog output is working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output in
question and perform an analog output step test as follows:

258

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

For each of the steps the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the
table below except for the 0% step, which should be within 0mV ±2 to 3 mV. Ensure
you take into account any offset that may have been programmed into channel (See
Section 4.10.1.5).
Table 9-11: Analog Output Test Function – Nominal Values Voltage Outputs
FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE
(see Section 4.10.1.3)

100MV

10V

STEP

NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE

20 mV

0.2

40 mV

0.4

60 mV

0.6

80 mV

0.8

100

100 mV

1.0

If one or more of the steps fails to be within these ranges, it is likely that there has been
a failure of the either or both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the
motherboard.

06873B DCN6388

259

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.4.11.3. Status Outputs
To test the status output electronics:
1. Connect a jumper between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output
connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output
that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see
table below).
4. Under the DIAG Signal I/O menu (See Section9.1.3), scroll through the inputs and
outputs until you get to the output in question.
5. Alternatively, turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter.


It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.

Table 9-12: Status Outputs Check

260

PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT)

STATUS

ST_SYSTEM_OK

SPARE

ST_CAL_ACTIVE

ST_DIAG_MODE

ST_TEMP_ALARM

ST_PRESS_ALARM

PERM_VALVE_1

PERM_VALVE_2

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.4.11.4. Control Inputs
Table 9-13: T700 Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions
CONNECTOR

INPUT

CORRESPONDING I/O SIGNAL

Top

CONTROL_IN_1

Top

CONTROL_IN_2

Top

CONTROL_IN_3

Top

CONTROL_IN_4

Top

CONTROL_IN_5

Top

CONTROL_IN_6

Bottom

CONTROL_IN_7

Bottom

CONTROL_IN_8

Bottom

CONTROL_IN_9

Bottom

CONTROL_IN_10

Bottom

CONTROL_IN_11

Bottom

CONTROL_IN_12

The control input bits can be tested by applying a trigger voltage to an input and
watching changes in the status of the associated function under the SIGNAL I/O
submenu:
EXAMPLE: to test the “A” control input:
1. Under the DIAG Signal I/O menu (See Section 9.1.3), scroll through the inputs
and outputs until you get to the output named 0) CONTROL_IN_1.
2. Connect a jumper from the “+” pin on the appropriate connector to the “U” on the
same connector.
3. Connect a second jumper from the “” pin on the connector to the “A” pin.
4. The status of 0) CONTROL_IN_1 should change to read “ON”.

9.4.11.5. Control Outputs
To test the Control Output electronics:
1. Connect a jumper between the “E“ pin and the “” pin on the status output
connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output
that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see
Table 9-14).
4. Under the DIAG Signal I/O menu (See Section 9.1.3), scroll through the inputs
and outputs until you get to the output in question.
5. Alternately, turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter.


06873B DCN6388

It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.

261

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Table 9-14: Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions Check
PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT)

STATUS

CONTROL_OUT_1

CONTROL_OUT_2

CONTROL_OUT_3

CONTROL_OUT_4

CONTROL_OUT_5

CONTROL_OUT_6

CONTROL_OUT_7

CONTROL_OUT_8

CONTROL_OUT_9

CONTROL_OUT_10

CONTROL_OUT_11

CONTROL_OUT_12

9.4.12. CPU
There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure
associated with the Disk On Module (DOM). If either of these failures occurs, contact
the factory.
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the
wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on, the watchdog LED on the
motherboard is not flashing.
In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard,
specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If
this is true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the
measurements will be invalid.
If the analyzer stops during initialization (the front panel display shows a fault or
warning message), it is likely that the DOM, the firmware or the configuration and data
files have been corrupted.

9.4.13. THE CALIBRATOR DOESN’T APPEAR ON THE LAN OR INTERNET
Most problems related to Internet communications via the Ethernet card will be due to
problems external to the calibrator (e.g. bad network wiring or connections, failed
routers, malfunctioning servers, etc.) However, there are several symptoms that indicate
the problem may be with the Ethernet card itself.
If neither of the Ethernet cable’s two status LED’s (located on the back of the cable
connector) is lit while the instrument is connected to a network:

262



Verify that the instrument is being connected to an active network jack.



Check the internal cable connection between the Ethernet card and the CPU board.
06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.4.14. RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4.14.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting
Teledyne API calibrators use the RS-232 communications protocol to allow the
instrument to be connected to a variety of computer-based equipment. RS-232 has been
used for many years and as equipment has become more advanced, connections between
various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult. Generally, every
manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully.
Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around 4 general areas:


Incorrect cabling and connectors. See Section 3.3.1.7 for connector and pin-out
information.



The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured. See Section 5.2.



If a modem is being used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be
observed. See Section 6.3.



Incorrect setting of the DTE-DCE Switch is set correctly. See Section 5.1.



Verify that the cable (P/N 03596) that connects the serial COMM ports of the CPU
to J12 of the motherboard is properly seated.

9.4.14.2. Troubleshooting Calibrator/Modem or Terminal Operation
These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a
Teledyne API calibrator.
1. Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.
2. Check to ensure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position as described in Section 5.1.
3. Check to ensure the set up command is correct. See Section 6.2.
4. Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The T700 sets pin 7
(RTS) to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission.
5. Ensure the BAUD rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and
calibrator match. See Section 5.2.1.
6. Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or
computer. See Section 5.2.3.
7. Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the calibrator (holding
down the space bar is one way); the green LED should flicker as the instrument is
receiving data.
8. Ensure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is
functioning properly.

Note

06873B DCN6388

Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual
“RS-232 Programming Notes” Teledyne API’s P/N 013500000.

263

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.4.15. TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS
Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the Photometer UV Lamp
(optional), and the Ozone Generator Lamp (optional). If any of these temperatures are
out of range or are poorly controlled, the T700 will perform poorly.

9.4.15.1. Box / Chassis Temperature
The box temperature sensor is mounted to the Motherboard and cannot be disconnected
to check its resistance. Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I/O
function under the DIAG Menu (see Section 9.1.3). This parameter will vary with
ambient temperature, but at ~30oC (6-7 above room temperature) the signal should be
~1450 mV.

9.4.15.2. Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature
The temperature of the gas in the photometer sample chamber should read
approximately 5.0C higher than the box temperature.

9.4.15.3. UV Lamp Temperature
There are three possible causes for the UV Lamp temperature to have failed.


The UV Lamp heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the
six-pin connector adjacent to the UV Lamp on the Optical Bench.




264

It should be approximately 30 Ohms.

Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay
board, the FET Driver on the Relay Board may have failed.


Using the PHOTO_LAMP HEATER parameter under the Signal I/O function of
the Diag menu, as described above, turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater (D15
on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is turned on).



Check the DC voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J13 of the Relay Board.



If the FET Driver has failed, there will be no change in the voltage across pins 1
and 2.

If the FET Driver Q2 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp
assembly may have failed.


Unplug the connector to the UV Lamp Heater/Thermistor PCB, and measure
the resistance of the thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6-pin connector.



The resistance near the 58oC set point is ~8.1k ohms.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.4.15.4. Ozone Generator Temperature
There are three possible causes for the Ozone Generator temperature to have failed.


The O3 Gen heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the
six-pin connector adjacent to the UV Lamp on the O3 Generator. It should be
approximately 5 Ohms.



Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay
board, the FET Driver on the Relay Board may have failed. Using the
O3_GEN_HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL I/O submenu of the DIAG menu
as described above, turn the UV Lamp Heater on and off. Check the DC voltage
present between pin 1 and 2 on J14 of the Relay Board.
If the FET Driver has failed, there should be no change in the voltage across pins 1
and 2.



If the FET Driver checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp
assembly may have failed. Unplug the connector to the Ozone Generator
Heater/Thermistor PCB, and measure the resistance of the thermistor between pins
5 and 6 of the 6-pin connector.

9.5. TROUBLESHOOTING THE OPTIONAL O3 PHOTOMETER
9.5.1. DYNAMIC PROBLEMS WITH THE OPTIONAL O3 PHOTOMETER
Dynamic problems are problems that only manifest themselves when the photometer is
measuring O3 concentration gas mixtures. These can be the most difficult and time
consuming to isolate and resolve.
Since many photometer behaviors that appear to be a dynamic in nature are often a
symptom of a seemingly unrelated static problems, it is recommended that dynamic
problems not be addressed until all static problems, warning conditions and subsystems
have been checked and any problems found are resolved.
Once this has been accomplished, the following most common dynamic problems
should be checked.

9.5.1.1. Noisy or Unstable O3 Readings at Zero

06873B DCN6388



Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 8.2.1.



Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone.



Confirm that the Source Lamp is fully inserted and that the lamp hold-down thumbscrew is tight.



Check for a dirty Absorption Cell and/or pneumatic lines. Clean as necessary as
described in Section 8.2.2.



Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench (the pneumatic line at the lamp
end of the bench) and plug the port in the bench. If readings remain noisy, the
problem is in one of the electronic sections of the instrument. If readings become
quiet, the problem is in the instrument's pneumatics.
265

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.5.1.2. Noisy, Unstable, or Non-Linear Span O3 Readings


Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 8.2.1.



Check for proper operation of the meas/ref switching valve as described in Section
9.5.2.



Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in
Section 8.2.2.



Check for operation of the A/D circuitry on the motherboard. See Section 9.4.11.1.



Confirm the Sample Temperature, Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are
correct. Check and adjust as required.

9.5.1.3. Slow Response to Changes in Concentration


Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in
Section 8.2.2.



Check for pneumatic leaks as described in Section 8.2.1.



The photometer needs 800 cm3/min of gas flow. Ensure that this is accounted for
when calculating total required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.9).

9.5.1.4. The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings


Confirm that the recorder offset (see Section 4.10.1.5) is set to zero.



Perform an AIO calibration (see Section 4.10.1.6) and photometer dark calibration
(see Section 7.3.5).

9.5.1.5. Cannot Zero


Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 8.2.1.



Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone.



The photometer needs 800 cm3/min of gas flow. Ensure that this is accounted for
when calculating total required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.9).

9.5.1.6. Cannot Span

266



Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 8.2.1.



Check for proper operation of the meas/ref switching valve as described in
Section9.5.2.



Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in
Section 8.2.2.



Check for operation of the A/D circuitry on the motherboard. See Section 9.4.11.1.



Confirm the Sample Temperature, Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are
correct. Check and adjust as required.



The photometer needs 800 cm3/min of gas flow. Ensure that this is accounted for
when calculating total required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.9).

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.5.2. CHECKING MEASURE / REFERENCE VALVE
1. To check the function of the photometer’s measure / reference valve:
2. Set the calibrator’s front panel display to show the PHOTO REFERENCE test
function (see Section 4.1.1).
3. Follow the instruction in Sections 7.3.3 and 7.3.4.1 for performing a zero point
calibration of the photometer.


Press XZro and allow the calibrator to stabilize.

4. Before completing the calibration by pressing the ZERO button, note of the
displayed value.
5. Press the final Zero button then press “NO” when asked, “ARE YOU SURE”.
6. Follow the instruction in Sections 7.3.4.2 for performing a span point calibration of
the photometer.


Press XSPN and allow the calibrator to stabilize.

7. Before completing the calibration by pressing the SPAN button, note of the
displayed value of PHOTO REFERENCE.


If the O3 REF value has decreased by more than 2 mV from its value with Zerogas, then there is a "cross-port" leak in the M/R valve.

8. Press the final Zero button then press “NO” when asked, “ARE YOU SURE”.

06873B DCN6388

267

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.5.3. CHECKING THE UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY
Note

A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be
found in Appendix D.

WARNING
Hazardous voltage present - use caution.

It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of
the UV Lamp or the Lamp Power Supply. However, the following steps will provide a
reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power Supply.
1. Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that
+15VDC is present between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector.
2. If this voltage is incorrect, check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described
in Section 9.4.3.
3. Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following
voltages on the UV lamp power supply PCA (see Figure 10-20):

268



+4500 mVDC ±10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 (grnd)



If this voltage is incorrect, either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the
I2C bus is not communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA.



+5VDC between TP3 and TP4 (grnd)



If this voltages is less than 4.8 or greater than 5.25 either the 5 VDC power
supply or the UV lamp power supply PCA are faulty.



If the above voltages check out, it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV
Lamp than due to the Lamp Power Supply.



Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists, replace the Lamp Power Supply.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

9.6. TROUBLESHOOTING THE OPTIONAL O3 GENERATOR
The only significant components of the O3 generator that might reasonable malfunction
is the power supply assembly for the UV source lamp and the lamp itself.

9.6.1. CHECKING THE UV SOURCE LAMP POWER SUPPLY
Note

Appendix D includes a schematic of the Lamp Power Supply.

WARNING
Hazardous voltage present - use caution.

It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of
the UV Lamp or the Lamp Power Supply, however, the following steps will provide a
reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power Supply.
1. Ensure that the calibrator is in STANDBY mode.
2. Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that
+15VDC is present between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector.
3. If this voltage is incorrect, check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described
in Section 9.4.3.
4. Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following
voltages on the UV lamp power supply PCA (see Figure 10-20):

06873B DCN6388



+800 mVDC ±10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 (grnd)



If this voltage is incorrect, either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the
I2C bus is not communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA.



+5VDC between TP3 and TP4 (grnd)



If this voltages is less than 4.8 or greater than 5.25 either the 5 VDC power
supply or the UV lamp power supply PCA are faulty.



If the above voltages check out, it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV
Lamp than due to the Lamp Power Supply.



Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists, replace the Lamp Power Supply.

269

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

9.7. SERVICE PROCEDURES
9.7.1. DISK-ON-MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Replacing the Disk-on-Module (DOM) will cause loss of all DAS data; it may also
cause some of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost unless the replacement
DOM carries the exact same firmware version. Whenever changing the version of
installed software, the memory must be reset. Failure to ensure that memory is reset can
cause the analyzer to malfunction, and invalidate measurements. After the memory is
reset, the A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in Step 1
below must be re-entered before the instrument will function correctly. Also, zero and
span calibration should be performed.
1. Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as range,
auto-cal, analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM
2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the
mounting screws.
3. When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the
Disk-on-Module in the right-most socket of the CPU board.
4. The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision, date and initials of the
programmer.
5. Remove the nylon standoff clip that mounts the DOM over the CPU board, and lift
the DOM off the CPU. Do not bend the connector pins.
6. Install the new Disk-on-Module, making sure the notch at the end of the chip
matches the notch in the socket.
7. It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket.
Press the DOM all the way in and reinsert the offset clip.
8. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.
9. If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision, re-enter all of the setup
information.

9.8. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
If this manual and its service & repair section do not solve your problems, technical
assistance may be obtained from:
TELEDYNE API, CUSTOMER SERVICE,
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA 92121-5201
USA
Toll-free Phone:
Phone:
Fax:
Email:
Website:

270

800-324-5190
858-657-9800
858-657-9816
api-customerservice@teledyne.com
http://www.teledyne-api.com/

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Troubleshooting and Service

Before you contact customer service, fill out the problem report form in Appendix C,
which is also available online for electronic submission at http://www.teledyneapi.com/forms/.

9.9. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQs)
The following list of FAQs is from the Teledyne API’s Customer Service Department’s
most commonly asked questions relating to the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator.
Question
My ozone ACT =XXXX why?

When I generate ozone, it takes a
long time to settle out or it
fluctuates around the number until
finally stabilizing.

Answer
Look at the Photo Ref/Meas. These are most likely too low and need to
be adjusted up to 4500mV. Another possible cause would be no gas
flow to the photometer causing the O3 reading to be out of range - low
Perform an O3 Gen Adjust (Section 8.2.5), and then an O3 Gen
Calibration (Section 7.4). Re-run points.

Why does the ENTR button
sometimes disappear on the front
panel display?
How do I make the RS-232
Interface Work?

Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR button will
re-appear.

When should I change the
sintered filter(s) in the calibrator’s
critical flow orifice(s) and how do I
change them?
How often should I rebuild the
photometer pump on my
calibrator?

The sintered filters do not require regular replacement. Should one
require replacement as part of a troubleshooting or repair exercise,
contact Customer Service.

How long do the UV lamps of the
optional O3 generator and
photometer last?

The typical lifetime is about 2-3 years.

06873B DCN6388

See Sections 3.3.1.7, 5, and 9.4.14

It does not require rebuilding; the entire pump should be replaced every
two years.

271

Troubleshooting and Service

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This page intentionally left blank.

272

06873B DCN6388

10. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
10.1. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMIC DILUTION
CALIBRATION
The T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator generates calibration gas mixtures by mixing
bottled source gases of known concentrations with a diluent gas (zero air). Using
several Mass Flow Controllers (MFCs) the T700 calibrator creates exact ratios of diluent
and source gas by controlling the relative rates of flow of the various gases, under
conditions where the temperature and pressure of the gases being mixed is known (and
therefore the density of the gases).
The CPU calculates both the required source gas and diluent gas flow rates and controls
the corresponding mass flow controllers by the following equation.
Equation 10-1

Cf = Ci ×

GASflow
Totalflow

WHERE:

Cf = final concentration of diluted gas
Ci = source gas concentration
GASflow = source gas flow rate
Totalflow = the total gas flow through the calibrator
Totalflow is determined as:
Equation 10-2a

TOTALFLOW = GASflow + Diluentflow
WHERE:
GASflow = source gas flow rate
Diluentflow = zero air flow rate

For instrument with multiple source gas MFC total Flow is:
Equation 10-2b

TOTALFLOW = GASflow MFC1 + GASflow MFC2 …+ GASflow MFCn + Diluentflow rate
06873B DCN6388

273

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

This dilution process is dynamic. The T700’s CPU not only keeps track of the
temperature and pressure of the various gases, but also receives data on actual flow rates
of the various MFCs in real time so the flow rate control can be constantly adjusted to
maintain a stable output concentration.
The T700 calibrator’s level of control is so precise that bottles of mixed gases can be
used as source gas. Once the exact concentrations of all of the gases in the bottle are
programmed into the T700, it will create an exact output concentration of any of the
gases in the bottle.

274

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.1.1. GAS PHASE TITRATION MIXTURES FOR O3 AND NO2
Because ozone is a very reactive and therefore under normal ambient conditions a shortlived gas, it cannot be reliably bottled, however, an optional O3 generator can be
included in the T700 calibrator that allows the instrument to be use to create calibration
mixtures that include O3.
This ability to generate O3 internally also allows the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator
to be used to create calibration mixture containing NO2 using a gas phase titration
process (GPT) by precisely mixing bottled NO of a known concentration with O3 of a
known n concentration and diluent gas (zero air).
The principle of GPT is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O3 that
produces quantities of NO2 as according to the following equation:
Equation 10-3

NO  O3 
 NO2  O2  h ( light )
Under controlled circumstances, the NO-O3 reaction is very efficient (<1% residual O3),
therefore the concentration of NO2 resulting from the mixing of NO and O3 can be
accurately predicted and controlled as long as the following conditions are met:


The amount of O3 used in the mixture is known.



The amount of NO used in the mixture is AT LEAST 10% greater than the amount
O3 in the mixture.



The volume of the mixing chamber is known.



The NO and O3 flow rates (from which the time the two gases are in the mixing
chamber) are low enough to give a residence time of the reactants in the mixing
chamber of >2.75 ppm min.

Given the above conditions, the amount of NO2 being output by the T700 will be equal
to (at a 1:1 ratio) the amount of O3 added.
Since:


The O3 flow rate of the T700’s O3 generator is a fixed value (typically about 0.105
LPM);



The GPT chamber’s volume is known,



The source concentration of NO is a fixed value,

Once the TOTALFLOW is determined and entered into the T700’s memory and target
concentration for the O3 generator are entered into the calibrator’s software, the T700
adjusts the NO flow rate and diluent (zero air) flow rate to precisely create the
appropriate NO2 concentration at the output.

06873B DCN6388

275

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

In this case, Totalflow is calculated as:
Equation 10-4

DILflow = Totalflow- NO GASflow - O3flow
WHERE:
NOGASflow = NO source gas flow rate (For calibrator’s with multiple source gas
MFC, NOGASflow is the sum of the flow rate for all of the active cal
gas MFCs)
Totalflow = total gas flow requirements of the system.
O3 flow = the flow rate set for the O3 generator.
DILflow = required diluent gas flow

Again, this is a dynamic process. An optional photometer can be added the T700
calibrator that allows the CPU to tracks the chemiluminescent reaction created when the
NO and O3 interact to measure the decrease in NO concentration as NO2 is produced.
This information, along with the other data (gas temperature and pressure, actual flow
rates, etc.) is used by the CPU to establish a very accurate NO2 calibration mixture.

10.2. PNEUMATIC OPERATION
The T700 calibrator pneumatic system consists of the precision dilution system and
valve manifold consisting of four gas port valves and one diluent air valve. When
bottles of source gas containing different, gases are connected to the four source-gas
inlet-ports, these valves are used to select the gas type to be used by opening and closing
off gas flow from the various bottles upstream of the MFCs.

IMPORTANT

IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Exceeding 35 PSI may cause leakage that could cause unwanted gases to
be included in the calibration mixture. Each valve is rated for up to 40 PSI
zero air pressure and the source gas pressure should be between 25 to 30
PSI and never more than 35 PSI.

By closing all of the four source gas input valves so that only zero air is allowed into the
calibrator, the entire pneumatic system can be purges with zero air without having to
manipulate the MFCs.
For an instrument in which the O3 generator and GPT pneumatics are installed, a glass
volume, carefully selected per the U.S. E.P.A. guidelines is used to optimize NO2
creation.
See Figure 3-21 and Section 3.3.2 for descriptions of the internal pneumatics for the
T700 calibrator.

276

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.2.1. GAS FLOW CONTROL
The precision of gas flow through the T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is centrally
critical to its ability to mix calibration gases accurately. This control is established in
several ways.

10.2.1.1. Diluent and Source Gas Flow Control
Diluent and source gas flow in the T700 calibrator is a directly and dynamically
controlled buy using highly accurate Mass Flow Controller. These MFCs include
internal sensors that determine the actual flow of gas though each and feedback control
circuitry that uses this data to adjust the flow as required. The MFCs consist of a shunt,
a sensor, a solenoid valve and the electronic circuitry required to operate them.
The shunt divides the gas flow such that the flow through the sensor is a precise
percentage of the flow through the valve. The flow through the sensor is always
laminar.
The MFCs internal sensor operates on a unique thermal-electric principle. A metallic
capillary tube is heated uniformly by a resistance winding attached to the midpoint of
the capillary. Thermocouples are welded at equal distances from the midpoint of the
tube. At zero air flow the temperature of both thermocouples will be the same. When
flow occurs through the tubing, heat is transferred from the tube to the gas on the inlet
side and from the gas back to the tube on the outlet side creating an asymmetrical
temperature distribution. The thermocouples sense this decrease and increase of
temperature in the capillary tube and produces a mVDC output signal proportional to
that change that is proportional to the rate of flow through the MFCs valve.
The electronic circuitry reads the signal output by the thermal flow sensor measured
through a capillary tube. This signal is amplified so that it is varies between 0.00 VDC
and 5.00 VDC. A separate 0 to 5 VDC command voltage is also generated that is
proportional to the target flow rate requested by the T700’s CPU. The 0-5VDC
command signal is electronically subtracted from the 0-5VDC flow signal. The amount
and direction of the movement is dependent upon the value and the sign of the
differential signal.
The MFCs valve is an automatic metering solenoid type; its height off the seat is
controlled by the voltage in its coil. The controller’s circuitry amplifies and the
differential signal obtained by comparing the control voltage to the flow sensor output
and uses it to drive the solenoid valve.
The entire control loop is set up so that as solenoid valve opens and closes to vary the
flow of gas through the shunt, valve and sensor in an attempt to minimize the differential
between the control voltage for the target flow rate and the flow sensor output voltage
generated by the actual flow rate of gas through the controller.
This process is heavily dependant on the capacity of the gas to heat and cool. Since the
heat capacity of many gases is relatively constant over wide ranges of temperature and
pressure, the flow meter is calibrated directly in molar mass units for known gases (see
Section 3.4.6.3). Changes in gas composition usually only require application of a
simple multiplier to the air calibration to account for the difference in heat capacity and
thus the flow meter is capable of measuring a wide variety of gases.

06873B DCN6388

277

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.2.1.2. Flow Control Assemblies for Optional O3 Components
Whereas the gas flow rates for the final mixing of gases is controlled directly by the
calibrator’s MFCS, under direction of the CPU, other gas flow rates in the calibrator are
set by various flow control assemblies located in the gas stream(s). These orifices are
not adjusted but maintain precise volumetric control as long as the a critical pressure
ratio is maintained between the upstream and the downstream orifice.

Figure 10-1: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T700’s with O3 Options Installed

The flow orifice assemblies consist of:

278



A critical flow orifice.



Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal
the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice.



A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the
critical flow orifice and the assembly housing.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.2.1.3. Critical Flow Orifices
The most important component of the flow control assemblies is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates.
They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics.
By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a pressure differential is created. This
pressure differential combined with the action of the calibrator’s pump draws the gas
through the orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop,
the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of
upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas
through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1 the
gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream
pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are
therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical
flow orifice.

Figure 10-2: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice

The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends
on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas
molecules (moving at the speed of sound) pass through the orifice.
With a nominal pressure of 10 in-Hg-A in the sample/reaction cell, the necessary ratio of
reaction cell pressure to pump vacuum pressure of 2:1 is exceeded and accommodating a
wide range of variability in atmospheric pressure and accounting for pump degradation.
This extends the useful life of the pump. Once the pump degrades to the point where the
sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2:1, a critical flow rate can no longer be
maintained.

06873B DCN6388

279

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.2.2. INTERNAL GAS PRESSURE SENSORS
The T700 includes a single pressure regulator. Depending upon how many and which
options are installed in the T700 calibrator, there are between two and four pressure
sensors installed as well.
In the basic unit a printed circuit, assembly located near the front of the calibrator near
the MFCs includes sensors that measure the pressure of the diluent gas and the source
gas currently selected to flow into the calibrator. The calibrator monitors these sensors.


Should the pressure of one of them fall below 15 PSIG or rise above 36 PSIG a
warning is issued.

In units with the optional O3 generator installed a second PCA located at the rear of the
calibrator just behind the generator assembly includes a sensor that measures the gas
pressure of the zero air flowing into the generator. A regulator is also located on the gas
input to the O3 generator that maintains the pressure differential needed for the critical
flow orifice to operate correctly.


Should the pressure of one of this sensor fall below 15 PSIG or rise above 25 PSIG
a warning is issued.

In calibrators with O3 photometers installed, a second pressure located on the rear PCA
measures the pressure of gas in the photometer’s absorption tube. This data is used by
the CPU when calculating the O3 concentration inside the absorption tube.

280

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.3. ELECTRONIC OPERATION
10.3.1. OVERVIEW
ANALOG
IN

RS232
Male

COM2
Female

USB COM
port

Ethernet

USB

(RS-232 or RS-485)

(RS-232 only)

(I2C Bus)

Touchscreen

Sensor Inputs

A/D
Converter

Display

Absorption tube

Figure 10-3: T700 Electronic Block Diagram

06873B DCN6388

281

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

The core of the calibrator is a microcomputer (referred to as the CPU) that controls
various internal processes, interprets data, makes calculations, and reports results using
specialized firmware developed by Teledyne API. It communicates with the user as
well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a
separate printed circuit assembly called the motherboard.
The motherboard is directly mounted to the inside rear panel and collects data, performs
signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU
and the calibrator’s other major components.
Data are generated by the various sub components of the T700 (e.g. flow data from the
MFCs, O3 concentration from the optional photometer). Analog signals are converted
into digital data by a unipolar, analog-to-digital converter, located on the motherboard.
A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the calibrator’s major
components, again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard. These
status reports are used as data for the concentration calculations and as trigger events for
certain control commands issued by the CPU. They are stored in memory by the CPU
and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of manners:


Through the calibrator’s front panel LCD touchscreen interface;



RS 232 and RS485 serial I/O channels;



Via Ethernet;



Various digital and analog outputs, and



A set of digital control input channels.

Finally, the CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches (also over the I2C
bus) located on a separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key
electromechanical devices such as heaters, motors and valves.

10.3.2. CPU
The unit’s CPU card (Figure 10-4) is installed on the motherboard located inside the rear
panel. It is a low power (5 VDC, 720mA max), high performance, Vortex86SX-based
microcomputer running Windows CE. Its operation and assembly conform to the
PC-104 specification and features the following:

282

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

Figure 10-4: T700 CPU Board Annotated

The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage: an embedded 2MB flash chip
and a Disk on Module (DOM).

10.3.2.1. Disk-on-Module (DOM)
The DOM is a 44-pin IDE flash chip with a storage capacity up to 256 MB. It is used to
store the computer’s operating system, the Teledyne API firmware, and most of the
operational data. The LEDs on the DOM indicate power and reading/writing to or from
the DOM.

10.3.2.2. Flash Chip
This non-volatile, embedded flash chip includes 2MB of storage for calibration data as
well as a backup of the analyzer configuration. Storing these key data on a less heavily
accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption.
In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the calibrator will continue to
operate with just the DOM. However, all configuration information will be lost,
requiring the unit to be recalibrated.

06873B DCN6388

283

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.3.3. RELAY PCA
The relay PCA is one of the central switching and power distribution units of the
calibrator. It contains power relays, valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones
and valves, as well as thermocouple amplifiers, power distribution connectors and the
two switching power supplies of the calibrator. The relay PCA communicates with the
motherboard over the I2C bus and can be used for detailed trouble-shooting of power
problems and valve or heater functionality.
Generally, the relay PCA is located in the right-rear quadrant of the calibrator and is
mounted vertically on the back of the same bracket as the instrument’s DC power
supplies, however the exact location of the relay PCA may differ from model to model
(see Figure 3-5 or Figure 3-6).
Status LED’s
(D2 through D16)

Watchdog
Status LED (D1)

DC Power Supply
Test Points

I2C Connector

Power
Connections
for DC
Heaters

DC
Valve Control
Drivers

Valve Option
Control
Connector

AC Power
IN

DC Power
Distribution
Connectors

Figure 10-5: Relay PCA

This is the base version of the Relay PCA. It does not include the AC relays and is used
in instruments where there are no AC powered components requiring control. A plastic
insulating safety shield covers the empty AC Relay sockets.

284

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

WARNING
NEVER REMOVE THIS SAFETY SHIELD WHILE THE INSTRUMENT IS PLUGGED
IN AND TURNED ON. THE CONTACTS OF THE AC RELAY SOCKETS BENEATH
THE SHIELD CARRY HIGH AC VOLTAGES EVEN WHEN NO RELAYS ARE
PRESENT

10.3.3.1. Valve Control
The relay PCA also hosts two valve driver chips, each of which can drive up four valves.
In the T700, the relay PCA controls only those valves associated with the O3 generator
and photometer options. All valves related to source gas and diluent gas flow are
controlled by a separate valve driver PCA (see Section 10.3.4).

10.3.3.2. Heater Control
The relay PCA controls the various DC heaters related to the O3 generator and
photometer options.
MOTHERBOARD
A/D
Converter
(V/F)

Thermistor(s)

(e.g. photometer sample gas temp.;
photometer UV lamp temp.; O3 generator
lamp temp.; ect.)

CPU

RELAY PCA
DC
Control
Logic

O3 Generator
Lamp Heater

PHOTOMETER
Lamp Heater

Figure 10-6: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram.

10.3.3.3. Relay PCA Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry
Thirteen LEDs are located on the calibrator’s relay PCA to indicate the status of the
calibrator’s heating zones and some of its valves as well as a general operating watchdog
indicator. Table 10-1 shows the status of these LEDs and their respective functionality.

06873B DCN6388

285

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

D9 (Green) – Photometer Pump Status
D8 (Green) O3 Generator Valve Status
D7 (Green) – Photometer Meas/Ref Valve

D6 (Green ) – GPT Valve
D15 (Yellow) - Photometer Lamp Heater
D16 (Yellow) – O3 Generator Lamp Heater
D1 (RED)
Watchdog
Indicator

Figure 10-7: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA
Table 10-1: Relay PCA Status LEDs
LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

FUNCTION

Red

Watchdog Circuit; I C bus
operation.

D2-6

2
Blinks when I C bus is operating properly

SPARE
When lit the valve opens the
REFERENCE gas path

D71

Green

Photometer Meas/Ref Valve

D82

Green

O3 generator Valve status

When lit the valve open to O3 generator
gas path

Green

Photometer Pump status

When lit the pump is turned on.

D61,2

Yellow

GPT Valve status

When lit the valve opens the GT
Chamber

D10 - 14

SPARE

D151

Yellow

Photometer Heater Status

D162

Yellow

O3 Generator Heater Status

When lit the photometer UV lamp heater
is on
When lit the O3 generator UV lamp heater
is on

Only applies on calibrators with photometer options installed.

Only applies on calibrators with O3 generator options installed.

10.3.3.4. Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator (D1)
The most important of the status LEDs on the relay PCA is the red I2C Bus watchdog
LED. It is controlled directly by the calibrator’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry
on the relay PCA watches the status of D1. Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for
30 seconds (indicating that the CPU or I2C bus has stopped functioning) this Watchdog
Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turns off all heaters and lamps.

286

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.3.4. VALVE DRIVER PCA
The valves that operate the T700 calibrator’s main source gas and diluent gas inputs are
controlled by a PCA that is attached directly to the input valve manifold (see Figure 3-5
or Figure 3-6). Like the relay PCA, the valve driver PCA communicates with T700’s
CPU through the motherboard over the I2C bus.

Figure 10-8: Status LED Locations – Valve Driver PCA

10.3.4.1. Valve Driver PCA Watchdog Indicator
The most important of the status LEDs on the relay PCA is the red I2C Bus watchdog
LED. It is controlled directly by the calibrator’s CPU over the I2C bus. Like the
watchdog LED on the relay PCA, should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds
if the CPU or I2C bus has stopped functioning, this Watchdog Circuit automatically
shuts all valves and turns off all heaters and lamps.

06873B DCN6388

287

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.3.5. MOTHERBOARD
This is the largest electronic assembly in the calibrator and is mounted to the rear panel
as the base for the CPU board and all I/O connectors. This printed circuit assembly
provides a multitude of functions including A/D conversion, digital input/output, PC104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the
RS-232 and RS-485 signals.

10.3.5.1. A to D Conversion
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the calibrator’s various sensors, are
converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog
to digital converter (A/D). Under the control of the CPU, this functional block selects a
particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word.
The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic
device (PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices.
The V-F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD
counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends the result of that
count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in uni-polar
mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This
allows signals from -0.05V to +5.05V to be fully converted.
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter:
Reference ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two
voltages and outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU. The CPU uses these values to
compute the converter’s offset and slope, then uses these factors for subsequent
calculations.

10.3.5.2. Sensor Inputs
The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master
multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 kΩ)
on each of the inputs prevent crosstalk between the sensor signals.

10.3.5.3. Thermistor Interface
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negativecoefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the calibrator.

10.3.5.4. Analog Outputs
The T700 calibrator comes equipped with one analog output. It can be set by the user to
output a signal level representing any one of the test parameters (see Table 4-14) and
will output an analog VDC signal that rises and falls in relationship with the value of the
chosen parameter.

288

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.3.5.5. External Digital I/O
The external digital I/O performs two functions.
The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin
connector on the rear panel of the calibrator. These outputs convey on/off information
about certain calibrator conditions such as SYSTEM OK. They can be used to interface
with certain types of programmable devices.
The CONTROL outputs can be used to initiate actions by external peripheral devices in
conjunction with individual steps of a calibration sequence (see Section 4.3.2.8).
The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external
source such as a PLC or data logger (Section 4.3.1.5). Zero and span calibrations can be
initiated by contact closures on the rear panel.

10.3.5.6. I2C Data Bus
I2C is a two-way, clocked, bi-directional, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in
commercial and consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the motherboard
converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The data is then fed to the
relay board, optional analog input board and valve driver board circuitry.

10.3.5.7. Power-up Circuit
This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during calibrator start-up and sets the
analog outputs, external digital I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the
CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control.

10.3.6. INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA
This PCA, physically located to the just to the left of the MFCs, houses two pressure
sensors that measure the pressure of the incoming diluent gas (zero air) and calibration
gases relative to ambient pressure. Pneumatically, both sensors measure their respective
gases just upstream from the associated MFC.
This data is used in calculating the concentration of calibration mixtures.
The following TEST functions are viewable from the instrument’s front panel:

06873B DCN6388



CALPRESS - the pressure of the selected calibration gas input reported in PSIG.



DILPRESS - the pressure of the diluent gas (zero air) input also reported in PSIG.

289

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.3.7. POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER
The T700 calibrator operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240
VAC (both ± 10%) between 47 and 63 Hz. A 5-ampere circuit breaker is built into the
ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power, the circuit breaker
will automatically turn off the calibrator.
WARNING
The T700 calibrator is equipped with a universal power supply that allows it to accept
any AC power configuration, within the limits specified in Table 2-2.
Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing this situation before
turning the calibrator back on.
SENSOR SUITES
ANALOG SENSORS
O3 Generator
Reference detector,
Photometer UV
Detector

KEY

Sensor Control
& I/O Logic

AC POWER

Pre-Amplifiers
& Amplifiers

(e.g. CPU, I C bus,
Motherboard, etc.)

AC
POWER IN

MFC3
2nd Cal Gas

PS 1

(Optional)

+5 VDC

MFC2
Cal Gas
MFC1
(Diluent)
GAS
TEMPERATURE
SENSORS
GAS
PRESSURE
SENSORS

Photometer
UV Lamp P/S

±15 VDC

RELAY
PCA

OPTIONAL VALVES
GPT valve,
O3 Gen valve
Photometer M/R
valve, etc.)

Cooling
Fan
Photometer
Pump
DILUENT
VALVE

O3 Generator
UV Lamp

ON / OFF
SWITCH

PS 2
(+12 VDC)

Solenoid
Drivers

O3 Generator UV
Lamp Xformer
O3 Generator UV
Lamp P/S

DC POWER

LOGIC DEVICES

CAL GAS 1
VALVE
Solenoid
Drivers

VALVE
DRIVE PCA

PURGE
VALVE

CAL GAS 2
VALVE
CAL GAS 3
VALVE
CAL GAS 4
VALVE

Figure 10-9: T700 Power Distribution Block diagram

290

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.4. FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN/DISPLAY INTERFACE
The most commonly used method for communicating with the T700 Dynamic Dilution
Calibrator is via the instrument’s front panel LCD touchscreen display from where users
can input data and receive information directly.

Figure 10-10: Front Panel Display Interface Block Diagram

The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board. The touchscreen is interfaced
to the CPU by means of a touchscreen controller that connects to the CPU via the
internal USB bus and emulates a computer mouse.

10.4.1.1. Front Panel Interface PCA
The front panel interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and
touchscreen. For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video
controller and the LCD display module. This PCA also contains:

06873B DCN6388



power supply circuitry for the LCD display module



a USB hub that is used for communications with the touchscreen controller and the
two front panel USB device ports



the circuitry for powering the display backlight

291

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.5. SOFTWARE OPERATION
The T700 calibrator’s core module is a high performance, X86-based microcomputer
running Windows CE. On top of the Windows CE shell, special software developed by
Teledyne API interprets user commands from various interfaces, performs procedures
and tasks and stores data in the CPU’s memory devices. Figure 10-11 shows a block
diagram of this software functionality.

Windows CE
API FIRMWARE
Memory Handling

Calibrator Operations

 Calibration Data
 System Status Data






Calibration Procedures
Configuration Procedures
Autonomic Systems
Diagnostic Routines

PC/104 BUS

CALIBRATOR
HARDWARE
Interface Handling
 Gas mixture

 Sensor input Data

 Measurement

 Analog Output Data
 RS232 & RS485
 External Digital I/O

Algorithms

Algorithms for
photometer

Touchscreen

PC/104 BUS

Figure 10-11: Schematic of Basic Software Operation

292

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.6. O3 GENERATOR OPERATION
10.6.1. PRINCIPLE OF PHOTOLYTIC O3 GENERATION
Ozone is a naturally occurring substance that is sometimes called "activated oxygen". It
contains three atoms of oxygen (O3) instead of the usual two found in normal oxygen
(O2) that is essential for life. Because of its relatively short half-life, ozone cannot be
bottled and stored for later use and therefore must always be generated on-site by an
ozone generator. The two main principles of ozone generation are UV-light and coronadischarge. While the corona-discharge method is most common because of its ability to
generate very high concentrations (up to 50%), it is inappropriate for calibration needs
since the level of fine control over the O3 concentration is poor. Also, the coronadischarge method produces a small amount of NO2 as a byproduct, which also may be
undesirable in a calibration application.
The UV-light method is most feasible in calibration applications where production of
low, accurate concentrations of ozone desired. This method mimics the radiation
method that occurs naturally from the sun in the upper atmosphere producing the ozone
layer. An ultra-violet lamp inside the generator emits a precise wavelength of UV Light
(185 nm). Ambient air is passed over an ultraviolet lamp, which splits some of the
molecular oxygen (O2) in the gas into individual oxygen atoms that attach to other
existing oxygen molecules (O2), forming ozone (O3).

Figure 10-12: O3 Generator Internal Pneumatics

06873B DCN6388

293

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.6.2. O3 GENERATOR – PNEUMATIC OPERATION
Pneumatic flow through the O3 generator is created by supplying zero air (diluent) to it
under pressure. The zero air source must be capable of maintaining a continuous flow
rate of at least 100 cm3/min unless the optional photometer is also installed, in which
case the minimum continuous flow rate must be at least 1.1 LPM.
Input and output gas flow is directed by two valves, both of which must be open:


The diluent inlet valve: This valve is located on the back panel and allows diluent /
zero air into the calibrator.



The O3 generation valve: This valve is located on the body of the O3 generator is
downstream from the generator chamber itself and directs the output of the
generator to either the GPT mixing chamber or the exhaust vent at the back of the
calibrator.

The rate of flow through the O3 generator is controlled by a 100 cm3/min flow control
assembly positioned between the O3 generation chamber and the O3 generation valve. A
self adjusting pressure regulator on the zero air (diluent ) supply gas line maintains the
pressure across the critical flow orifice of the flow control assembly (see Section
10.2.1.3).
O3 Generator
Gas Inlet
O3 Generator
Heater Control PCA

Photometer/Vent
Flow Control Assembly
(1.0 LPM)

O3 Outlet to
GPT Valve
O3 Generation Valve
Flow Control Assembly

O3 Outlet to
Photometer
“Zero Out” fixture
and Internal Vent

(100 cm /min)

O3 Outlet to Exhaust Fixture
(on back panel of calibrator)

O3 Generation
Valve

Regulator Adjustment
Screw
O3 Generator Zero Air
Pressure Regulator

Measure / Reference
Valve for
Photometer Bench
(only present when
photometer option is
installed)

Regulator
Gas Inlet

Outlet to O3
Generator
Pressure
Sensor
Outlet from Regulator
to O3 Generator

Figure 10-13: O3 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations
294

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.6.3. O3 GENERATOR – ELECTRONIC OPERATION
Electronically the O3 generator and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated
by the CPU via the motherboard. Sensors, such as the UV lamp thermistor send analog
data to the motherboard, where it is digitized. Digital data is sent by the motherboard to
the calibrator’s CPU and where required stored in either flash memory or on the CPU’s
Disk-on-Module. Commands from the CPU are sent to the motherboard and forwarded
to the various devices via the calibrators I2C bus.

Figure 10-14: O3 Generator – Electronic Block Diagram

06873B DCN6388

295

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

UV Lamp

O3 Generator
Heater Control
PCA

UV Lamp Power
Supply
(200 VAC @ 30 kHz)

UV Lamp Power
Supply
Transformer

Reference Detector
Preamp Power
Connector

UV Lamp
Power Connector
O3 Generator
Reference Detector
UV Lamp
I2C Connector

Reference
Detector
Signal Output
to Motherboard
O3 Generator
Reference Detector
PCA

Figure 10-15: O3 Generator Electronic Components Location

10.6.3.1. O3 Generator Temperature Control
In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the T700’s O3 generator is
maintained at a constant 48ºC. If the lamp temperature falls below 43ºC or rises above
53ºC a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU.
This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA (Section
10.3.3). The location of the thermistor and heater associated with the O3 generator is
shown in Figure 10-16:

296

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

UV Lamp
O3 Generator
Heater Control PCA
(Heater is located beneath
the PCA)

UV Lamp
Thermistor

Figure 10-16: O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations

10.6.3.2. Pneumatic Sensor for the O3 Generator
A pressure sensor, located on the O3 generator and photometer, pressure/flow sensor
PCA (see Figure 3-6), monitors the output gas pressure of the regulator on the O3
generator’s zero air supply. The regulator is adjusted at the factory to maintain a
pressure of 20 PSIG on this line. If the pressure drops below 15 PSIG or rises above 25
PSIG a warning is issued.

10.7. PHOTOMETER OPERATION
The Model T700 calibrator’s optional photometer determines the concentration of
Ozone (O3) in a sample gas drawn through it. Sample and calibration gases must be
supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a stable gas flow through
the absorption tube where the gas’ ability to absorb ultraviolet (UV) radiation of a
certain wavelength (in this case 254 nm) is measured.
Gas bearing O3 and zero air are alternately routed through the photometer’s absorption
tube. Measurements of the UV light passing through the sample gas with and without
O3 present are made and recorded.
Calibration of the photometer is performed in software and does not require physical
adjustment. During calibration, the CPU’s microprocessor measures the current state of
the UV Sensor output and various other physical parameters of the calibrator and stores
them in memory. The CPU uses these calibration values, the UV absorption

06873B DCN6388

297

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

measurements made on the sample gas in the absorption tube along with data regarding
the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final O3 concentration.

10.7.1. MEASUREMENT METHOD
10.7.1.1. Calculating O3 Concentration
The basic principle by which photometer works is called Beer’s Law (also referred to as
the Beer-Lambert equation). It defines the how light of a specific wavelength is
absorbed by a particular gas molecule over a certain distance at a given temperature and
pressure. The mathematical relationship between these three parameters for gases at
Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP) is:
Equation 10-5

I = I0 e -αLC

at STP

Where:

Io is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption.
I is the intensity with absorption.
L is the absorption path, or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed.
C is the concentration of the absorbing gas. In the case of the T700, Ozone (O ).
α is the absorption coefficient that tells how well O absorbs light at the specific
3

wavelength of interest.

To solve this equation for C, the concentration of the absorbing Gas (in this case O3), the
application of algebra is required to rearrange the equation as follows:
Equation 10-6

C = ln

Io
1
×
I
αL

at STP

Unfortunately, both ambient temperature and pressure influence the density of the
sample gas and therefore the number of ozone molecules present in the absorption tube
thus changing the amount of light absorbed.
In order to account for this effect the following addition is made to the equation:
Equation 10-7

C = ln

Io
I

1
Τ
29.92 inHg
×
×
αL
Ρ
273 o Κ

Where:

T = sample ambient temperature in degrees Kelvin
P = ambient pressure in inches of mercury
298

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

Finally, to convert the result into Parts per Billion (PPB), the following change is made:
Equation 10-8

I
C = ln o
I

10 9
×
αL

Τ
273 o Κ

29.92 inHg
Ρ

The T700 photometer:


Measures each of the above variables: ambient temperature; ambient gas pressure;
the intensity of the UV light beam with and without O3 present;



Inserts know values for the length of the absorption path and the absorption
coefficient, and:



Calculates the concentration of O3 present in the sample gas.

10.7.1.2. The Measurement / Reference Cycle
In order to solve the Beer-Lambert equation, it is necessary to know the intensity of the
light passing through the absorption path both when O3 is present and when it is not. A
valve called the measure/reference valve, physically located on front-left corner of the
O3 generator assembly (see Figure 3-6 and Figure 10-13) alternates the gas stream
flowing to the photometer between zero air (diluent gas) and the O3 output from the O3
generator. This cycle takes about 6 seconds.
Table 10-2: T700 Photometer Measurement / Reference Cycle
TIME INDEX

0 sec.
0 – 2 sec.
2 – 3 Seconds
3 sec.
3 – 5 sec.
5 – 6 Seconds

STATUS

Measure/Reference Valve Opens to the Measure Path.
Wait Period. Ensures that the absorption tube has been adequately flushed of any
previously present gases.
Calibrator measures the average UV light intensity of O3 bearing Sample Gas (I)
during this period.
Measure/Reference Valve Opens to the Reference Path.
Wait Period. Ensures that the absorption tube has been adequately flushed of O3
bearing gas.
Calibrator measures the average UV light intensity of Non-O3 bearing Sample Gas (I0)
during this period.
CYCLE REPEAT EVERY 6 SECONDS

06873B DCN6388

299

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Instrument Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH

Flow Control
(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR

grn

DILUENT
Valve
brn

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

brn

CAL GAS 1
INLET

CAL GAS 2
INLET

CAL GAS 3
INLET

Flow Control
(100 cm3)

Purge
Valve

brn
DILUENT
PRESSURE
SENSOR

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller

O3 Generator Assembly

O3
GENERATOR

DILUENT
INLET

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

Pressure
Regulator

PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

On Back Panel

O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA

Flow Control
(800 cm3)

vio PHOTOMETER
INLET

REF/MEAS
Valve

vio

wht
wht PHOTOMETER

PUMP

ZERO IN

O3 Gen
Valve

gry
INTERNAL
VENT

blk

CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR

red
blk

EXHAUST

GPT
Valve

orn
orn

CAL GAS 4
INLET

yel
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD
(on back panel)

PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT

yel

PHOTOMETER
OUTLET

red

yel

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 1

yel

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 1

GPT
Volume

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 2

blu

VENT
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 10-17: O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Measure Cycle

Instrument Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH

Flow Control
(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR

grn

DILUENT
Valve
brn

INPUT GAS
PRESSURE SENSOR
PCA

brn

CAL GAS 1
INLET

CAL GAS 2
INLET

CAL GAS 3
INLET

Flow Control
(100 cm3)

Purge
Valve

brn
DILUENT
PRESSURE
SENSOR

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller

O3 Generator Assembly

O3
GENERATOR

DILUENT
INLET

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

Pressure
Regulator

PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

On Back Panel

O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA

Flow Control
(800 cm3)

vio PHOTOMETER
INLET

REF/MEAS
Valve

vio

wht
wht PHOTOMETER

PUMP

ZERO IN

O3 Gen
Valve

gry
blk

CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR

INTERNAL
VENT

red

blk
EXHAUST

GPT
Valve

orn
orn

CAL GAS 4
INLET

yel
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD
(on back panel)

yel

Cal Gas
Mass Flow Controller 1

PHOTOMETER
OUTLET

red

yel

PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 1

yel

GPT
Volume

CAL GAS
OUTPUT 2

blu

VENT
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 10-18: O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Reference Cycle

300

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

10.7.1.3. The Absorption Path
In the most basic terms, the T700 photometer uses a high energy, mercury vapor lamp to
generate a beam of UV light. This beam passes through a window of material
specifically chosen to be both non-reactive to O3 and transparent to UV radiation at
254nm and into an absorption tube filled with sample gas.
Because ozone is a very efficient absorber of UV radiation the absorption path length
required to create a measurable decrease in UV intensity is short enough (approximately
42 cm) that the light beam is only required to make one pass through the Absorption
Tube. Therefore, no complex mirror system is needed to lengthen the effective path by
bouncing the beam back and forth.
Finally, the UV passes through a similar window at the other end of the absorption tube
and is detected by a specially designed vacuum diode that only detects radiation at or
very near a wavelength of 254nm. The specificity of the detector is high enough that no
extra optical filtering of the UV light is needed.
The detector reacts to the UV light and outputs a current signal that varies in direct
relationship with the intensity of the light shining on it. This current signal is amplified
and converted to a 0 to 5 VDC voltage analog signal voltage sent to the instrument’s
motherboard where it is digitized. The CPU to be uses this digital data in computing the
concentration of O3 in the absorption tube.
W indow

Window
UV Detector

ABSORPTION TUBE

Sample Gas IN

Analog current signal
is output by Detector

Sample Gas OUT

UV
Source

Absorption Path Length = 42 cm

O-5 VDC analog
signal
to Motherboard

Photometer
Pre amp
PCA

Figure 10-19: O3 Photometer Absorption Path

10.7.1.4. Interferent Rejection
It should be noted that the UV absorption method for detecting ozone is subject to
interference from a number of sources. The T700’s photometer has been successfully
tested for its ability to reject interference from sulfur dioxide, nitrogen dioxide, nitric
oxide, water, and meta-xylene.
While the photometer rejects interference from the aromatic hydrocarbon meta-xylene, it
should be noted that there are a very large number of volatile aromatic hydrocarbons that
could potentially interfere with ozone detection. If the T700 calibrator is installed in an
environment where high aromatic hydrocarbon concentrations are suspected, specific
tests should be conducted to reveal the amount of interference these compounds may be
causing.

06873B DCN6388

301

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.7.2. PHOTOMETER LAYOUT
The photometer is where the absorption of UV light by ozone is measured and converted
into a voltage. It consists of several sub-assemblies:

UV Detector



A mercury-vapor UV lamp. This lamp is coated in a material that optically screens
the UV radiation output to remove the O3 producing 185nm radiation. Only light at
254nm is emitted.



An AC power supply to supply the current for starting and maintaining the plasma
arc of the mercury vapor lamp.



A thermistor and DC heater attached to the UV Lamp to maintain the Lamp at an
optimum operating temperature.



42 cm long quartz absorption tube.



A thermistor attached to the quartz tube for measuring sample gas temperature.



Gas inlet and outlet mounting blocks that route sample gas into and out of the
photometer.



The vacuum diode, UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current.



A preamplifier assembly, which convert the Detector’s current output into a DC
Voltage then amplifies it to a level readable by the A-to-D converter circuitry of the
instrument’s motherboard.

Absorption Tube

UV Lamp Power
Transformer

Power Connector
from
+15 VDC power supply
UV Detector
Preamp PCA

Sample Gas Inlet

UV Lamp Power
Supply

Sample Gas
Thermistor

UV Lamp Thermistor
(UV Lamp Heater Behind Thermistor)

Sample Gas
Outlet
UV Lamp

(200 VAC @ 30 kHz)

UV Lamp Heater
Control PCA

Figure 10-20: O3 Photometer Layout – Top Cover Removed

10.7.3. PHOTOMETER PNEUMATIC OPERATION
The flow of gas through the photometer is created by a small internal pump that pulls air
though the instrument.
There are several advantages to this “pull through”
configuration. Placing the pump down stream from the absorption tube avoids problems
caused by the pumping process heating and compressing the sample.
In order to measure the presence of low concentrations of O3 in the sample air, it is
necessary to establish and maintain a relatively constant and stable volumetric flow of
sample gas through the photometer. The simplest way to accomplish this is by placing a

302

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Principles of Operation

flow control assembly containing a critical flow orifice directly upstream of the pump
but down stream from the absorption tube.
The critical flow orifice installed in the pump supply line is tuned to create a flow of 800
cm3/min. A pressure sensor and a flow sensor, located on the O3 generator/photometer
pressure flow sensor PCA, monitor the pressure and flow rate of the gas passing through
the photometers absorption tube.
See Figure 10-17 and Figure 10-18 for depictions of the airflow related to the
photometer.

10.7.4. PHOTOMETER ELECTRONIC OPERATION
MOTHERBOARD
Sensor Inputs

A/D
Converter

Photometer
Sample Gas
Pressure
Sensor

Photometer
Detector
Preamp

PC 104 Bus

Thermistor Interface

Disk on
Module
Flash
Chip

I C Bus
RELAY PCA

Photometer
Sample Gas
Temperature

Photometer
Detector

Photometer

PC 104
CPU Card

Photometer
UV Lamp
Temperature

Photometer
Lamp Power
Supply

Absorption tube

Photometer M/R
Valve
(Located on 03
Generator Assembly)

I2C y
Status
LED

Photometer
Pump

Photometer
Lamp Heater

Figure 10-21: O3 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram

Like the O3 generator, the O3 photometer and its subcomponents act as peripheral
devices operated by the CPU via the motherboard. Communications to and from the
CPU are handled by the motherboard.
Outgoing commands for the various devices such as the photometer pump, the UV lamp
power supply, or the UV Lamp heater are issued via the I2C bus to circuitry on the relay
PCA which turns them ON/OFF. The CPU also issues commands over the I2C bus that
cause the relay PCA to cycle the measure/reference valve back and forth.
Incoming data from the UV light detector is amplified locally then converted to digital
information by the motherboard. Output from the photometers temperature sensors is
also amplified and converted to digital data by the motherboard. The O3 concentration
of the sample gas is computed by the CPU using this data (along with gas pressure and
flow data received from the T700’s pressure sensors.

06873B DCN6388

303

Principles of Operation

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

10.7.4.1. O3 Photometer Temperature Control
In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the T700’s O3 photometer is
maintained at a constant 58ºC. This is intentionally set at a temperature higher than the
ambient temperature of the T700’s operating environment to ensure that local changes in
temperature do not affect the UV Lamp. If the lamp temperature falls below 56ºC or
rises above 61ºC a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU.
This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA (Section
10.3.3.2).
The following TEST functions report these temperatures and are viewable from the
instrument’s front panel:


PHOTOLTEMP - The temperature of the UV Lamp reported in ºC.



PHOTOSTEMP - The temperature of the Sample gas in the absorption tube
reported in ºC.

10.7.4.2. Pneumatic Sensors for the O3 Photometer
The sensors located on the pneumatic sensor just to the left rear of the O3 generator
assembly measure the absolute pressure and the flow rate of gas inside the photometer’s
absorption tube. This information is used by the CPU to calculate the O3 concentration
of the sample gas (See Equation 10-7). Both of these measurements are made
downstream from the absorption tube but upstream of the pump. A critical flow orifice
located between the flow sensor and the pump maintains the gas flow through the
photometer at 800 cm3/min.
The following TEST functions are viewable from the instrument’s front panel:

304



PHOTOFLOW - The flow rate of gas through the photometer measured in LPM.



PHOTOSPRESS – the pressure of the gas inside the absorption tube. This
pressure is reported in inches of mercury-absolute (in-Hg-A), i.e. referenced to a
vacuum (zero absolute pressure). This is not the same as PSIG.

06873B DCN6388

11. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE
Teledyne API considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static
electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to
provide reliable service for a long time. This section describes how static electricity
occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how
to prevent that damage from occurring.

11.1. HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED
Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of
your analyzer, are very small, require very little power and operate very quickly.
Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also make
them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity. Controlling
electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the
first place.
Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens
whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the
atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate, some electrons from one surface
are retained by the other.
Materials
Makes
Contact

Materials
Separate

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3

NET CHARGE = 0

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 2

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 4

NET CHARGE = -1

NET CHARGE = +1

Figure 11-1: Triboelectric Charging

If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded,
the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place,
or static. The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone
wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor.
With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge builds up,
quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a

06873B DCN6388

305

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

workbench, using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of
StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges
Table 11-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities
MEANS OF GENERATION
Walking across nylon carpet

65-90% RH

10-25% RH

1,500V

35,000V

Walking across vinyl tile

250V

12,000V

Worker at bench

100V

6,000V

Poly bag picked up from bench

1,200V

20,000V

Moving around in a chair padded
with urethane foam

1,500V

18,000V

11.2. HOW ELECTRO-STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE
Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an
electronic device. Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of
the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate
traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of them. When
examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like
tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry.
A quick comparison of the values in Table 11-1 with the those shown in the Table 11-2,
listing device susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates
that approximately 60% of device failures are the result of damage due to electro-static
discharge.
Table 11-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD

DEVICE

DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE
RANGE
DAMAGE BEGINS
OCCURRING AT

CATASTROPHIC
DAMAGE AT

MOSFET

100

VMOS

1800

NMOS

100

GaAsFET

2000

EPROM

100

JFET

140

7000

SAW

150

500

Op-AMP

190

2500

CMOS

200

3000

Schottky Diodes

300

2500

Film Resistors

300

3000

This Film Resistors

300

7000

ECL

500

SCR

500

1000

Schottky TTL

500

2500

Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur:

306

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge



Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device.
Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can
allow enough discharge to cause damage. A similar discharge can occur from a
charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture.



When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device
to another surface such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces
or other device. In some cases, charged device discharges can be the most
destructive.



A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into
the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the
assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is connected to ground a discharge will
occur.



Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field,
a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the
device. If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic
field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere
else, a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to
ground.

11.3. COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE


I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human
nervous system isn’t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most
devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that.



I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro Static charges
are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet
away from the surface bearing the charge.



It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by
electro-static discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to
fail immediately. More likely, the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage
causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the trace. This
weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low
voltage and current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at
the defect over time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is
reached.

These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which
the damaged device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity, as well as
possible failure and damage to other pieces of equipment or property.


Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this
statement.

Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge will be
equalized across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they are still
trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they are
discharged.
A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in the
presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a
nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench.


06873B DCN6388

As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by
static discharges: It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your
analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from
307

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

building static electric charges themselves. This does not prevent discharges from
static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging
through the instrument and damaging it.

11.4. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL
It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not,
however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent
damage due to electro-static discharge from occurring.

11.4.1. GENERAL RULES
Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station.
Setting up an ESD safe workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly
tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti-ESD
workstation.
Protective Mat
Ground Point
Wrist Strap

Figure 11-2: Basic Anti-ESD Work Station

For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are
available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed
to create a temporary anti-ESD work area anywhere.


Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic
assemblies of your analyzer. An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it
at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows
static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels. Anti-ESD
wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where
there is no available grounded plug.

Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one megohm) that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument’s power
supply.

308



Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may
temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time, once you stop touching the
grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re-build. In some
conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few
seconds.



Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags
or bins: Even when you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies
in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will prevent induced charges from building
up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it.

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator



A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive
components and assemblies rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, pink-poly
bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid (similar to liquid laundry
detergent) which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a
slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag.

While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does not
prevent the build up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded surface, these
bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build up on the surface
of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the circuits of your
ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the plastic is eventually used up
after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary
plastic bag.
Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color)
provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when
properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from
discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges.
Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are also
excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and
discharges.


06873B DCN6388

Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to
close an anti-ESD bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive
tape, such as Scotch® tape, from its roll will generate a static charge of several
thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated
field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away.

309

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

11.4.2. BASIC ANTI-ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND
MAINTENANCE
11.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack
When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a
properly grounded power supply
1. Attach your anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else.


Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal
portion of the instrument chassis.



This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument
and all of its components are connected.

2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal
casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from
any conducted or induced static charges.
4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a nonESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait.
5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of
the analyzer.

11.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench
When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a antiESD work bench
1. Plug you anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station
before touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or
so away. This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the
ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects
and induction from occurring.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or
assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation.


Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface.



Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on
the outside surface of the container to be bled away by the workstation’s
grounded protective mat.

4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or
holding an ESD Sensitive Device.


Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive
surface of your workstation. Never lay them down on any non-ESD
preventative surface.

5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins
and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap.
6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the
workbench.

310

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

11.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back
When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne API analyzer to an antiESD workbench or back:
1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and
workstation.
2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:
4. If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is
connected to a ground point.
5. If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work
surface.
6. In either case wait several seconds.
7. Place the item in the container.
8. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD
tape.
9. Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static
fields.
10. Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the
bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device.
11. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have
built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate:
12. Connect your wrist strap to ground.
13. If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is
connected to a ground point.
14. If you are at a anti-ESD work bench, lay the container down on the conductive work
surface.
15. In either case wait several seconds.
16. Open the container.

11.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne API’s Customer Service
Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient
generators of static electric charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne API ships
all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed anti-ESD containers.
Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during
shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these
static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped ensure that
you:
Always unpack shipments from Teledyne API’s Customer Service by:
1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area.
2. Carry the still sealed ant-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area.
3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 11.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD
container at the work station.
4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components
or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne API.

06873B DCN6388

311

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

11.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API’s Customer Service
Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne API’s
Customer Service in anti-ESD bins, tubes or bags.

WARNING
 DO NOT use pink-poly bags.
 NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the
electronic component/assembly directly
 This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam
peanuts, open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape
 DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. Use ONLY anti-ESD tape
1. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
2. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:


If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap
is connected to a ground point.



If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive
work surface.



In either case wait several seconds.

3. Place the item in the container.
4. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD
tape.

Note

312



Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of
static fields.



Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents
the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device.

If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or
containers available, Teledyne API’s Customer Service department will
supply them (see Section 9.8 for contact information). Follow the
instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and
workstation.

06873B DCN6388

GLOSSARY
Note: Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual.
Term

Description/Definition

10BaseT

an Ethernet standard that uses twisted (“T”) pairs of copper wires to transmit at
10 megabits per second (Mbps)

100BaseT

same as 10BaseT except ten times faster (100 Mbps)

APICOM

name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers

ASSY

Assembly

CAS

Code-Activated Switch

Corona Discharge, a frequently luminous discharge, at the surface of a
conductor or between two conductors of the same transmission line,
accompanied by ionization of the surrounding atmosphere and often by a power
loss

Converter Efficiency, the percentage of light energy that is actually converted
into electricity

CEM

Continuous Emission Monitoring

Chemical formulas that may be included in this document:
CO2

carbon dioxide

C3H8

propane

CH4

methane

H2O

water vapor

HC
HNO3
H2S
NO

general abbreviation for hydrocarbon
nitric acid
hydrogen sulfide
nitric oxide

NO2

nitrogen dioxide

NOX

nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2

NOy

nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen: the sum of NOX plus other
compounds such as HNO3 (definitions vary widely and may include nitrate
(NO3), PAN, N2O and other compounds as well)

NH3

ammonia

molecular oxygen

ozone

06873B DCN6388

313

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Term

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Description/Definition
SO2

sulfur dioxide

cm3

metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter (replaces the obsolete abbreviation
“cc”)

CPU

Central Processing Unit

DAC

Digital-to-Analog Converter

DAS

Data Acquisition System

DCE

Data Communication Equipment

DFU

Dry Filter Unit

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet
servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and
any other addressable device connected to the network

DIAG

Diagnostics, the diagnostic settings of the analyzer.

DOM

Disk On Module, a 44-pin IDE flash drive with up to 256MB storage capacity for
instrument’s firmware, configuration settings and data

DOS

Disk Operating System

DRAM

Dynamic Random Access Memory

DR-DOS

Digital Research DOS

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory also referred to as a
FLASH chip or drive

ESD

Electro-Static Discharge

ETEST

Electrical Test

Ethernet

a standardized (IEEE 802.3) computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs), facilitating communication and sharing resources

FEP

Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that Du Pont
markets as Teflon®

Flash

non-volatile, solid-state memory

FPI

Fabry-Perot Interface: a special light filter typically made of a transparent plate
with two reflecting surfaces or two parallel, highly reflective mirrors

GFC

Gas Filter Correlation

I2C bus

a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between individual
analyzer components

Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic
components such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized
package used in electronic assemblies
314

06873B DCN6388

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Term

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Description/Definition

Internet Protocol

IZS

Internal Zero Span

LAN

Local Area Network

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LPM

Liters Per Minute

MFC

Mass Flow Controller

M/R

Measure/Reference
the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of a specific substance. Conversely,
one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the
same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance.

MOLAR MASS

EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of
Carbon is 12 grams. Conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of
carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams.
Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements.

NDIR

Non-Dispersive Infrared

NIST-SRM

National Institute of Standards and Technology - Standard Reference Material

Personal Computer

PCA

Printed Circuit Assembly, the PCB with electronic components, ready to use

PC/AT

Personal Computer / Advanced Technology

PCB

Printed Circuit Board, the bare board without electronic component

PFA

Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets
as Teflon®

PLC

Programmable Logic Controller, a device that is used to control instruments
based on a logic level signal coming from the analyzer

PLD

Programmable Logic Device

PLL

Phase Lock Loop

PMT

Photo Multiplier Tube, a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply electrons
collected and charged to create a detectable current signal

P/N (or PN)

Part Number

PSD

Prevention of Significant Deterioration

PTFE

Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases
that may react on other surfaces; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as

06873B DCN6388

315

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Term

Teledyne API – Model T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator

Description/Definition
Teflon

PVC

Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing

Rdg

Reading

RS-232

specification and standard describing a serial communication method between
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment)
devices, using a maximum cable-length of 50 feet

RS-485

specification and standard describing a binary serial communication method
among multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS-232 with a much longer
distance between the host and the furthest device

SAROAD

Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data

SLAMS

State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan

SLPM

Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure

STP

Standard Temperature and Pressure

TCP/IP

Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communications
protocol for Ethernet devices

TEC

Thermal Electric Cooler

TPC

Temperature/Pressure Compensation

USB

Universal Serial Bus: a standard connection method to establish communication
between peripheral devices and a host controller, such as a mouse and/or
keyboard and a personal computer or laptop

VARS

Variables, the variable settings of the instrument

V-F

Voltage-to-Frequency

Z/S

Zero / Span

316

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation (05623D DCN5839)

APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A-1: Models T700 and 700E Software Menu Trees
APPENDIX A-2: Models T700 and 700E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O
APPENDIX A-3: Models T700 and 700E Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I/O
APPENDIX A-4: Models T700 and 700E Signal I/O Definitions
APPENDIX A-5: MODBUS Register Map
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators

06873B DCN6388

A-1

APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation (05623D DCN5839)

A-2

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3

06873B DCN6388

A-3

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Figure A-1:
A-4

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Main Menu
06873B DCN6388

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

EXAMPLE

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Figure A-2:

06873B DCN6388

MAIN Menu - GENERATE Submenu

A-5

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Figure A-3:

A-6

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

PRIMARY SETUP MENU - Basics

06873B DCN6388

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

EXAMPLE

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Figure A-4:

06873B DCN6388

PRIMARY SETUP Menu - SOURCE GAS CONFIGURATION Submenu

A-7

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SEQ
EDIT

INS

NAME

Number of times to execute the same sequence
repeatedly (1 - 100 or 0 to execute indefinitely).

EXIT

DEL

Inserts a new sequence
Cycles through list of
already programmed
calibration sequences

PRNT

Create/edit the name of the channel

REPEAT COUNT
Enables or Disables the calibrator's digital contact closure
inputs that can be used to initiate the sequences remotely

CC INPUT
Enables or Disables the calibrator's
digital contact closure outputs.

CC OUTPUT
Enables or Disables the calibrator's timer feature that allows
the calibrator to use its internal clock to start a sequence

TIMER ENABLE
STEPS
PROGRESS MODES

STEP

PCT

ELAP REM ENTR EXIT
PREV

As the sequence runs,
the calibrator's display
will show progress by
displaying the step
currently being executed

As the sequence runs,
the calibrator's display
will show progress as
elapsed time.

As the sequence runs,
the calibrator's display
will show progress as a
percent of its total
programmed duration

As the sequence runs, the
calibrator's display will show
progress as the time remaining
of its total programmed
duration

Figure A-5:
A-8

GENERATE
GPT
GPTPS
PURGE
STANDBY
DURATION
EXECSEQ
SETCCOUTPUT
MANUAL

Cycles through
list of sequence
commands

INS

DEL

YES
Inserts a new step

EDIT

NO
Edits programmed
parameters for selected
step (See Chapter 6 for
further instructions).

See Chapter 6 for further
instructions on programming each
of these commands

PRIMARY SETUP Menu - SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION Submenu
06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

SETUP

MAIN MENU

COMM

FLOW

DIAG1

VARS
ENTER PASSWORD: 818

ID
SETUP X.X
0

COM1

TARG

MACHINE ID:700 ID
0

COM2

STAT

ENTR EXIT

QUIET
COMPUTER
SECURITY
E, 7, 1
RS-485
MULTIDROP PROTOCOL
ENABLE MODEM
ERROR CHECKING
XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE FIFO
COMMAND PROMPT

300
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200

TEST

SETUP X.X

DIL1 F=1.980/1.950,

OFF

EDIT

PRNT

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X
0

See SECONDARY SETUP Menu
DIAG Submenu

P=24.31 PSIG
EXIT

Press to cycle through statistical
displays for...

JUMP

0) PHOTO_LAMP=[Value]DegC
1) O3_GEN_LAMP=[Value]DegC
2) O3_CONC_RANGE=[Value]PPB
3) O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY=[ON/OFF]
4) STD_TEMP=[Value] DegC
5) STD_PRESS=[Value] In-Hg
ENTER PASSWORD: 818
6) CLOCK_ADJ[HH:MM:SS]

BAUD RATE TEST
PORT

MODE
Toggle each as needed to set the ID code.

EDIT

DIL1
CAL1
CAL2

DIAG Menu is inactive while
instrument is in GENERATE
mode.

TARGET FLOW: 2.000 Lpm
.0

ENTR EXIT

Toggle as needed to set the target
TOTAL gas flow output rate for the
calibrator

Figure A-6:

06873B DCN6388

SECONDARY SETUP Menu - Basic

A-9

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Figure A-7:

A-10

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

SECONDARY SETUP Menu; DIAG Submenu – Basics

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

SETUP

MAIN MENU

DIAG6

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

SIGNAL I/O

ANALOG
OUTPUT

ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION

O3 GEN4
CALIBRATION

MFC
CONFIGURATION

AUTO LEAK
CHECK

PRESSURE
CALIBRATION

TEST CHAN
OUTPUT

Backpressure
Compensation

Initiates Internal leak check

Press ENTR
to start test

PHOTO FLOW
SENSOR CAL3

SET>

”

Any character
in the allowed
character set.
Up to 100
characters
long.

RS-232 interface command
prompt. Displayed only if enabled
with RS232_MODE variable.
Enclose value in double quotes
(") when setting from the RS-232
interface.

A-17

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Default
Value

Value
Range
NONE,

TEST_CHAN_ID

O3 PHOTO
MEAS,

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Description
Diagnostic analog output ID.
Enclose value in double quotes
(") when setting from the RS-232
interface.

O3 PHOTO
REF,
O3 GEN
REF,
REGULATO
R
PRESSURE
SAMPLE
PRESSURE,
SAMPLE
FLOW,
SAMPLE
TEMP,
PHOTO
LAMP TEMP,
O3 LAMP
TEMP,
CHASSIS
TEMP,
DCPS
VOLTAGE,
O3 PHOTO
CONC
PASS_ENABLE

—

OFF, ON

ON enables passwords.
OFF disables them.

DEF_CC_OUTPUT

—

“000000000000
”

Any string of
exactly 12
characters
consisting of
the digits 0 and
1 only.

Default contact closure output
pattern when not executing a
sequence. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting
from the RS-232 interface.

PHOTO_LAMP_POWE
R

4500

0–5000

Photometer lamp power setting.

LAMP_PWR_ENA
BLE

—

OFF, ON

ON enables photometer
lamp power cycling.
OFF disables it.

LAMP_PWR_PERIOD

Hours

0.01–1000

Photometer lamp power cycling
period.

LAMP_OFF_DELAY

Seconds

0.1

0.02–5

Length of time photometer lamp
is turned off.

DET_VALID_DELAY

Seconds

1–300

Delay until valid concentration is
computed.

REF_SDEV_LIMIT

0.1–100

Photometer reference standard
deviation must be below this limit
to switch out of startup mode.

PATH_LENGTH

41.96

0.01–99.999

Photometer detector path length.

A-18

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Setup Variable
BOX_SET

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Numeric
Units
ºC

Default
Value
30

Value
Range

Description

0–100

Internal box temperature set
point and warning limits.

Warnings:
5–45
GAS_MOL_WEIGHT

MolWt

1–99.999

Molar mass of sample gas for
computing concentrations by
weight instead of volume.

SERIAL_NUMBER

—

“00000000 ”

Any character
in the allowed
character set.
Up to 100
characters
long.

Unique serial number for
instrument.

DISP_INTENSITY

—

HIGH

HIGH,

Front panel display intensity.
Enclose value in double quotes
(") when setting from the RS-232
interface.

MED,
LOW,
DIM
I2C_RESET_ENABLE

—

OFF, ON

I2C bus automatic reset enable.

MFC_BUSY_TIME 4

ms.

10–1000

Time it takes for MFC to process
command.

CLOCK_FORMAT

—

“TIME=%H:%M:
%S”

Any character
in the allowed
character set.
Up to 100
characters
long.

Time-of-day clock format flags.
Enclose value in double quotes
(“) when setting from the RS-232
interface.
“%a” = Abbreviated weekday
name.
“%b” = Abbreviated month name.
“%d” = Day of month as decimal
number (01 – 31).
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format
(00 – 23).
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01
– 12).
“%j” = Day of year as decimal
number (001 – 366).
“%m” = Month as decimal
number (01 – 12).
“%M” = Minute as decimal
number (00 – 59).
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for
12-hour clock.
“%S” = Second as decimal
number (00 – 59).
“%w” = Weekday as decimal
number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0).
“%y” = Year without century, as
decimal number (00 – 99).
“%Y” = Year with century, as
decimal number.
“%%” = Percent sign.

06873B DCN6388

A-19

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Setup Variable
FACTORY_OPT

Numeric
Units
—

Default
Value
0

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Value
Range
0–65535

Description
Factory option flags. Add values
to combine options.
1 = permeation tube #1 installed
(do not enable dual gas outputs
option)
2 = O3 generator installed
4 = O3 photometer installed
8 = enable high concentration
16 = enable high pressure
diluent sensor
32 = O3 generator reference
detector installed (implies that O3
generator is installed)
64 = enable MFC flow correction
128 = enable dual gas outputs
(do not enable permeation tube
option)
256 = enable dual diluent inputs
2

512 = permeation tube #2
installed (do not enable O3
photometer option)
1024 = enable softwarecontrolled maintenance mode
2048 3 = enable Internet option
4096 = enable switch-controlled
maintenance mode
1

Dasibi emulation version only.

Dual permeation tube option.

iChip option (E-Series only).

I2C MFC option.

Low range option.

A-20

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3
Table A-2: Warning Messages, Revision D.3

Name 1

Message Text
Warnings

Description

WSYSRES

SYSTEM RESET

Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU
was reset.

WDATAINIT

DATA INITIALIZED

Data storage was erased.

WCONFIGINIT

CONFIG INITIALIZED

Configuration storage was reset to factory
configuration or erased.

WPHOTOLTEMP

PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING

Photometer lamp temperature outside of
warning limits specified by PHOTO_LAMP
variable.

WO3GENTEMP

O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING

O3 generator lamp temperature outside of
warning limits specified by
O3_GEN_LAMP variable.

WPERMTEMP1

PERM TUBE #1 TEMP WARNING

Permeation tube #1 temperature outside
of warning limits specified by
PERM_SET1 variable.

WPERMTEMP2 3

PERM TUBE #2 TEMP WARNING

Permeation tube #2 temperature outside
of warning limits specified by
PERM_SET2 variable.

WPHOTOREF

PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING

Photometer reference reading less than
2500 mV or greater than 4999 mV.

WLAMPSTABIL

PHOTO LAMP STABILITY WARNING

Photometer lamp reference step changes
occur more than 25% of the time.

WO3GENREF

O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING

O3 reference detector drops below 5 mV
during reference feedback O3 generator
control.

WREGPRESS

REGULATOR PRESSURE WARNING

Regulator pressure outside of warning
limits specified by REG_PRESS_LIM
variable.

WMFCPRESS

MFC PRESSURE WARNING

Any MFC pressure outside of warning
limits specified by PRESS_LIMIT variable.

WMFCFLOW

MFC FLOW WARNING

Any MFC drive less than 10% of full scale
or greater than full scale.

WMFCCAL

MFC CALIBRATION WARNING

Any MFC sensor offset greater than
allowable limit.

WO3PUMP

O3 PUMP WARNING

O3 pump failed to turn on within timeout
period specified by O3_PUMP_TIMEOUT
variable.

WOUTPUT

INVALID OUTPUT WARNING

An invalid output has been selected for
the requested gas generation. For
example, output B was selected when
generating ozone.

WREARBOARD

REAR BOARD NOT DET

Rear board was not detected during
power up.

WRELAYBOARD

RELAY BOARD WARN

Firmware is unable to communicate with
the relay board.

WVALVEBOARD

VALVE BOARD WARN

Firmware is unable to communicate with
the valve board.

WLAMPDRIVER

LAMP DRIVER WARN

Firmware is unable to communicate with
either the O3 generator or photometer
2
lamp I C driver chip.

06873B DCN6388

A-21

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Name 1

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Message Text

Description

WFRONTPANEL 6

FRONT PANEL WARN

Firmware is unable to communicate with
the front panel.

WMFCCOMM 4

MFC COMMUNICATION WARNING

Firmware is unable to communicate with
any MFC.

WANALOGCAL

ANALOG CAL WARNING

The A/D or at least one D/A channel has
not been calibrated.

The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.

O3 photometer stability measurement option.

Dual permeation tube option.

I2C MFCs.

Low range option.

E-Series only.

A-22

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Table A-3:

Name 1

Test Functions, Revision D.3

Message Text
Test Measurements

Description

Parmeter name in
T-Series
and in E-Series w/
software v. D.3
and higher.

Parameter name in earlier E-Series software
versions and test meas value

A-CAL

ACT CAL=0.0800 LPM

Actual cal. gas flow rate.

T-CAL

TARG CAL=0.0000 LPM

Target cal. gas flow rate.

A-DIL

ACT DIL=1.920 LPM

Actual diluent flow rate.

T-DIL

TARG DIL=0.000 LPM

Target diluent flow rate.

O3GENREF 6

O3 GEN REF=1000.0 MV

O3 generator reference detector reading.

O3FLOW 6

O3 FLOW=0.1050 LPM

O3 generator flow rate. Note: this is simply a constant,
specified by the O3_GEN_FLOW variable.

O3GENDRV 6

O3 GEN DRIVE=800.0 MV

O3 generator lamp drive output.

O3LAMPTMP 6

O3 LAMP TEMP=49.7 C

O3 generator lamp temperature.

CAL PRES

CAL PRESSURE=25.1 PSIG

Cal. gas pressure.

DIL PRES

DIL PRESSURE=25.1 PSIG

Diluent pressure.

REG PRES

REG PRESSURE=20.1 PSIG

Regulator pressure.

(n/a)

ACT=GENERATE 37 PPB O3

Actual concentration being generated, computed from
real-time inputs.

A-GAS

(n/a)

T-GAS ± 1%

T-GAS

(n/a)

A-O3 7

(n/a)

T-O3
(n/a)

T-O3 ± 1%

TARG=GENERATE 100 PPB O3

Target concentration to generate.

T-FLW

(n/a)

Target standard flow in LPM

BOX TMP

BOX TEMP=31.2 C

Internal chassis temperature.

PERM TUBE #1 TEMP=50.4 C

Permeation tube #1 temperature.

PERM TUBE #2 TEMP=50.4 C

Permeation tube #2 temperature.

PERM FLOW=0.1050 LPM

Permeation tube flow rate. This is a property of the
permeation tube (SETUP-GAS-PERM). Its value
depends on which permeation tube is in use.

PHOTO MEASURE=2998.8 MV

Photometer detector measure reading.

PHOTO REFERENCE=3000.0 MV

Photometer detector reference reading.

PHOTO FLOW=0.2978 LPM

Photometer sample flow rate.

PHOTO LAMP TEMP=52.6 C

Photometer lamp temperature.

PHOTO SPRESS=29.9 IN-HG-A

Photometer sample pressure.

PERM1 TMP
PERM2 TMP
PERMFLW

PH MEAS 7
PH REF

PH FLW 7
PH LTEMP
PH PRES

PHO STEMP

PHOTO STEMP=31.8 C

Photometer sample temperature.

PHO SLOPE 7

PHOTO SLOPE=1.000

Photometer slope computed during zero/span bench
calibration.

PH OFFST 7

PHOTO OFFSET=0.0 PPB

Photometer offset computed during zero/span bench
calibration.

PHOTOSTABIL 2

PHOTO STABIL=0.1 PPB

Photometer concentration stability (standard deviation of
25 bench concentration samples taken 10 seconds
apart).

06873B DCN6388

A-23

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Name 1

Message Text

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Description

TESTCHAN

TEST=2753.9 MV

Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected
with TEST_CHAN_ID variable.

CLOCKTIME

TIME=14:48:01

Current instrument time of day clock.

The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.

O3 photometer stability measurement option.

Dual permeation tube option.

I2C MFCs.

Low range option.

O3 generator option.

Photometer option.

A-24

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions
Table A-4:

Signal Name

Signal I/O Definitions 3

Bit or Channel
Number

Description

U11, J1004, control inputs, pins 1-6 = bits 0-5, read, default I/O address 321 hex
CONTROL_IN_1 –
CONTROL_IN_6

0–5

0 = input asserted
1 = de-asserted

6–7

Always 1

U14, J1006, control inputs, pins 1-6 = bits 0-5, read, default I/O address 325 hex
CONTROL_IN_7 –
CONTROL_IN_12

0–5

0 = input asserted
1 = de-asserted

6–7

Always 1

U17, J1008, control outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 321 hex
CONTROL_OUT_1 –
CONTROL_OUT_8

0–7

0 = output asserted
1 = de-asserted

U21, J1008, control outputs, pins 9-12 = bits 0-3, write, default I/O address 325 hex
CONTROL_OUT_9 –
CONTROL_OUT_12

0–3

0 = output asserted
1 = de-asserted

U7, J108, internal inputs, pins 9-16 = bits 0-7, read, default I/O address 322 hex
0–7

Spare

U8, J108, internal outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 322 hex
0–7

Spare

U24, J1017, A status outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK

0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode

ST_CAL_ACTIVE

Spare

0 = executing sequence
1 = not executing sequence

ST_DIAG_MODE

0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode

ST_TEMP_ALARM

0 = any temperature alarm
1 = all temperatures OK

ST_PRESS_ALARM

0 = any pressure alarm
1 = all pressures OK

6–7

Spare

U27, J1018, B status outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 324 hex
0–7

06873B DCN6388

Spare

A-25

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Signal Name

Bit or Channel
Number

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Description

Relay board digital output (PCF8575), write, default I2C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG

Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep
relay board active

VENT_VALVE

0 = vent valve open
1 = close

PERM_HTR_2

0 = permeation tube #2 heater on
1 = off

GPT_VALVE

3–4

Spare

0 = open GPT bypass valve
1 = close

PHOTO_REF_VALVE

0 = photometer valve in reference position
1 = measure position

O3_GEN_VALVE

0 = open O3 generator valve

O3_PUMP_ON

0 = pump on for photometer to measure O3

1 = close
1 = off
O3_DIVERT_VALVE

0 = open O3 divert valve
1 = close

OUTPUT_VALVE_B

0 = open output shut-off valve B

0 = open permeation tube #1 valve

1 = close
PERM_VALVE_1

1 = close
PERM_VALVE_2

0 = open permeation tube #2 valve
1 = close

PERM_HTR_1

0 = permeation tube #1 heater on

PHOTO_LAMP_HEATER

0 = O3 photometer lamp heater on

1 = off
1 = off
O3_GEN_HEATER

0 = O3 generator lamp heater on
1 = off

Valve board digital output (PCA9557), write, default I2C address 3A hex
VALVE_WATCHDOG

Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep
valve board active

CYL_VALVE_1

1 = open cylinder gas valve 1
0 = close

CYL_VALVE_2

1 = open cylinder gas valve 2
0 = close

CYL_VALVE_3

1 = open cylinder gas valve 3

CYL_VALVE_4

1 = open cylinder gas valve 4

0 = close
0 = close

A-26

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Signal Name
PURGE_VALVE

Bit or Channel
Number
5

Description
1 = open purge valve
0 = close

INPUT_VALVE

DIL_VALVE_2 5

1 = open input (zero-air) shut-off valve
0 = close
1 = open diluent valve #2
0 = open diluent valve #1
2

Front panel I C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex
MAINT_MODE

5 (input)

0 = maintenance mode
1 = normal mode

LANG2_SELECT

6 (input)

0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)

SEQUENCE_LED

8 (output)

0 = sequence LED on (executing sequence)
1 = off

AUTO_TIMER_LED

9 (output)

0 = automatic timer LED on (automatic sequence timer
enabled)
1 = off

FAULT_LED

10 (output)

0 = fault LED on
1 = off

AUDIBLE_BEEPER

14 (output)

0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)
1 = off

Rear board primary MUX analog inputs
PHOTO_DET

Photometer detector reading

O3_GEN_REF_DET

O3 generator reference detector reading

DIL_PRESS

Diluent pressure

CAL_PRESS

Cal. gas pressure

Temperature MUX

Ozone/perm tube pressure

O3_PERM_PRESS

6–7

Spare

MFC_FLOW_3 4

MFC 3 (cal. gas #2) flow output

REF_4096_MV

4.096V reference from MAX6241

PHOTO_FLOW

Photometer flow

PHOTO_SAMP_PRES

Photometer sample pressure

MFC_FLOW_1

MFC 1 (diluent) flow output

MFC_FLOW_2

MFC 2 (cal. gas #1) flow output

DAC loopback MUX

REF_GND

Ground reference

BOX_TEMP

Internal box temperature

PHOTO_SAMP_TEMP

Photometer sample temperature

PHOTO_LAMP_TEMP

Photometer lamp temperature

O3_GEN_TEMP

O3 generator lamp temperature

PERM_TEMP_1

Permeation tube #1 temperature

Permeation tube #2 temperature

Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs

PERM_TEMP_2

06873B DCN6388

A-27

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision D.3 (05623D DCN5839)

Signal Name

Bit or Channel
Number
6–7

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Description
Spare

Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs
DAC_CHAN_1

DAC channel 0 loopback

DAC_CHAN_2

DAC channel 1 loopback

DAC_CHAN_3

DAC channel 2 loopback

DAC_CHAN_4

DAC channel 3 loopback
Rear board analog outputs

MFC_DRIVE_1
MFC_DRIVE_2
MFC_DRIVE_3

TEST_OUTPUT

MFC 1 (diluent) flow drive

MFC 2 (cal. gas #1) flow drive

MFC 3 (cal. gas #2) flow drive

Test measurement output

I C analog output (AD5321), default I2C address 18 hex
PHOTO_LAMP_DRIVE

O3 photometer lamp drive (0–5V)

I C analog output (AD5321), default I2C address 1A hex
O3_GEN_DRIVE
1

O3 generator lamp drive (0–5V)

Must be enabled with a factory option bit.

Dual permeation tube option.

Triple-MFC option.

Dual diluent option.

A-28

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-5: MODBUS Register Map (05623D DCN5839)

APPENDIX A-5: MODBUS Register Map

MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)

Description

Units

MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers
(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read in high-word, low-word order; read-only)
0

Actual cal. gas flow rate

LPM

Actual diluent flow rate

LPM

Photometer measured ozone concentration

PPB

Ozone generator reference detector reading

Ozone generator flow rate

LPM

Ozone generator lamp drive

Ozone generator lamp temperature

°C

Cal. gas pressure

PSIG

Diluent pressure

PSIG

Regulator pressure

PSIG

Internal box temperature

°C

Permeation tube #1 temperature 3
3

°C

Permeation tube flow rate

Photometer detector measure reading

Photometer detector reference reading

Photometer sample flow rate

LPM

Photometer lamp temperature

°C

Photometer sample pressure

Inches Hg

Photometer sample temperature

°C

Photometer slope computed during zero/span bench calibration

—

Photometer offset computed during zero/span bench calibration

PPB

Ground reference

Precision 4.096 mV reference

Permeation tube #2 temperature

Ozone Gen Fraction 2

06873B DCN6388

LPM

mV
1

°C
—

A-29

APPENDIX A-5: MODBUS Register Map (05623D DCN5839)

MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

Description

Units

MODBUS Discrete Input Registers
(single-bit; read-only)
0

System reset warning

Box temperature warning

Photometer lamp temperature warning

O3 generator lamp temperature warning

Permeation tube #1 temperature warning 3

Photometer reference warning

Photometer lamp stability warning

O3 generator reference detector warning

Regulator pressure warning

Any MFC pressure outside of warning limits

Any MFC drive less than 10% of full scale or greater than full scale

Any MFC sensor offset greater than allowable limit

Rear board communication warning

Relay board communication warning

Valve board communication warning

O3 generator or photometer lamp I2C driver chip communication warning

Front panel communication warning

Firmware is unable to communicate with any MFC

Analog calibration warning

System is OK (same meaning as SYSTEM_OK I/O signal)

O3 generator not yet stabilized

Permeation tube #2 temperature warning 1

MODBUS Coil Registers
(single-bit; read/write)
00-99

Trigger execution of sequence whose name begins with “00” - “99”. Turning a coil on executes a
sequence. Turning a coil off does nothing. When reading coils, the value indicates which
sequence is executing. If a coil is on, the sequence is executing; if off the sequence is not
executing. Supports nested sequences, so multiple sequence coils may be on simultaneously.

100

Turning coil on turns on purge. Turning coil off does nothing. When reading coil, the value
indicates whether purge is active. If on, purge is active; if off, purge is not active. Purge may be
invoked within a sequence, so purge coil may be on at the same time as a sequence coil.

101

Turning coil on puts instrument in standby. Turning coil off does nothing. When reading coil, the
value indicates whether instrument is in standby mode. If on, instrument is in standby; if off,
instrument is not in standby.

200-211

Connected to the control outputs (CONTROL_OUT_1– CONTROL_OUT_12). These coils may
be turned both on and off. Reading the coils indicates the current state.

Dual permeation tube option.

Low range option.

Permeation tube option.

A-30

06873B DCN6388

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators (05623D DCN5839)

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators
Table A-5: Terminal Command Designators
COMMAND

ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX

? [ID]
LOGON [ID]

Display help screen and commands list
password

Establish connection to instrument

LOGOFF [ID]

T [ID]

W [ID]

C [ID]

D [ID]

V [ID]

DESCRIPTION

Terminate connection to instrument
SET ALL|name|hexmask

Display test(s)

LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]

Print test(s) to screen

name

Print single test

CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask

Disable test(s)

SET ALL|name|hexmask

Display warning(s)

LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]

Print warning(s)

name

Clear single warning

CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask

Clear warning(s)

ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2]

Enter calibration mode

ASEQ number

Execute automatic sequence

COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN

Compute new slope/offset

EXIT

Exit calibration mode

ABORT

Abort calibration sequence

LIST

Print all I/O signals

name[=value]

Examine or set I/O signal

LIST NAMES

Print names of all diagnostic tests

ENTER name

Execute diagnostic test

EXIT

Exit diagnostic test

RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode]

Reset instrument

LIST

Print setup variables

name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]]

Modify variable

name="value"

Modify enumerated variable

CONFIG

Print instrument configuration

MAINT ON|OFF

Enter/exit maintenance mode

MODE

Print current instrument mode

The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are optional
designators. The following key assignments also apply.

Table A-6:

Terminal Key Assignments

TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS
ESC

Abort line

CR (ENTER)

Execute command

Ctrl-C

Switch to computer mode
COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS

06873B DCN6388

LF (line feed)

Execute command

Ctrl-T

Switch to terminal mode

A-31

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators (05623D DCN5839)

T700, M700E Calibrator Manuals

This page intentionally left blank.

A-32

06873B DCN6388

APPENDIX B - Spare Parts

Note

Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by T-API may result in non
compliance with European standard EN 61010-1.

Note

Due to the dynamic nature of part numbers, please refer to the Website or call
Customer Service for more recent updates to part numbers.

06873B DCN6388

B-1

This page intentionally left blank.

B-2

06873B DCN6388

T700 Spare Parts List
PN 06852B DCN6014 03/10/2011
1 of 3 page(s)
Part Number
000940100
003290000
006120100
014540300
014550300
014570100
014900000
016590100
022710000
024710000
024720000
024730000
024750000
040010000
040030500
040030600
041200000
041200200
041240001
041270000
041280000
041300000
041440000
042010000
045230100
046740000
048190300
049290000
050490000
050500000
052400000
052910200
054690000
055020000
055210000
055220000
055240000
055270000
055560000
056440000
056450000
056970000
057230000
057360000

06873B DCN6388

Description
ORIFICE, 3 MIL, 03 GEN
THERMISTOR, BASIC (VENDOR ASSY)(KB)
ASSY, UV LAMP, OZONE GENERATOR
CONTROLLER, MFC, HFC-212, 100SCCM *
CONTROLLER, MFC, HFC-212, 10 SLM *
ASSY, INLET MANIFOLD, (KB)
ASSY, GPT
ASSY, GPT VALVE
ABSORPTION TUBE, QUARTZ, (KB)
ASSY, TUBING, CLEAR FEP 1/8" (TU1), 6FT
ASSY, TUBING, (B/F) TU0000002, 6FT
ASSY, TUBING, TU0000005, 6FT
ASSY, TYGON TUBING (B/F) TU0000009, 6FT
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X)
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (1X), OZONE OPT
PCA, DET PREAMP w/OP20
PCA, DET PREAMP w/OP20
MANIFOLD, DETECTOR, (KB)
LAMP BLOCK, (KB)
LAMP SPACER, (KB)
EXAUST MANIFOLD, (KB)
PCA, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR, OPTICAL BENCH
ASSY, SAMPLE THERMISTOR
PCA, RELAY CARD
ASSY, PUMP, 12VDC (OP63)
ASSY, RELAY/PS, CAL
CLIP, THERMISTOR HOLDER
ASSY, O3 GENERATOR W/BRKT & REG
ASSY, O3 GENERATOR, 5LPM
ASSY, BENCH UV LAMP, (BIR), CR *
ASSY, OPTICAL BENCH, CAL
PCA, VALVE DRIVER, M700E
ASSY, INLET MANIFOLD W/PCA
OPTION, PHOTOMETER
ASSY, VALVE, PHOTOMETER
OPTION, OZONE, CAL (KB)
ASSY, EXHAUST MANIFOLD, (KB)
ASSY, VALVE, VA59 W/DIODE, 5" LEADS
ASSY, VALVE (VA23)
ASSY, VALVE (VA32)
PCA, EXT O/P ADPTR, LDS, (OPT)
PCA, SINGLE VALVE DRIVER (OPTION)
ASSY, 3/8" VENT ADAPTER

B-3

T700 Spare Parts List
PN 06852B DCN6014 03/10/2011
2 of 3 page(s)
Part Number
057400001
057520001
057630000
058021400
058430001
058440001
060340001
061630000
063110000
064130000
066970000
067240000
067300000
067300100
067300200
067900000
068290100
068730000
068810000
069500000
072150000
CN0000073
CN0000458
CN0000520
CN0000640
FM0000004
FM0000007
FT0000013
FT0000036
FT0000040
FT0000056
FT0000085
FT0000134
FT0000151
FT0000192
FT0000278
FT0000279
FT0000321
FT0000332
FT0000364
FT0000429
HW0000005
HW0000120
HW0000149
HW0000327
HW0000328

B-4

Description
FRONT FERRULE,SS,1/4",SILCOSTEEL
FRONT FERRULE,SS, 1/8",SILCOSTEEL
ASSY, DUAL OUTPUT VALVE
PCA, E-SERIES MTHRBRD, M700E, GEN 5-I (ACCEPTS ACROSSER OR ICOP CPU)
FT 40 FITTING BODY, SILCOSTEEL COATED
FT 36 FITTING BODY, SILCOSTEEL COATED
FT 85 FITTING BODY, SILCOSTEEL COATED
ASSY, FILTER, DFU, DESORBER (SOAKED)
PCA, DC HEATER/THERM, 100W
ASSY, DC HEATER/THERM PCA, O3 GEN
PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB)
PCA, AUX-I/O BD, ETHERNET, ANALOG & USB
PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET
PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET & USB
LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB)
DOM, w/SOFTWARE, STD, T700 *
MANUAL, T700, OPERATORS
PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
PCA, SERIAL & VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
ASSY. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE
POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB)
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 12 PIN
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 10 PIN
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 14 PIN
FLOWMETER (KB)
REGULATOR, PRESSURE, 0-30PSI(KB)
CONNECTOR-M, T, 1/8" (KB)
TEE-TTT, SS, 1/4" (HK)
UNION, BULKHEAD, SS, 1/4" (HK)
TEE-TTT, SS, 1/8" (HK)
PORT CONNECTOR, SS, 1/4" (HK)
BLKHD, UNION, REDUCING, SS, 1/4-1/8 (HK
UNION, CROSS, TFE, 2-1/4", 2-1/8" KB
ELBOW, B, 1/8 X 1/4 TUBING
FEMALE COUPLING, 10-32, BRASS
HEX EXTENSION, B, 10-32 M-F
PORT CONNECTOR, SS, 1/8" (HK)
FITTING, 9 MIL, ZERO AIR FLOW
.003 ORIFICE, 10-32 X 10-32 W/ORING, BRA
ORIFICE, BARB, SS, 0.012"
FOOT
SHOCKMOUNT, GROMMET ISOLATOR
SEALING WASHER, #10
HEATSINK CLIP, TO-220
INSULATING THERMAL PAD, TO-220

06873B DCN6388

T700 Spare Parts List
PN 06852B DCN6014 03/10/2011
3 of 3 page(s)
Part Number
HW0000356
HW0000453
KIT000253
KIT000289
KIT000290
OP0000014
OP0000031
OR0000001
OR0000026
OR0000039
OR0000046
OR0000077
OR0000089
PS0000037
PS0000039
PS0000040
SW0000025
WR0000008

06873B DCN6388

Description
PAD, THERMAL, TO-220, W/ ADHV
SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37
AKIT, UV LAMP P/S PCA, 041660100
AKIT, UV LAMP P/S PCA, 041660500
LAMP WINDOW, OPTICAL BENCH
WINDOW, OPTICAL BENCH & OZONE GEN FEEDBACK
ORING, SAMPLE FLOW & OZONE GENERATOR
ORING, ABSORPTION TUBE
ORING, OPTICAL BENCH & OZONE GEN FEEDBACK
ORING, 2-019V
ORING, 2-018V
ORING, OPTICAL BENCH
PS, 40W SWITCHING, +5V, +/-15V(KB) *
PS, SWITCHING, 12V/7.5A (KB)
PS,EXT,AC/DC (90-264V/47-63HZ),12V/3.75A
SWITCH, POWER, CIRC BREAK, VDE/CE *(KB)
POWER CORD, 10A(KB)

B-5

T700
RECOMMENDED SPARES
STOCKING LEVELS
(Reference: 07565A DCN6306)

B-6

PART NO.
006120100
014540300
014550300
040010000
040030500
040030700
041200200
041660100
041660500
067240000
045230100
047020000
056440000
056450000
058021400
PS0000037
PS0000039
067900000
066970000
068810000
072150000

DESCRIPTION
ASSY, OZONE GEN LAMP
MASS FLOW CONTROLLER, 100CCM
MASS FLOW CONTROLLER, 10LPM
ASS, FAN, REAR PANEL
PCA, ;PRESS SENSORS (2X), 700E
PCA, PRESS SENSOR PHOTO OPT
PCA, DET. PREAMP w/OP20, O3 GEN
PCA, UV POWER SUPPLY, O3 GEN
PCA, UV POWER SUPPLY, OPT BENCH
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB)
PCA, RELAY CARD
ASSY, PUMP
VALVE, CYL PORTS, 2-WAY
VALVE, DILUTION PORT 2-WAY
PCA, MTHRBRD, CAL, GEN 5-I
POWER SUPPLY, +5, +15, -15
POWER SUPPLY, 12V
LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB)
PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P
PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE

022710000
041200000
041440000
042010000
052400000

PHOTOMETER
ABSORPTION TUBE, QUARTZ
PCA, DET. PREAMP w/OP20, BENCH
PCA, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR
THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY
ASSY, BENCH UV LAMP, (BIR), CR *

1
*
*
*
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
*
*
*
*

2-5
*
*
*
1
*
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
*
*
*
*

*
*
1
1
*

1
*
1
1
*

UNITS
6-10 11-20
1
2
*
*
*
*
2
4
*
1
2
4
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
1
2
*
*
2
4
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
1
1
1
1
2

2
*
2
2
1

4
1
4
4
2

21-30
4
1
1
8
2
8
2
2
2
2
4
1
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3

8
2
8
8
4

06873B DCN6388

Appendix C
Warranty/Repair Questionnaire
T700, M700E
(05625B DCN5798)
CUSTOMER:_______________________________

PHONE: _____________________________________

CONTACT NAME: __________________________

FAX NO. _____________________________________

SITE ADDRESS:____________________________________________________________________________
MODEL TYPE: ______________ SERIAL NO.:_________________ FIRMWARE REVISION: _____________
Are there any failure messages? _______________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________

(Continue on back if necessary)

PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE (Depending on options installed, not all test parameters shown will
be available in your calibrator):

PARAMETER
Name in E-Series software
versions prior to v.C.1.

Name in T-Series and in
E-series w/software
v. D.3 and higher

ACT CAL

A-CAL

LPM*

TARG CAL ± 1%

TARG CAL

T-CAL

LPM*

0.001 – 0.100 SLPM

ACT DIL

A-DIL

LPM*

TARG DIL ± 1%

LPM*

0.01 – 10 SLPM

TARG DIL

T-DIL

O3 GEN REF
O3 FLOW

O3GENREF

O3FLOW

O3 GEN DRIVE

O3 LAMP TEMP

O3LAMPTMP
CAL PRES

DIL PRESSURE

DIL PRES
REG PRES

REG PRESSURE

LPM*

O3GENDRV

CAL PRESSURE

mV
1

ºC

ACT

ACCEPTABLE VALUE

0 – 5000mV
0.100 ± 0.025 SLPM
0 – 5000mV
48 ± 1ºC

PSI

25 – 35PSI

PSI

25 – 35PSI

PSI

20 ± 1PSI
TARG ± 1%

(n/a)

T-GAS ± 1%

A-GAS
T-GAS
A-O3 1
T-O3 1

(n/a)
(n/a)
(n/a)
(n/a)

T-O3 ± 1%

TARG

(n/a)
T-FLW

(n/a)
BOX TEMP
PERM FLOW

LPM*

BOX TMP

PERM TUBE #1 TEMP
3
2

PHOTO REFERENCE
PHOTO FLOW

PERM1 TMP
PH MEAS

PH REF
PH FLW

PHOTO LAMP TEMP
PHOTO SPRESS
PHOTO STEMP

PHOTO SLOPE

PHOTO OFFSET

2
2

PH PRES

AMBIENT ± 5ºC

ºC

50 ± 1ºC
2500 – 4800mV

2500 – 4800mV

ºC

IN-HG
2

PH SLOPE

PH OFFST

If photometer option installed.

0.100 ± 0.025 SLPM

LPM
2

PH STEMP

ºC
LPM*

PH LTEMP

If ozone generator option installed.

PERM FLW

PHOTO MEASURE

RECORDED VALUE

ºC

0.720 – 0.880LPM
58 ± 1ºC
AMBIENT ± 1 IN-HG
AMBIENT ± 3ºC
0.85-1.15

PPB
3

0 ±10 PPB

If permeation tube installed.

*Standard flow

TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190
FAX: (858) 657-9816

06873B DCN6388

C-1

Appendix C
Warranty/Repair Questionnaire
T700, M700E
(05625B DCN5798)

What is measured photometer flow rate _____________________________________________________cc/min
What is measured O3 generator flow rate? ___________________________________________________cc/min
what is the pressure change during the AUTO LEAK CHECK procedure? ____________________________ psi
What are the failure symptoms? ________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
What tests have you done trying to solve the problem? ______________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Thank you for providing this information. Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the
problem that you are encountering.
OTHER NOTES: ____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________

C-2

06873B DCN6388

APPENDIX D – Wire List and Electronic Schematics

06873B DCN6388

D-1

This page intentionally left blank.

D-2

06873B DCN6388

Interconnect List T700
(Reference: 069140100A DCN5870)

Revision Description
A
Production Release

Cable
Part #

Signal

Checked
KV

CONNECTION FROM
Assembly
PN

036490100 CBL, AC POWER
AC Line
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Neutral
Power Entry
CN0000073
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
AC Neutral Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
AC Neutral Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
AC Neutral Switched
Power Switch
SW0000025
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
038290000 CBL, DC POWER TO MOTHERBOARD
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
+5V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
Chassis Gnd
Relay Board
045230100
041050000 CBL, KEYBOARD TO MOTHERBOARD
Kbd Interupt
LCD Interface Bd
066970000
DGND
LCD Interface Bd
066970000
SDA
LCD Interface Bd
066970000
SCL
LCD Interface Bd
066970000
Shld
LCD Interface Bd
066970000
041760100 CBL, DC POWER, TYPE 2
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
+5V
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
042790100 CBL, HEATER/THERMISTOR
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
+5VAVA
Motherboard
058021400
THERMISTOR 3
Motherboard
058021400
+5VAVA
Motherboard
058021400
THERMISTOR 2
Motherboard
058021400
THERMISTOR 4
Motherboard
058021400
+5VAVA
Motherboard
058021400
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
046710000 CBL, MOTHERBOARD TO XMITTER BD (MULTIDROP OPTION)
GND
Motherboard
058021100
RX0
Motherboard
058021100
RTS0
Motherboard
058021100
TX0
Motherboard
058021100
CTS0
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND0
Motherboard
058021100
RTS1
Motherboard
058021100
CTS1/485Motherboard
058021100
RX1
Motherboard
058021100
TX1/485+
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND1
Motherboard
058021100
RX1
Motherboard
058021100
TX1/485+
Motherboard
058021100
RS-GND1
Motherboard
058021100

06873B DCN6388

J/P

L
N

L
N
L
N
L
N

Assembly

Date
10/4/2010

CONNECTION TO
PN

DCN
5870

J/P

SW0000025
SW0000025
SW0000025

Power Switch
Power Switch
Shield
Chassis
PS2 (+12)
PS2 (+12)
PS2 (+12)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
Relay Board
Relay Board
Relay Board

L
N

PS0000039
PS0000039
PS0000039
PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000037
045230100
045230100
045230100

J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1

1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2

J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7
J7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400

J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15
J15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

J1
J1
J1
J1
J1

7
2
5
6
10

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400

J106
J106
J106
J106
J106

1
8
2
6
5

J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8
J8

1
2
4
5
6
7
8

PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS2 (+12)
PS2 (+12)

PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000039
PS0000039

J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2

3
1
6
4
5
5
3

J19
J19
J27
J27
J27
J27
J27
J27
J14
J14

1
2
6
13
7
14
12
5
2
1

Lamp HTR/Thrm
Lamp HTR/Thrm
Lamp HTR/Thrm
Lamp HTR/Thrm
Sample Therm
Sample Therm
O3 Gen HTR/Therm
O3 Gen HTR/Therm
O3 Gen HTR/Therm
O3 Gen HTR/Therm

041440000
041440000
041440000
041440000
042010000
042010000
041440100
041440100
041440100
041440100

P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12
P12

2
14
13
12
11
10
8
6
9
7
5
9
7
5

Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop
Xmitter bd w/Multidrop

069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000

1
2
3
4
1
2
6
5
2
1
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4

2
14
13
12
11
10
8
6
9
7
5
9
7
5

D-3

Interconnect List T700
(Reference: 069140100A DCN5870)

CONNECTION FROM
Cable
Signal
Assembly
PN
Part #
051790000 CBL, POWER & SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
CH1
Motherboard
058021400
AGND
Motherboard
058021400
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
VCC
Relay Board
045230100
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
VCC
Relay Board
045230100
SDA
CAL1
Digital MFC
SCL
CAL1
Digital MFC
DGND
CAL1
Digital MFC
DGND
CAL1
Digital MFC
VCC
CAL1
Digital MFC
SDA
CAL1
Digital MFC
SCL
CAL1
Digital MFC
DGND
CAL1
Digital MFC
SDA
CAL 2
Digital MFC
SCL
CAL 2
Digital MFC
DGND
CAL 2
Digital MFC
VCC
Relay Board
045230100
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
VCC
Relay Board
045230100
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
CH6
Motherboard
058021400
CH11
Motherboard
058021400
CH12
Motherboard
058021400
CH14
Motherboard
058021400
CH13
Motherboard
058021400
CH9
Motherboard
058021400
Chassis
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
DAC0V
Motherboard
058021400
AGND
Motherboard
058021400
Chassis
DAC2V
Motherboard
058021400
AGND
Motherboard
058021400
DAC1V
CAL1
Analog MFC
AGND
CAL1
Analog MFC
CAL1
Analog MFC
CH2
Motherboard
058021400
AGND
Motherboard
058021400
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
CH3
Motherboard
058021400
CH4
Motherboard
058021400
054840000 CBL, VALVE DRIVER & PUMP POWER
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100

D-4

J/P

J109
J109
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J11
J12
J12

6
12
4
6
7
8
1
2
1
2
8
7
6
1
3
8
7
6
8
7
6
2
1
2
1
6
5
4
3
4
2
4
3
1
2
5

J9
J9
J9
J9
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J109
J110
J110
J110
J110
J110
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J9
J22
J22
J22
J22

J109
J109
J13
J13
J13
J13
J109
J109
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4
J4

Assembly

CONNECTION TO
PN

J/P

J3
J3
J3
J3

J22
J22

1
4
2
3
1
2
2
3
8
1
5
6
10
1
2
8
7
6
8
7
6
3
1
3
1
9
12
11
3
6
4
5
2
6
6
6
7
9
11
12
9
11
12
14
5
7
14
5
4
9
1
4
3
2
3
6
4
2

Bench Det
Bench Det
Bench Det
Bench Det
Fan
Fan
LCD Interface Bd
LCD Interface Bd
LCD Interface Bd
LCD Interface Bd
LCD Interface Bd
LCD Interface Bd
LCD Interface Bd
Relay Board
Relay Board
DIL1
DIL1
DIL1
DIL1
DIL1
DIL1
DIL1
DIL1
CAL 2
CAL 2
CAL1
CAL1
CAL1
Photo Press/Flo
Photo Press/Flo
Photo Press/Flo
Photo Press/Flo
Photo Press/Flo
CAL1
DIL1
CAL2
CAL2
6 CAL2
4 CAL2
3 CAL2
6 DIL1
4 DIL1
5 DIL1
5 DIL1
7 DIL1
DIL1
3 CAL2
8 CAL2
14 Motherboard
5 Motherboard
7 Chassis
5 IZS DET
11 IZS DET
6 IZS DET
4 IZS DET
5 Gas Flow PCA
4 Gas Flow PCA
4 Gas Flow PCA
3 Gas Flow PCA

041200000
041200000
041200000
041200000
040010000
040010000
066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000
045230100
045230100
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Digital MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
040030600
040030600
040030600
040030600
040030600
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
Analog MFC
058021400
058021400
041200200
041200200
041200200
041200200
040030500
040030500
040030500
040030500

J3
J3
J3
J3
J1
J1
J1
J1

1
2
3
4
5
6

055220000
055220000
055220000
055220000
047020000
047020000

1
2
1
2
1
2

Photo Ref Valve
Photo Ref Valve
O3 Valve
O3 Valve
Pump
Pump

J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J14
J9
J9

J1
J1
J1
J1
J1

06873B DCN6388

Interconnect List T700
(Reference: 069140100A DCN5870)

CONNECTION FROM
Cable
Signal
Assembly
PN
Part #
056310000 CBL, I2C SIGNAL
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
SCL
Bench Lamp Supply
041660500
SDA
Bench Lamp Supply
041660500
SCL
Bench Lamp Supply
041660500
SDA
Bench Lamp Supply
041660500
+15V
Bench Lamp Supply
041660500
AGND
Bench Lamp Supply
041660500
+12VRET
Valve Driver Board
054690000
+12V
Valve Driver Board
054690000
DGND
Valve Driver Board
054690000
VCC
Valve Driver Board
054690000
SCL
Valve Driver Board
054690000
SDA
Valve Driver Board
054690000
SCL
Valve Driver Board
054690000
SDA
Valve Driver Board
054690000
Shield
Motherboard
058021400
067370000 CBL, I2C TO AUX I/O PCA (ANALOG IN OPTION)
ATXMotherboard
058021400
ATX+
Motherboard
058021400
LED0
Motherboard
058021400
ARX+
Motherboard
058021400
ARXMotherboard
058021400
LED0+
Motherboard
058021400
LED1+
Motherboard
058021400
067380000 CBL, CPU COM to AUX I/O (USB OPTION)
RXD1
CPU PCA
067240000
DCD1
CPU PCA
067240000
DTR1
CPU PCA
067240000
TXD1
CPU PCA
067240000
DSR1
CPU PCA
067240000
GND
CPU PCA
067240000
CTS1
CPU PCA
067240000
RTS1
CPU PCA
067240000
RI1
CPU PCA
067240000
067380000 CBL, CPU COM to AUX I/O (MULTIDROP OPTION)
RXD
CPU PCA
067240000
DCD
CPU PCA
067240000
DTR
CPU PCA
067240000
TXD
CPU PCA
067240000
DSR
CPU PCA
067240000
GND
CPU PCA
067240000
CTS
CPU PCA
067240000
RTS
CPU PCA
067240000
RI
CPU PCA
067240000
067390000 CBL, CPU ETHERNET TO AUX I/O
ATXCPU PCA
067240000
ATX+
CPU PCA
067240000
LED0
CPU PCA
067240000
ARX+
CPU PCA
067240000
ARXCPU PCA
067240000
LED0+
CPU PCA
067240000
LED1
CPU PCA
067240000
LED1+
CPU PCA
067240000
067410000 CBL, CPU USB TO LCD INTERFACE PCA
GND
CPU PCA
067240000
LUSBD3+
CPU PCA
067240000
LUSBD3CPU PCA
067240000
VCC
CPU PCA
067240000

06873B DCN6388

J/P

Assembly

J5
J5
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J107

4
3
3
4
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
4
3
6
3
6
6

IZS Lamp Supply
IZS Lamp Supply
IZS Lamp Supply
IZS Lamp Supply
Motherboard
Motherboard
Relay Board
Relay Board
Relay Board
Relay Board
Relay Board
Relay Board
Relay Board
Relay Board
IZS Lamp Supply
IZS Lamp Supply
Relay Board

J106
J106
J106
J106
J106
J106
J106

1
2
3
4
5
6
8

CONNECTION TO
PN

J/P

041660100
041660100
041660100
041660100
058021400
058021400
045230100
045230100
045230100
045230100
045230100
045230100
045230100
045230100
041660100
041660100
045230100

J1
J1
J1
J1
J107
J107
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J10
J3
J3
J1
J1
J3

1
2
3
4
3
5
4
3
7
8
1
2
1
2
3
4
5

Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O

067300000
067300000
067300000
067300000
067300000
067300000
067300000

J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2

1
2
3
4
5
6
8

COM1 1
COM1 2
COM1 3
COM1 4
COM1 5
COM1 6
COM1 7
COM1 8
COM1 10

AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA
AUX I/O PCA

0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02
0673000 or -02

J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10

COM1 1
COM1 2
COM1 3
COM1 4
COM1 5
COM1 6
COM1 7
COM1 8
COM1 10

069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000
069500000

J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O
Aux I/O

067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100
067300100

J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2

USB
USB
USB
USB

8
6
4
2

LCD Interface PCA
LCD Interface PCA
LCD Interface PCA
LCD Interface PCA

066970000
066970000
066970000
066970000

JP9
JP9
JP9
JP9

D-5

Interconnect List T700
(Reference: 069140100A DCN5870)

Cable
Part #
06746

WR256

D-6

Signal

CONNECTION FROM
Assembly
PN

CBL, MOTHERBOAD TO CPU
RXD(0)
CPU PCA
RTS(0)
CPU PCA
TXD(0)
CPU PCA
CTS(0)
CPU PCA
GND(0)
CPU PCA
RXD(1)
CPU PCA
RTS(1)
CPU PCA
TXD(1)
CPU PCA
CTS(1)
CPU PCA
GND(1)
CPU PCA
485+
CPU PCA
485CPU PCA
GND
CPU PCA
Shield
CBL, XMITTER TO INTERFACE
LCD Interface

J/P

067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000
067240000

COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
CN5
CN5
CN5

1
8
4
7
6
1
8
4
7
6
1
2
3

066970000

J15

CONNECTION TO
PN

J/P

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400
058021400

J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
9
7
5
2

Transmitter Board

068810000

Assembly

06873B DCN6388

D-7

R1
SEE TABLE
C1
D

100pf
-15V
R6
1.0K

C4
0.1uf
U1

R2
R3
1.0K

R4
5K

-15V

4
1

PHOTOCELL
D1
2

1.0K

OPA124

PHOTO_OUT

C7
N.P.

+15V

C3
1.0uF

TP1
TEST_PLUG

R5
100

VR1
5K

+15V
C

VCC

C5
0.1uf

+ C2
1.0uf

-15V

OUT

REF_2.5V
PHOTO_OUT

C6
0.1uf

VR2
LT1460S3-2.5
GND

+15V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

U2
GND
VCC
REF+
REFIN+
INGND
GND

GND
GND
F0
SCK
SDO
CS
GND
GND

LTC2413
B

MICROFIT

+15V
VCC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

VCC
C8
0.1

PCA VERSION TABLE
PCA#
04120-0000
04120-0200

R1
4.99M
2.0M

The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest confidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.

1
D-8

APPROVALS
DRAWN
CHECKED

DATE

PCA, UV DETECTOR PREAMP
USA

A
APPROVED

SIZE DRAWING NO.

REVISION

04420

LAST MOD.

SHEET

3-Aug-2004

4
06873B DCN6388

R1
30R, 50W

TH1

J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
HEADER 6

THERMISTOR
C

Rev

Date

Change Description

Eng

8/1/02

Initial release for PCA schematic

06873B DCN6388

APPROVALS

DATE

SCH, DC HEATER/THERMISTOR

DRAWN

A
CHECKED

SIZE

APPROVED

LAST MOD.

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

04422

A
SHEET

1-Aug-2002

D-9

TP2
TEST_PLUG
1
2
3
4

+15V

4.7K, 2W

RP2D
4.7K

TP4
TEST_PLUG

C2
0.1

C3
+ 220

100

D1
1N4148

D2
1N4148

IRF520
Q3

5.1K

1N4148
D5

1N4148
D6

1N4148

R6
330

TP1
TEST_PLUG
1

AD5321-RM8

RP2A
4.7K

C
7

C5
.01

+15V

3
R12
R13

R1
2.21K

11
14

C7
1.0UF

8
1

+15V

4
C8
0.1

SYNC

OUTPUT A

VREF

NONINV. INPUT

OUPUT B
SOFT START

CT
DISCHARGE

INV. INPUT
SHUTDOWN
OSC. OUTPUT

RT
GROUND
COMP

VREF

2
5
R15

150

6
12
9

R16
3.9K

C11

C12

.0047

0.1

U2
SG3525

LM358
+15V

LM4040CIM3

U1A

C9
0.1

+15V

VCC

22
VR2

R14
10

+15V

RP2B
4.7K

TP3
TEST_PLUG

+15V

U1B
LM358

8
7
6
5

GND
SDA
SCL
PD

Vdd
A0
A1
Vout

RP2C
4.7K
C6
.033

1
2
3
4

JP1
JUMPER2

IRF520
Q2

LAMP OUTPUT

6
VCC

R7
3.9K

.01

HEADER 4

VCC

T1
PE-6196

TIP126
Q1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

C10
0.1

C13
0.1

+ C1
470

NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING PCA'S:
PCA#
04166-0000
A

D-10

CHANGE NOTES

NOTE
M400E BENCH AND IZS LAMP SUPPLY
SHUNT INSTALLED IN J1 FOR BENCH SUPPLY
SHUNT NOT INSTALLED IN J1 FOR IZS SUPPLY

REV.

DATE

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

INITIAL

8/1/02

INITIAL RELEASE

APPROVALS

DATE

SCH, UV LAMP DRIVER, M450
A

DRAWN

KL
CHECKED

3/4/97
SIZE

B
APPROVED

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

04421

LAST MOD.

SHEET

1-Aug-2002

06873B DCN6388

+15V

R2
1.1K

S1
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

1
2
3
4
5
6

VR2
3

C2
1.0UF
1

TP4
TP5
S1/S4_OUT S2_OUT

LM4040CIZ

TP3
S3_OUT

TP2
10V_REF

TP1
GND
3
2
1

S2
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

1
2
3
4
5
6

+15V

6
5
4

MINIFIT6
+15V

R1
499
S3
FLOW SENSOR
FM_4

1
2
3

+15V

1
2
3
4

C1
1.0UF
1

CN_647 X 3

VR1

LM4040CIZ

C3
1.0

CON4

06873B DCN6388

APPROVALS

DATE

SCH, PCA 04003, PRESS/FLOW, 'E' SERIES

DRAWN

A
CHECKED

SIZE

APPROVED

LAST MOD.

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

04354

D
SHEET

3-Dec-2007

D-11

5
6
General Trace Width Requirements
1. Vcc (+5V) and I2C VCC should be 15 mil
2. Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils
3. +12V and +12V return should be 30 mils
4. All AC lines (AC Line, AC Neutral, RELAY0 - 4, All signals on JP2) should be 30 mils wide, with 120 mil
isolation/creepage distance around them
5. Traces between J7 - J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils.
6. Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils.

AC_Line

J1
1
2
3
4
4 PIN

AC_Line
AC_Neutral

AC_Neutral
RELAY0
VCC

RELAY1
RN1
330

R1
R2
2.2K 2.2K

RELAY0

P00
P01
P02
P03
P04
SCL P05
SDA P06
P07
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

SLD-RLY

YEL
RL0

YEL
RL1

GRN
VA0

GRN
VA1

GRN
VA2

RED
YEL
RL2

D10
GRN
VA3

IO3
IO4

1
IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
IO14
IO15

IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
IO14
IO15

R5
10K

D-12

IN 4
OUT4
IN 3
K
ENABLE OUT 3
IN 2
OUT 2
IN 1
K
OUT 1

U2D
R6
10K

VLV_ENAB

VALVE_POWER
U5
1
2
3
6
7
8

1
+

2 1

R4
1M

C5
10/16

C4
10/16

U2E

C16

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

J12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

J13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH
2

TP3
AGND

TP4
+15V

TP5
-15V

SPARE
J11

TP2
+5V

SYNC DEMOD
J10

TP6
+12RT

CON10THROUGH

VALVE1
VALVE2

VALVE3

C6
2000/25

DD2
15V TVS

find low ESR electroytic
+12RET

TP7
+12V
REV
B

DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

22 uF

TP1
DGND

VALVE0

8 PIN

WTCDG OVR

MTHR BRD
J8

J4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

UDN2540B(16)

D17
DL4148

MAX693

16
15
14
10
9

U2C

I2C_Vcc

JP4
1
2
3

C3
1

DD1
6A RECTIFIER

VCC
3

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

F2
4A PTC INTERRUPTOR

DD4
6A RECTIFIER

U2B

IRF7205

VBATT
RESET
VOUT
RESET'
VCC
WDO'
GND
CD IN'
BATT_ONCD OUT'
LOW LINE' WDI
OSC IN
PFO'
OSC SEL
PFI

4A PTC INTERRUPTOR

SN74HC04
VCC

KEYBRD
J7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

+12V

U2A

TP12

DC PWR IN
J5
DGND
1
VCC
2
AGND
3
+15V
4
AGND
5
-15V
6
+12RET
7
+12V
8
EGND
9
CHS_GND
10
CON10THROUGH

CTRL-2

C2
0.001

COMMON2
LOAD2
TS2
RELAY2

AC_Neutral

JP3
1 2
HEADER 1X2

COMMON1
LOAD1
TS1
RELAY1

CTRL-1

IO3
IO4

U4
C

TS0
TS1
TS2

SLD-RLY

J2 16 PIN
1
2
RELAY0
3
4
5
6
7
RELAY1
8
9
10
11
12
RELAY2
13
14
15
16

CTRL-0

PCF8575

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

R3
20K

VCC

COMMON0
LOAD0
TS0
RELAY0

22
23

A0
A1
A2
INT

21
2
3
1

RELAY2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

VCC

TP11

JP2
Heater Config Jumper

GND
GND
GND
GND

TP10

RELAY2

I2C_Vcc
3

D1
WDOG

Vss

CON5

13
12
5
4

SCL
SDA
INT

RELAY1

J3
1
2
3
4
5

SLD-RLY

Vdd

C1
0.1

I2C_Vcc

1
JP1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HEADER 4X2

AUTH
CAC

DATE
10/3/02

CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX

RJ
RT

5/16/07
02/15/11

Add alternate thermocouple connectors
Add C20, C21, C22, TP10, TP11, TP12

+5V
AGND

D
E

+15V
-15V

+12RT
+12V

Title
Size
B
Date:
File:

DCN:6161
Printed documents are uncontrolled
4

Teledyne API
Number

Revision
04524

7/11/2011
Sheet 1of 3
N:\PCBMGR\..\04524-E_p1.schDoc Drawn By:
6

06873B DCN6388

Aux Relay Connector
AC_Line

AC_Line

JP6
Heater Config Jumper

RELAY4

RN2
330

COMMON3
LOAD3
TS3
RELAY3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

RELAY3

TS3
TS4

RELAY3
1

RELAY4

2
AC_Neutral

AC_Neutral

I2C_Vcc
3

I2C_Vcc

COMMON4
LOAD4
TS4
RELAY4

JP7

SLD-RLY

5
4
3
2
1

D6
YEL

D11
GRN

D12
GRN

D13
GRN

D14
GRN

D15
GRN

Standard Pumps
60 Hz: 3-8
50 Hz: 2-7, 5-10

D16
GRN

D5
YEL

JP7 Configuration

VA5

VA4

RL4

VA6

VA7

TR0

TR1

RL3

World Pumps
60Hz/100-115V: 3-8, 4-9, 2-7
50Hz/100-115V: 3-8, 4-9, 2-7, 5-10
60Hz/220-240V: 3-8, 1-6
50Hz/220-240V: 3-8, 1-6, 5-10

IO3 IO3
IO4 IO4
IO10 IO10
IO11 IO11
IO12 IO12
IO13 IO13

10
9
8
7
6

PUMP
J20

MINI-FIT 10

1
2
3
4

AC_Neutral
AC_Line

AC_Line

CTRL-3

J18 16 PIN
1
2
RELAY3
3
4
5
6
7
RELAY4
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

CTRL-4

VCC

2
SN74HC04

16
15
14
10
9

VLV_ENAB
8

13
12
5
4

GND
GND
GND
GND

U3D

IN 4
OUT4
IN 3
K
ENABLE OUT 3
IN 2
OUT 2
IN 1
K
OUT 1
VCC

U3A
U6
1
2
3
6
7
8

UDN2540B(16)

U3B
U3E
IO14 IO14

4
11

VALVE_POWER
J6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
DD3 C17
+
13
15V TVS
14

Valve4
Valve5
Valve6
Valve7

22 uF

CON14
VCC
14

U3C

IO15 IO15

U3F

+12RET

MT5 MF1 MF2 MF3 MT6

12
J19
1
2

VCC

+12V
C13
0.1

MINIFIT-2

U2F

X1 X2 X3

Q2
IRL3303
12

J14
1
2

MTK1

MTK2

+12V

MINIFIT-2
Q4
IRL3303

Q3
IRL3303

Use 50 mil traces
+12V

+12RET

DCN:6161
Printed documents are uncontrolled
1

06873B DCN6388

J21
1
2

Title

Teledyne API
Size
B
Date:
File:

MINIFIT-2

Number

Revision
04524

7/11/2011
Sheet 2of 3
N:\PCBMGR\..\04524-E_p2.schDoc Drawn By:
6

D-13

+15V

TC1_GND
8

OPA2277
C10
0.1

C20
0.01

0.01

R-

Gnd

0.1

R10
C22
100pF

TC1_JGAINA
TC1_5MVA
TC1_JCOMPA
TC1_KCOMPA
TC1_GNDTCA
TC2_JGAINA
TC2_5MVA
TC2_JCOMPA
TC2_KCOMPA
TC2_GNDTCA
TC1_JGAINB
TC1_5MVB
TC1_JCOMPB
TC1_KCOMPB
TC1_GNDTCB
TC2_JGAINB
TC2_5MVB
TC2_JCOMPB
TC2_KCOMPB
TC2_GNDTCB

LT1025

TC2_KCOMPA

R20
3M
F6
1/8 AMP FUSE

U7B

R24
R18

TC2_GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

TC2_JCOMPA

TC2_GNDTCA

TC1_JGAINB

ZR6
3V

+15V

R17

JP5
MICROFIT-20

R9
10K

TC PROGRAMMING SOCKET

* GROUNDED THERMOCOUPLES ARE EXPECTED BY DEFAULT
No extra connections are necessary for grounded thermocouples
* FOR UNGROUNDED THERMOCOUPLES
short TCX_GNDTCA to TCX_GNDTCB
* FOR K THERMOCOUPLE:
1) Install CN0000156 for thermocouple connector
2) Short only TCX_KCOMPA to TCX_KCOMPB on TC Programming Plug
4) Leave TCX_JCOMPX pins of the plug unconnected
* FOR J THERMOCOUPLE:
1) Install CN0000155 for thermocouple connector
2) Short TCX_JCOMPA to TCXJCOMPB on TC Programming Plug
3) Short TCX_JGAINA to TCX_JGAINB on TC Programming Plug
4) Leave TCX_KCOMPX pins of the plug unconnected
* DEFAULT OUTPUT IS 10 mV PER DEG C
For 5 mV per deg C output, short TCX_5MVA TO TCX_5MVB

6.81K

R22
1k

OPA2277
C15
0.01

R26
14.3K

2
Vin

U10
TOUT 3

Gnd

C14
0.1

TC2_JCOMPB

TC2_KCOMPB

R-

R8
20K
TC2_JGAINB

0.01

TC2_GND

4.7V

C11
TC2_JGAINA

THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR
HAMITHERM

ZR4

10K

TC1_5MVB

R14
1M

R28
TC2_5MVA

TC2_5MVB

5K
CW

F5
1/8 AMP FUSE
R16
10K

TC1_JGAINA

TC1_5MVA

-15V

ZR5

-15V

2
Vin

U8
TOUT 3

J16A
- 2
+ 1

R7
20K

J17
1
2
3
4
MICROFIT-4

C8
R11

4.7V

+15V

THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR
HAMITHERM

THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR
OMEGA
J16
- 2
+ 1

R25
14K

ZR1
3V

TC1_GND

ZR3

10K

TC1_GNDTCA

R13

F3
1/8 AMP FUSE

ZR2
3V

C21
0.01

R21
1k

U7A

F4
1/8 AMP FUSE

R15
10K

0.1

C12
0.01

TC1_JCOMPA

R19
3M

THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR
OMEGA
J15
- 2
+ 1
J15A
- 2
+ 1

6.81K

-15V

R23

TC1_KCOMPA

R12
1M

R27
10K

LT1025

D
Title

Teledyne API

DCN:6161

Size
B
Date:
File:

Printed documents are uncontrolled

D-14

Number

Revision
04524

7/11/2011
Sheet 3of 3
N:\PCBMGR\..\04524-E_p3.schDoc Drawn By:
6

06873B DCN6388

Leads 05696b-1.Sch
Leads 05696b-1.Sch

Leads 05696b-2.Sch
Leads 05696b-2.Sch

A
Title
SCH, External Valve Interface PCA 05697

Printed Documents Are Uncontrolled
1

06873B DCN6388

Size

Number

05698

Date:
File:
2

Revision
B

8-Dec-2006
Sheet0 of 3
N:\PCBMGR\05696.leads.rear.panel.adapter.dn\Protel\05696.ddb
Drawn By:
6

D-15

DD_71

CB_32

CA_182

CN_643
JP1

1
3
2

+12V

+12a

2.70A

+ C2
1000

4 HEADER
D2

2.70A
F2

DD_62
D

+12b
D3
GRN

+ C1
1000

D4
GRN

D6
GRN

D5
GRN

IC_307
CN_497
RS_356

R1
1100

R2
1100

R4
1100

R3
1100

1
15
2
16
3
17
4
18
5
19
6
20
7
21
8
22
9
23
10
24
11
25
12
26
13
27
14
28

U1
FPFS2P103A

U2
FPFS2P103A

3
2
1

P1008
4

U3
FPFS2P103A

CN_617

U4
FPFS2P103A
5
6
7
8

5
6
7
8

JP2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Weidmuller152286

+12b

D7
GRN

D8
GRN

D10
GRN

D9
GRN

IMCV 1,5/14-G-3,81

3
2
1

4
U5
FPFS2P103A

U6
FPFS2P103A
5
6
7
8

U7
FPFS2P103A
5
6
7
8

U8
FPFS2P103A

5
6
7
8

R8
1100

R7
1100
3
2
1

R6
1100
3
2
1

R5
1100

5
6
7
8

A
DCN 4295

Printed Documents Are Uncontrolled
1

D-16

Title
SCH, External Valve Interface PCA 05697
Size

Number

05698

Date:
File:
2

Revision
B

8-Dec-2006
Sheet1 of 2
N:\PCBMGR\05696.leads.rear.panel.adapter.dn\Protel\05696.ddb
Drawn By:
6

06873B DCN6388

P1020 mates with positions 7 & 8 of J1020 on motherboard

P1020

J1020
1
2

AnalogOut4+
AnalogOut4-

HEADER 2
CN0000226

P1004

J1004

1
3
2
4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

IMCV 1,5/2-G-3,81
CN0000645

1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
7
17
8
18
9
19
10
20

10 HEADER
CN0000395
C

P1006

J1006
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
7
17
8
18
9
19
10
20

10 HEADER
CN0000395

IMCV 1,5/10-G-3,81
CN0000564

J1017

IMCV 1,5/10-G-3,81
CN0000564

P1017
SysOK+

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

12 HEADER
CN0000394
StatusReturn

DigGrnd

1
13
2
14
3
15
4
16
5
17
6
18
7
19
8
20
9
21
10
22
11
23
12
24

IMCV 1,5/12-G-3,81
CN0000565

A
Title
SCH, External Valve Interface PCA 05697

DCN 4295

Printed Documents Are Uncontrolled
1

06873B DCN6388

Size

Number

05698

Date:
File:
2

Revision
B

8-Dec-2006
Sheet2 of 2
N:\PCBMGR\05696.leads.rear.panel.adapter.dn\Protel\05696.ddb
Drawn By:
6

D-17

',*287
6+'1
',*,2

6+'1
',*,2

'>@
,2:
',*,2

'>@

'>@
,2:
',*,2

E3VFK

',*287
6+'1
'>@

'>@

6+'1
'>@

,2:
',*,2
',*,2

,25
',*,2

E3VFK

'>@
',*,2

'>@

',*,1
'>@
',*,2
E3VFK
6(1625,1

7(0308;
'$&08;
7(03
,2:
'$&
'$&
'$&

'>@
'$&9
'$&
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
6+'1

'>@

'>@
'$&9
'$&
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
6+'1

E3VFK
$1$,1
,25
9)5($'
'>@
9)352*
'$&08;
&+*$,1

'>@

,25
9)5($'
'>@
9)352*
'$&08;
&+*$,1

7(0308;
,2:
6+'1
95()
7&
7&
7&

E3VFK
$1$287
,2:
'>@
'$&9
&6'$&$
&6'$&%
'$&
'$&
'$&
'$&
6+'$&

'>@

,2:
'>@
'$&9
&6'$&$
&6'$&%
'$&
'$&
'$&
'$&
6+'$&

'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
:5'$&
95()
7&

E3VFK
VKHHW
E3VFK

'>@
,2:
,25
6+'$&
',*,2
',*,2
7(03
'$&9
:5'$&
9)352*
$

'>@

3&,)
'>@
,2:
,25
6+'$&
',*,2
',*,2
7(03
'$&9
:5'$&
9)352*

&+*$,1
9)5($'
6+'1
',*,2
',*,2
7&
6+'1
,&B5(6(7
,&B'59B567
,&B5(6(7
,&B'59B567

E3VFK
7LWOH
6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

D-18

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06873B DCN6388

9&&

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

*1'

9&&

35(
&/.
'
&/5

,2(1

06873B DCN6388

9&&

35(
&/.
'
&/5

,&B'59B567

5
5
. .

8$ +&
35(
&/.
'
&/5

4
4

,25
,2:

4
4

&6
5'
:5

'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%
'%

,&B5(6(7
9&&

6&/
6'$

,54

-3

'*1'
966

,'&+($'(5
-3

X)FHUDPLF
&
5
N

:',

6'$ '6
%/8(

8&
+&

6'$

+& ,&

/7&&6

7LWOH

1RWHV
7KLVVFKHPDWLFLVIRU3&$
7KLVVFKHPDWLFLVIRU3&%

6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

%/8(

56
5

6&/ '6
''

5(6(7

9&&

6&/

6+'$&

0,&52),7

,'&+($'(5

9&&
.%,17

-3

X)9

9&&

6&/

+&
,54

,1/,1(
73
73
-

.%,17
6'$
9&&

6+'1

0,&52),7

6+'1

8%
35(
&/.
'
&/5

3&)

&/.
,$&.
,17
$
5(6(7

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

5
N

,17
$

73 73 73

'*1'
6'$
9&&
6&/

6<6&/.

5
.

',
',
',
',
'2
'2
'2
'2
',
',
',
',
'2
'2
'2
'2

'6
/('5('VPW

3&&'

;

'2
'2
'2
'2
'2
'2
'2
'2
',
',
',
',
',
',
',
',

7&
-,72'&)2+0

9&&
9&&

9&&

,25
,2:

5
.

,&B5(6(7

,25
,2:

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

-3 ,'&+($'(5

VKRUWHGVOGUVLGH

$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

*
*

2&
&/.

51 .[

$''5 ['()$8/7
$''5 [-3,167$//('
3LQV VKRUWHGRQ3&%
-3
$(1

,2(1

&
+($'(5'()$8/7('
X)FHUDPLF

$+&*8

-3

,25

8
+&

,'&+($'(5

3 4

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

,2:

',*,2
',*,2
',*,2
7(03
'$&9
:5'$&
9)352*
&+*$,1
9)5($'

*
*

,2:

-3

9&&

',*,2

;&
;'
;(
;)

,17

%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

(1$%

<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<

9&&

$
$
$

$
$

127,167$//('
9&&

'>@

$
%
&
'

*1'
*1'
*1'

*1'
*1'
26&
9
%$/(
7&
'$&.
,54
,54
,54
,54
,54
6<6&/.
5()5(6+
'54
'$&.
'54
'$&.
,25
,2:
60(05
60(0:
.(<
9
(1';)5
9
'54
9
,54
9
5(6(7'59
*1'

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

$(1

5
N

-%
3&

$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

VKRUWHGVOGUVLGH

*1'
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$(1
,2&+5'<
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
,2&+(&.

-$
3&

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

D-19

5;
7;
56*1'

/('*51VPW
5
.

5
127,167$//('

/('*51

6:
6:6/,'(3'7

9&&

95(7 9

02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/(

02817,1*+2/(

9
07

02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/(

79
60'$/&&

02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/(

5;IRU&RP

79$55$<

'%0

'7(

127,167$//('

/('5('

02/(;

1&
5;'
7;'
1&
*1'
1&
576
&76
1&

7;IRU&RP

$8;&'&&32:(5&,1

127,167$//('

9
5(7
'*1'
9
9
$*1'
9
$*1'
(*1'
&+$6*1'

9&&

5
.

9&&

,1/,1(

5
N

'&(VLGHRIVZLWFKLVVLGHWRZDUGVSLQ

5;
576
7;
&76
56*1'
5;
576
7;
&76
56*1'

79
79$55$<
60'$/&&

5
.

/('5('

&RP56$

7;IRU&RP

576
&76

5;IRU&RP

&RP56%56

-
'%)(0$/(

02817,1*+2/(

9&&

'
0%56&7
'

X)97$17$/80
&

''B

X)97$17$/80

'' 5PXVWEH
ZLWKLQRI-

0%56&7
5

127,167$//('

7LWOH
6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

D-20

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06873B DCN6388

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

&6'$&$
&65$1*(
&6'$&%
&65$1*(

9&&

'$&
'$&
'$&
'$&

5
56

:
%
$*1'

9&&
'*1'

'$&5$1*( 2))6(7352*5$0

23$

8 '$&%,7
'287
&6
',1
&/.

92$
*1'
9&&
92%

62&.(78
%

23$8$

23$

6+'$&

:
%
$*1'

0%56&7

&
S)

,QVWDOO-IRU
P$RQWK
FKDQQHO

:
%
$*1'

&
S)

,QVWDOO5
5LIP$
RQWKFKDQQHO
QRWXVHG

23$8$
8%
5

&
8$

X)FHUDPLF

0,&52),7

'$&9

9&&

&
X)FHUDPLF

:
%
$*1'

23$8$

'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9

'$&9

0%56&7

23$8$

5
N

7LWOH

6L]H

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

06873B DCN6388

&
S)

&
9

'$&

&
S)

56
6+'1

&
S)

X)FHUDPLF
23$8$

'*1'

&
S)

5
5

'$&

'DQG'
0XVWEHORFDWHG
ZLWKLQRI8

&
S)

&6
6',
&/.
6'2

9&&

''B

'8$/'$&$
8 327',*,7$/

9&&

79$55$<

+($'(5,'&

&
X)FHUDPLF

'
&/.

9&&

&6'$&%
'
&/.

23$8$

X)FHUDPLF

:
%
$*1'

5
N

&
X)FHUDPLF

:
%
$*1'

95()

5 .

9 X)FHUDPLF

73 73

6+'$&

$1$/2*92/7$*( &855(172873876
-

*
)(%($'
7(50%/2&.

)(%($'

,'&

'$&
&

,'&

9&&
&
X)FHUDPLF

79$55$<

56
6+'1

'>@

,'&

&
9

23$8$

X)FHUDPLF
&6
6',
&/.
6'2

&6'$&$
&6'$&%

/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/

60'$/&&

2&
&/.

:
%
$*1'

'
&/.

&
8$

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

327',*,7$/

23$8$

62&.(78

X)FHUDPLF
'8$/'$&$

&
X)FHUDPLF

&/.

'$&%,7

'287 92$

&6
*1'

',1
9&&

&/. 92%

9&&

&6'$&$
'
&/.

:5'$&

,62/$7('0$237,21$/%2$5'6

,2:

'$&9

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI

1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

D-21

2(
&/.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

6(/

51
.[

9&&

%$6

5
.

''
'
%$6
'

9&&
&
X)FHUDPLF

'
'
'

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

8
+&

2(
&/.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

1&
96
1&
5()
1&
9,
2379
96
&26
&/.

X)FHUDPLF
9&&

3/$&(
2+0
5(6,6725$6
&/26($6
3266,%/(72
;$1';

D-22

;

0%+0+=

'%
5'0%<7(
'%
*1'
8
'%
7,(
7,(
'%
;LOLQ[&3/'
7',
706
7&.

7&
7,(
7,(
7,(
7,(
)5(4
7,(
7,(
9&&,2
*1'
7'2
6(/

9&&

&
X)FHUDPLF
6(/

,25

6$
6%
6&
67$57

9)5($'

06%
0,'
/6%

$
7LWOH

'DWH
)LOH

;

2UFDG%

6L]H

&
X)FHUDPLF

5
.

9&&

-,72'&$$(0+=
&

'
'
'

X)97$17$/80

$'.3

5
.

&
X)97$17$/80

5
.

X)
9

,2:

&
X)

. 56

8
+&

73
9)352*

5
.

'>@

%$6

5DQG5UHGXFHWKHJDLQ
IRUDQDORJLQSXWVE\VR
WKDWZHFDQUHDGVOLJKWO\
DERYHIXOOVFDOHWRSUHYHQW
RYHUIORZRI$'&UHDGLQJ

&203
&203
$*1'
*1'
)287

X)9

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

23287
23
23
9,
9,

&$B

6+'1
%

X)9
5

9&&

'
'
'
'
9&&
96
*1'
96

9&&

5
.

73
8$

6
6
6
6
,1
,1
,1
,1

,2:

95()&/,3

&+*$,1

8
'*'<

9
9&&

92/7$*(5()

0&+,3
5

95()

8%
23$

1&
1&
1&
9,1
9287 15
75,0 *1'

5LQGXFHVDQ
RIIVHWLQDQDORJ
VLJQDOWRJLYHD

OLYH
IRUVHQVRUV
ZLWKRUVOLJKWO\
QHJDWLYHRXWSXW

X)FHUDPLF
&

&
X)FHUDPLF

23$

X)9FHUDPLF

95()
1&
1&
(1%
$
$
$
$

5'/6%
'%
'%
7,(
7,(
7,(
'%
9)&/.
,&/.
9&&,17
7,(

5'06%
7,(
'%
9&&,17
,25
*1'
6$
6%
6&
5($'
67$57

*1'

X)FHUDPLF

51 .[

966

X)97$17$/80

$'&95()

$108;

966

287

&+
&+
&+
&+

51 .[

,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1

&
X)FHUDPLF

&+
&+
&+
&+

$1$/2*,13876

73
73
95() $*1'

&+
&+
&+
&+

'$&08;

9 9

7(0308;

,&
23$8$

-
0,&52),7

&+
&+
&+
&+
&+
&+

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31
1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06873B DCN6388

9$1$

%<3$66&$36
0867%(:,7+,1
2)7+(
5(*8/$725
,1387287387
3,16

,1
287
212)) 1&
*1'

&
X)97$17$/80

/3,0
&
X)

'>@

9&&

7(0308;
&
'
'
'

6+'1

7(03

,2:

,QVWDOO;7WKURXJKKROH
25;760'
EXWQRWERWK

8
0$;&:1
287
966
*1'
9
(1%
$
$
$
56
:5

,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1
,1

7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5

5
.

7+(50,67(5
;7

9$1$

7+(50,67(5

5
.

7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5
7+(50,67(5

0,&52),7

99
8
'$&08;
& X)FHUDPLF
9&&

X)FHUDPLF

5 .

'
'
'
'
9&&
96
*1'
96

6
6
6
6
,1
,1
,1
,1

'*'<

51 .[

'$&
'$&
'$&
'$&

'$&9
'$&9
'$&9
'$&9

$
7LWOH
6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

06873B DCN6388

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

D-23

&21752/,13876

9&&

5 5 5

/
/
/

S)9
S)9

5 5 5

S)9

3ODFHWKHVHWHUPLQDWLRQUHVLVWRUVDWWKHHQGRIHDFKGDWD
OLQH(DFKGDWDOLQH
VKRXOGEHODLGRXWDVDGDLV\FKDLQWKHVLJQDOSDVVLQJ
IURPRQH,&WRWKHQH[W

9&&

/ )(%($'

8
36

'>@

S)
(;7B9B287

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<

$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

',*,2
,25

7(50%/2&.

/ )(%($'

(;7(51$/
&21752/
,1
$

*
*

/
/
/

8
36

51
.[

51
[

51
.[

)(%($'
S)

(;7B9B287

$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$

6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

D-24

,25

',*,2

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'>@

$
7LWOH

<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<

7(50%/2&.

/
&

/
/
/
/

(;7(51$/
&21752/
,1
%

8
36

*
*

[

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06873B DCN6388

9&&

',*,2
,2:

6+'1

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

8
+&
2(
&/.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

'>@

',*,7$/2873876

51
[

&
S)
S)

/
/
/
/ )(%($'

)(%($'

)

9&&

5(6(77$%/()86($9
'

7(50%/2&.

$67$7862873876

/
)(%($'
(;7B9B287

',2'(6&+277.<

$
7LWOH
6L]H
2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

06873B DCN6388

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

D-25

9&&

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

'>@

&
S)

/
/
/
/ )(%($'

/ )(%($'
&2B(;7B5(7

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

'
.

',2'(6&+277.<
4

/
/
/
/ )(%($'

5(/$<63'7

',2'(6&+277.<
5

5(/$<63'7

'
',2'(6&+277.<

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

2(
&/.

,2:

8
+&

(;7(51$/&211(&725
62/'(56,'(

',*,2

.
62

5(/$<63'7

',2'(6&+277.<

$
7LWOH
6L]H

95(7

2UFDG%
'DWH
)LOH

D-26

(;7(51$/
5($53$1(/
$/$502873876

7(50%/2&.

5(/$<63'7

.
62

6+'1

&21752/2873876

7(50%/2&.

51
[
8

/
/
/

/ )(%($'

9&&

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'

2(
&/.

,2:

',*,2

8
+&

6+'1

',*,7$/2873876

51
[

6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31

1XPEHU

5HYLVLRQ
%

0D\
6KHHWRI
1?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE
'UDZQ%\

06873B DCN6388

MT1

MT2

MT3

CHASSIS

MT4

MT5

CHASSIS CHASSIS
TP3

MT6

MT7

CHASSIS

MT8

MT9

SDA

CHASSIS CHASSIS

SDA

TP1

TP4
3.3V

SCL
R6

10K
10K
DithB U/D

10K
L/R

10K
10K
10K
aHSync aVsync Mode

10
9
8
7
6

5
4
3
2
1

TP2

FBMH3216HM501NT
FB2

SCL

0039300100

aR2
aR4
aR6

aB2
aB4
aB6

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29

FBMH3216HM501NT
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30

aG3
aG5
aG7

aB3
aB5
aB7
aDCLK

R21
jumper

Default:R21B

bDCLK
CLK

BACKL

aData Enable

C2
0.0022
CA_112

aR3
aR5
aR7

B30B-PHDSS (LF)(SN)

C1
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

aG2
aG4
aG6

3.3V

R7
100K
C7
1.0
GMK107BJ105KA

+5V
5
4
3
2
1

A
FB16
FBMH3216HM501NT
FB17

0039300100
FBMH3216HM501NT

FBMH3216HM501NT
5V-GND
5V-GND

52
51
i BackLightDrive
R46
NI

R47
0

R48
NI

3.3V

+5V

JP2

Internal Dithering
0 = Enable
1 = Disable

1
3

Scan Direction
U/D L/R Scan Dir.
0
1
UD, LR
1
0
DU, RL
0
0
UD, RL
1
1
DU, LR
(1 = H, 0 = L)

FB4
5V-GND
J8
G0
G2
G4
R0
R2
R4
B0
B2
B4
DEN

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30

FBMH3216HM501NT

NI
G1
G3
G5

4
6

7
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DEN 9
10
11
12
B5 13
B4 14
B3 15
16
B2 17
B1 18
B0 19
20
G5 21
G4 22
G3 23
24
G2 25
G1 26
G0 27
28
R5 29
R4 30
R3 31
32
R2 33
R1 34
R0 35
36
37
38
39
40

10
11
12

R1
R3
R5

13
14
15
Mode

B1
B3
B5

C3
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL
0 R28

B30B-PHDSS (LF)(SN)

DCLK

FB3

J14
10
9
8
7
6

+5V

FB1

J2
50
Bklght+
49
48
Bklght47
46
45
Vcom
44
Mode
43
aData Enable 42
aVsync
41
aHSync
40
aB7
39
aB7
aB6
38
aB6
aB5
37
aB5
aB4
36
aB4
aB3
35
aB3
aB2
34
aB2
33
aB1
32
aB0
aG7
31
aG7
aG6
30
aG6
aG5
29
aG5
aG4
28
aG4
aG3
27
aG3
aG2
26
aG2
25
aG1
24
aG0
aR7
23
aR7
aR6
22
aR6
aR5
21
aR5
aR4
20
aR4
aR3
19
aR3
aR2
18
aR2
17
aR1
16
aR0
15
14
13
L/R
12
U/D
11
10
Vgh
9
Vgl
8
AVdd
aReset
7
6
Vcom
5
DithB
4
3
2
1

C4
0.0022
CA_112

16
17
18
6X3 Jumper

C5
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

C6
0.0022
CA_112

5V-GND

JP3

L/R

GM800480X-70-TTX2NLW
CL586-0529-2

U/D

1
3

4
6

7
9

10
11
12

B
NI

41
42
CL586-0527-7

4X3 Jumper

Make
FEMA
Data Image
United Radiant Tech.

Model
GM800480W
FG0700A0DSWBG01
UMSH-8173MD-1T

JP2
1-2, 4-5, 7-8, 10-11, 13-14, 16-17
3-2, 6-5, 9-8, 12-11, 15-14, 18-17
2-3, 4/ 5/ 6 NC, 7/ 8/ 9 NC, 10-11, 13-14, 16/ 17/ 18 NC

JP3
1-2, 4-5, 7-8, 10-11
2-3, 5-6, 8-9, 11-12
2-3, 5-6, 8-9, 11-12

D
Title

GUI Interface
Size
B
Date:
File:

06873B DCN6388

Number

Revision
06698

6/24/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P1.R3.schdoc

D
Sheet 1 of 4
Drawn By: RT
6

D-27

A
TP5
AVdd: +10.4V
R8

3.3V

R13
9.76

D3
BAT54S

R14
2.0

C16

0.33
CAT4139TD-GT3

FDV305N
1

D
S

21
C18
0.33

R16
464K

R18
80.6K

5V-GND

3.3V

8
13
22

BACKL

C35
0.1
R25
10K

R26
10K

14
15

SCL
SDA

AO
A1
A2
SCL
SDA

P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
INT

4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13

FBP
VGH

PGND

VCOM
CTRL

C19
0.33

R17
806K

TP9

HTSNK

Vgh: +16V

3.3V

R31
A
B

C22
24pf

C23

C24

C25

C26

43pf

0.1

TP10
Vcom: +4V

C27
1.0
GMK107BJ105KA

Default:R31B

R22 jumper

Backlight Brightness Control
R22
R27
Control Mode
Remote – Video Port
NO
A
Remote – I2C
YES
B
Fixed Bright (default)
NO
B

S1
S2
SW_46

Vcom

3.3V

Default: NI

Maint_SW
Lang_Select

R19
66.5K

SW_46
Opt. Main Sw

Opt. Lang. Sw.

R31
NO
NO
B

PCF8574

+5V

CPI

PGND

R23
33K

10K

Vss

1
2
3

TPS65150PWP

Vgh

R27
jumper
Default:R27B

5V-GND
U3

C12
TMK325BJ226MM
22uf/25V

D4
BAT54S

C17
0.33

DRVP

GND

C21
470pf

R24
10K

Vdd

COMP

R11
806K

R15
100K

FBN

ADJ

C20
0.220

+5V

C13
24pf

SUP
FB

REF

GMK107BJ105KA
C15
1.0

DRVN

FDLY

Vgl

Bklght-

5V-GND

R12

DLY2

GND

SHDN

1
3

K A

MBRM120LT1G

DLY1

Vin

3.9uH

Vgl: -7V

C11
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

TP7

C14
1.0
GMK107BJ105KA

VIN

TP8

R10
10K

AVdd

Bklght+

22uH
C10
4.7uF/16V

487K

CD214A-B140LF
D1

L1
C9
4.7uF/16V

C8 0.001

+5V

309K

TP6

5V-GND
5V-GND

D
Title

GUI Interface
Size
B
Date:
File:
1

D-28

Number

Revision
06698

6/24/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P2.R3.schdoc

D
Sheet 2 of 4
Drawn By: RT
6

06873B DCN6388

+5V

VBUS
DD+
ID
GND

USB-B-MINI
6

CHASSIS

SHTDN

A
JP4

C28
1uF

C29
470pf

C30
1uF

5V-GND

3.3V

U4
D_N
D_P

USB3.3V

3.3V-REG
OUT

1
2
3
4
5

GND

FB13
C38
USB3.3V

J11

SDA
R32

5V-GND

5V-GND
1
2
3
4

0.1uF
R39
100K

5V-GND

R33
100K

4
3
2
1

8
7
6
5

C39

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

VBUS
USB3.3V
FBMH3216HM501NT

CHASSIS

R36
12K

GND

SUS/R0
+3.3V
USBUSB+
XTL2
CLK-IN
1.8VPLL
RBIAS
+3.3PLL

C34
0.1

+5V

PWR3
OCS2
PWR2
3.3VCR
U8
+1.8V
USB2514-AEZG
OCS1
PWR1
TEST
+3.3V

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

CHASSIS

C32
1uF

5V-GND

C41

FB9

0.1

1
2
3
4

USB3.3V

C33
0.1uF

R38
5V-GND

DS2
GRN

C44
1uF

F2
+5V

5V-GND

0.1uF

5V-GND
1
2
3
4

FB11

8
7
6
5

+5V
FB12 0.5A/6V

5V-GND

0.1uF

C45

5V-GND

D
Title

GUI Interface
Size
B
Date:
File:

06873B DCN6388

USB-A_VERT
J6

Configuration Select
Mode
R32
R45
Default
A
A
MBUS
B
B
Install 100K for A, 0 Ohm for B

5V-GND

4
GND
3
D+
2
D1
+5V

U11

C36
0.1uF

5V-GND

C42

CHASSIS

5V-GND

USB-A_VERT
J5

FB10 0.5A/6V

USB3.3V
5V-GND

4
GND
3
D+
2
D1
+5V

C60
0.1uF

D4_P
D4_N
D3_P
D3_N
D2_P
D2_N

R37
100K

5V-GND

8
7
6
5

5V-GND

C40

5V-GND

D1_N
D1_P

C43
0.1uF

0.5A/6V
0.1uF

5V-GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

5V-GND

B
USB-A_R/A
J4

5V-GND
37

0.1
C59

FB5

CHASSIS

+5V

0.1

GND
D+
D+5V
F1

FB8

27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19

R20
49.9

FB7

R45

5V-GND

SCL
SDA

C31

BUS +5

SCL

USB3.3V

2
1

5
4
3
2
1

VBUS-DET
RESET
HS-IND/S1
SCL/S0
+3.3V
SDA/R1
OCS4
PWR4
OCS3

CHS

-V

5V-GND

R30
100K

5V-GND

70553-004

+5V

OUT

D1D1+
D2D2+
+3.3V
D3D3+
D4D4+

CHS

R35
100K

6
7
8
9
10

GND
LL
GND
RL
D+ SHLD
DRT
+5
LT

TSHARC-12C
A1

+V
E
24MHZ

DS1

GND

R29

To old TScreen
J12

1
2
3
4
5

0.01uF

U5
4

70553-004

YEL

C37

To new TScreen

LL
RL
SD
RT
LT

1uF

5V-GND

1
2
3
4
5

JP5

R34
100K

J10
RT
RL
SD
LL
LT

Number

Revision
06698

6/24/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P3.R3.schdoc

D
Sheet 3 of 4
Drawn By: RT
6

D-29

A
3.3V

TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE CIRCUITRY ( TBD)
FB15
FBMH3216HM501NT

C61
0.1

J13
J15

CHASSIS

7
2
9
4
5
6
3
8
1
12
11
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
G3168-05000202-00

Y0_P1

0 R49

Y0_N1
Y1_P1

0 R50

0 R51

Y1_N1 0 R52
Y2_N1
0 R54
Y2_P1
CLKOUT_N1
CLKOUT_P1

2
U6

Y0_P
Y0_N
Y1_P
Y1_N
Y2_N
Y2_P

6
7
8

0 R53
9

0 R55

9
8
11
10
14
15

11
12

0 R56

bDCLK

13
14

CLKOUT_N
CLKOUT_P

R40
3.3V
10K

FB18
3.3V

R41
100

R42
100

R43
100

28
36
42
48

R44
100

12
20

FBMH3216HM501NT

7
13
18

C62
FB6

19
21

0.1
FB14
Vcc PIN 28
C46
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

23
16
17
22

HEADER-7X2

Option

MH1
MH2
MH3
MH4

Vcc PIN 36

Vcc PIN 42

Vcc PIN 48

Y0P
Y0M
Y1P
Y1M
Y2M
Y2P

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20

CLKOUT
CLKINM
CLKINP
SHTDN
NC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
LVDS/VCC
PLLVCC
LVDSGND
LVDSGND
LVDSGND
PLLGND
PLLGND

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

24
26
27
29
30
31
33
34
35
37
39
40
41
43
45
46
47
1
2
4
5

aR2
aR3
aR4
aR5
aR6
aR7
aG2
aG3
aG4
aG5
aG6
aG7
aB2
aB3
aB4
aB5
aB6
aB7

BACKL
aData Enable
NOTE:
To receive backlight control (BACKL) from CPU board
when using ICOP_0096 LVDS Transmitter.
The connection from pin 42 on the TTL video connector
(VSYNC) to U1-23 must be broken and connected to
pin 43.

3
25
32
38
44

SN75LVDS86A

C49

C47

C50

C48

C51

C53

C52

C54

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

C
C55

C56

C57

C58

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

D
Title

GUI Interface
Size
B
Date:
File:
1

D-30

Number

Revision
06698

6/24/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P4.R3.schdoc

D
Sheet 4 of 4
Drawn By: RT
6

06873B DCN6388

MT1

MT2

From ICOP CPU

CHASSIS-0 CHASSIS

+3.3V

VAD6
VAD8
VAD10
B

VBD2
VBD4
VBD6
VBD10

VAD6
VAD7
VAD8
VAD9
VAD10
VAD11
VBD10
VBD11
VAD0
VAD1
VAD2
VAD3
VBD2
VBD3
VBD4
VBD5
VBD6
VBD7

44
45
47
48
1
3
4
6
7
9
10
12
13
15
16
18
19
20
22
BACKL 23
VBDE 25

Header 22X2
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43

VAD0
VAD2

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44

To LCD Display

VAD1
VAD3
VAD7
VAD9
VAD11

VBD3
VBD5
VBD7
VBD11
22.1

VBGCLK
VBDE

5
11
17
24
46

R1
10K

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

Y0M
Y0P
Y1M
Y1P
Y2M
Y2P
CLKIN
CLKOUTM
CLKOUTP
SHTDN
NC
NC
VCC
VCC
VCC
LVDSVCC
PLLVCC
VLDSGND
VLDSGND
VLDSGND
PLLGND
PLLGND

41
40
39
38
35
34

Y0_N
Y0_P
Y1_N
Y1_P
Y2_N
Y2_P

J1
Y2_P
Y2_N
Y1_P

CLKIN
26
33 CLKOUT_N
32 CLKOUT_P
27

Y1_N
Y0_P
+3.3V

Y0_N
CLKOUT_P

14
43

CLKOUT_N

2
8
21
37
29
42
36
31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

30
28

MH1
MH2
MH3
MH4

CHASSIS

+3.3V

G3168-05000101-00

SN75LVDS84A
C

+3.3V

BACKL
J3
Y0_P
Y1_P
Y2_N
CLKOUT_N
+3.3V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
11 12
13 14

Y0_N
Y1_N
Y2_P
CLKOUT_P

Header 7X2

C1
22uF/6.3V
JMK316BJ226KL

C2
0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.1

C10

0.01

0.1

C11

Title

0.01
Size
A
Date:
File:

06873B DCN6388

LVDS, Transmitter Board

Number

Revision
B

06882
5/7/2010
N:\PCBMGR\..\06882-P1-R0.SchDoc

Sheet 1 of 1
Drawn By: RT
4

D-31

R19

.01/2KV

A
75

R20

C18

CHASSIS

R13

J1
12

SP3050

11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

16
15
14
13
10

ATX+
ATXARX+
LED0LED0+
ARXLED1+
LED1-

2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7

STRAIGHT THROUGH ETHERNET

DF11-8DP-2DS(24)
CHASSIS

CONN_RJ45_LED

TP1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

+5V

SDA

Header 8

+5V-ISO

P3
U8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

SDA

SCL

4
12
11
1

R10
2.2k

Header 8

VDD1

VDD2

LME0505
GND1

GND2

5
14
13
7

+5V-OUT

TP2

L1
47uH
C

C28
4.7uF

R16
1k

C17
100uF

TP3
ISO-GND

DS3
GRN
GND
GND
Title

Auxiliary I/O Board (PWR-ETHERNET)
Size

DCN:6092

PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED
D-32

Date:
File:
3

Number

Revision
B

06731
5/6/2011
Sheet 1 of 3
N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-1_ETHERNET.SchDoc
Drawn By: RT
4

06873B DCN6388

V-BUS

C19
0.1uF
R11
2.2k

C22
0.1uF

3.3V

C24

DS4

6
9
11

12
J4
D+
D-

3
2
1
4

4
5
7
8

V-BUS

C23
0.1uF

GND

18
19
20
21
22

R12
4.75k

GRN

D+
DVBUS
GND

VDD
RST
SUSPEND

TXD
RTS
DTR

SUSPEND

RXD
CTS
DSR
DCD
RI
GND

D+ U10
DVREG-I
VBUS

17
16
15
14
13
10

CHASSIS

3
C

28
24
1
2

26
24
28

TXD-A
RTS-A
DTR-A

14
13
12

25
23
27
1
2
3

RXD-A
CTS-A
DSR-A
DCD-A
RI-A

19
18
17
16
15

U11

USB

C20
0.1uF

4.7uF

CP2102

21
22

GND
U9

C1+
C1C2+
C2-

VCC
ONLINE
VV+

TI1
TI2
TI3

TO1
TO2
TO3

RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
RO5

RI1
RI2
RI3
RI4
RI5

STAT
SHTDN

RO2
GND

26
23
3
27

GND
J3

9 TXD-B
10 RTS-B
11 DTR-B

1
7
5
9
4
8
3
2
10
6

RXD-B
CTS-B
DSR-B
DCD-B
RI-B

4
5
6
7
8
20
25

C26
1uF

RXD
CTS
DSR
N/C
TXD
RTS
DTR
DCD
RI
GND

DF11-10DP-2DS(24)
0
R14

SP3243EU

C25
0.1uF

C21
0.1uF

GND

0
R15

NUP2202W1

GND

MT1

MT2
MT-HOLE

CHASSIS

MT-HOLE

CHASSIS
Title

Auxiliary I/O Board (USB)
Size

DCN:6092

PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED
06873B DCN6388

Date:
File:
3

Number

Revision
B

06731
5/6/2011
N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-2_USB.SchDoc

Sheet 2 of 3
Drawn By: RT
4

D-33

+5V-ISO

R9
4.99

A
+5V-ADC

C27
4.7uF

AGND

C2
0.1uF

C3
0.1uF

C5
0.1uF

C6
0.1uF

C7
0.1uF
U1
AN-CH0
AN-CH1
AN-CH2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B

C4
0.1uF

C1
0.1uF

AN-CH3
AN-CH4
AN-CH5
AN-CH6
AN-CH7

ANALOG INPUT

C8
0.1uF

1
2
3

C9
0.1uF

4
7
8
11
22
24
14

U3
6
5
4

1
2
3

6
5
4
SMS12

SMS12

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23

CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7

1
2
13

VDD
VDD
SHTDN

ISO-GND

9
5
10
12
6

SDA
SCL
A2
A1
A0

NC
NC
REF
NC
REF-AJ
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
AGND DGND

ISO-GND

27
26

28
25
3

C10
4.7uF

C11
0.01uF

C30
1nF

MAX1270BCAI+
TP4

C15
.01/2KV

C29
1nF

AGND

ISO-GND
ISO-GND

AGND

49.9

R17
+5V-ISO

CHASSIS

49.9
+5V

R18

+5V-ISO

TP5

+5V-ISO

TP6

C13
0.1uF

C14
0.1uF

R5
2.2k

R6
2.2k

U5
14
15
12
13
10
11
16
9

GND
SDA

SCL

NC7WZ17P6X
6
U4A

VDD2
NC
SDA2
NC
NC
SCL2
GND2
GND2

VDD1
NC
SDA1
NC
NC
SCL1
GND1
GND1

TP8

3
2
5
4
8
6
1
7

ISO-GND

R3
1K

R4
1K

SDA
DS1

SCL
DS2

BLU

TP7

C12
0.1uF

ISO-GND
ISO-GND
3

4
U4B
NC7WZ17P6X

ADuM2250
Title

GND

Size

DCN:6092

PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED

Date:
File:

D-34

Auxiliary I/O Board (ADC)

ISO-GND

Number

Revision
B

06731
5/6/2011
N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-3_ADC.SchDoc

Sheet 3 of 3
Drawn By: RT
4

06873B DCN6388

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : 
Create Date                     : 2012:05:09 12:54:19-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2012:05:09 13:56:33-07:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 9.1 for Word
Metadata Date                   : 2012:05:09 13:56:33-07:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.4.2 (Windows)
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Title                           : 
Document ID                     : uuid:fe3a4fa6-ea3d-4f3c-9214-44b4b3b56867
Instance ID                     : uuid:885edc8a-487f-4cf9-9752-88631e32a97c
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Page Count                      : 392

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Teledyne Microphone T700 Users Manual

T700 to the manual 9c770034-caf1-4867-8b1e-24bde634536b

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation